Home
Transition from MELSEC-AnS/QnAS (Small Type) Series to Q Series
Contents
1. Item A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA Compatibility replacement Number of analog input 2 channels module 4 channels module points 10 to 0 to 10VDC 10 to 10VDC Voltage Analog Input resistance value 1MQ Input resistance value 1MQ input 20 to 0 to 20mADC 0 to 20mADC Current 3 A Input resistance value 250Q Input resistance value 2500 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 96 to 4095 4096 to 4095 When 1 4000 is set 4096 to 4095 1096 to 4595 Digital output When 1 8000 is set 8192 to 8191 High resolution mode 384 to 16383 288 to 12287 When 1 12000 is set 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 3288 to 13787 Digital output value Normal resolution High resolution Analog with gain SV 20mA Analog mode mode input offset OV 4mA 8 input range Digital Maximum Digital Maximum 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 Men resolution Min resolution 10V 4000 8000 12000 28 5V 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 625mV A resolution other 2 20mA 2000 4000 6000 0to 16000 than 1 4000 of OV 0 to 5V 4000 1 25mV Oto 0 416mV the AnS series AmA 0 0 0 1 to 5V 1 0mV 12000 0 333mV and Q series characteristics 5 5V 5 4000 dicte requires ne 2000 4000 6000 5 Q 12 5 10 to 10V to 4000 2 5mV 0 625 s
2. 0 A D D A conversion enable disable setting 200 400 600 A D conversion enable disable setting R W 1 A D conversion averaging setting 1 201 401 601 Averaging process method setting R W 2 CH1 averaging time count setting 2 202 402 eo2 Averaging process time number of times setting 3 CH2 averaging time count setting 3 203 403 603 4 CH3 output upper limit value setting to to to to Systemarea CH3 output lower limit value setting R W 9 209 409 609 6 Simple loop control type setting DEP D conversion scaling enable disable R W setting 7 Constant A setting 11 211 411 611 A D conversion scaling lower limit value R W 8 Constant B setting 12 212 412 612 conversion scaling upper limit value R W 9 Constant setting 13 213 413 613 Shifting amount to conversion value R W 10 CH3 digital value setting 14 214 414 614 11 CH1 A D conversion digital value to to to to System area 42 CH2A D conversion digital value 19 219 419 619 13 Simple loop control output calculation value R 20 220 420 620 Input signal error detection setting R W 14 Resolution setting 21 221 421 621 Input signal error detection setting value R W 15 A D conversion completed flag 22 222 422 622 16 Error code
3. 0 Present value Preset value settin O R W valu 1 H 1 33 2 Counter function selection count L 2 34 L Present value R 3 value H 35 4 Pulse input mode setting 4 36 TV 0 Coincidence output point set No 1 5 Counter function selection setting 5 37 H RW Preset value settin 2 Coincidence output point set No 2 D valu i 7 a H 7 39 EP H 8 0 8 40 Overflow detection flag R Ring counter value setting 9 H 9 41 Counter function selection setting RW 10 Sampling periodic time setting 10 42 Sampling periodic setting 11 Write data error code 11 43 Sampling periodic counter flag 12 44 L 2 Latch count value 12 to 28 CH1 limit switch output data setting 13 45 H 14 46 L Sampling count value 15 47 H R 29 to 45 CH2 limit switch output data setting 16 48 7 L Periodic pulse count previous value 17 49 H 18 50 L E Periodic pulse count present value 46 to 62 CH3 limit switch output data setting R W 19 51 H 20 52 E L Ring counter minimum value 21 53 H RW 63 to 79 CH4 limit switch output data setting 22 54 L Ring counter maximum value 23 55 H won 24 to 56 to uu 80 to 96 CH5 limit switch output data setting 31 63 System area Use prohibited 97 to 113 CH6 li
4. Device Device 4 Device Device Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No XO WDT error flag YO XO Module ready YO X1 A D conversion READY Y1 X1 Y1 X2 Error flag V2 X2 Y2 X3 X3 Use prohibited 4 Y4 4 Y4 _ Use prohibited X5 Y5 X5 Y5 X6 Y6 X6 Y6 High resolution mode XT Y7 X7 YT status flag X8 Y8 X8 Warming output signal Y8 Operating condition Operating condition Y9 X9 I Y9 setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode User range writing XA YA Use prohibited XA YA flag request Channel change XB YB XB YB Channel change request completed flag Input signal error 2 XC YC XC Use prohibited detection signal Maximum value Maximum value XD YD XD minimum value reset YD minimum value reset completed flag request Use prohibited A D conversion m XE ME XE YE Use prohibited completed flag XF YF Error flag YF Error clear request X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error reset X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Use prohibited X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E 1 Y1F 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the
5. Cd 1 Clock data setting hour 1100 Cd 2 Clock data setting minute second 1101 Cd 3 Clock data writing 1102 Cd 4 Target axis 1103 Cd 5 Positioning data No 1104 Cd 6 Write pattern 1105 Cd 7 Read write request 1106 Cd 8 Read write positioning data I F 1108 to 1137 Cd 9 Flash ROM write request 1138 1900 Cd 10 Parameter initialization request 1139 1901 Cd 11 Positioning start No 1150 1200 1250 1500 1600 1700 Cd 12 Axis error reset 1151 1201 1251 1502 1602 1702 Cd 13 Restart command 1152 1202 1252 1503 1603 1703 Cd 14 M code OFF request 1153 1203 1253 1504 1604 1704 1154 1204 1254 1506 1606 1706 Ad New value 1155 1205 1255 1507 1607 1707 1156 1206 1256 1514 1614 1714 Cd 16 New speed value 1157 1207 1257 1515 1615 1715 Cd 17 Speed change request 1158 1208 1258 1516 1616 1716 Cd 18 Positioning operation speed override 1159 1209 1259 1513 1613 1713 1160 1210 1260 1518 1618 1718 Cd 19W0S speed 1161 1211 1261 1519 1619 1719 Cd 20 Speed position switching enable flag 1163 1213 1263 1528 1628 1728 Cd 21 Speed position switching control movement amount 1164 1214 1264 1526 1626 1726 change register 1165 1215 1265 1527 1627 1727 Cd 22 Manual pulse generator enable flag 1167 1217 1267 1524 1624 1724 1168 1218 1268 1522 1622 1722 Cd 23 Manual pulse generator 1 pulse input magnification 1169 1219 1269 1523 1623 1723 Cd 24 O
6. ibility replacement Number of analog 1 channel module 2 channels module output points When 1 4000 is set Voltage 4000 to 4000 Current 0 to 4000 Normal resolution mode 96 to 4095 4096 to 4095 D When 1 8000 is set 1096 to 4595 Digital input 3 O Voltage 8000 to 8000 Current O to 8000 High resolution mode 384 to 16383 288 to 12287 When 1 12000 is set 16384 to 16383 3288 to 13787 Voltage 12000 to 12000 Current 0 to 12000 ta 10 to 0 to 10VDC 10 to 10VDC Analog External load resistance value 2kQ to 1MQ External load resistance value 1 to 1MQ output cuen 0 to 20mADC 0 to 20mADC o External load resistance value 0 to 600Q External load resistance value 0 to 600Q Digital input value Analog output Normal resolution High resolution Voltage Current Analog mode mode gt cm rm input Digital Digital 1 4000 1 8000 42000 nad B a x Naimu 2 value value 3 resolution resolution 4000 8000 12000 10V 20mA vee Neue Ot 2000 4000 6000 5V 12mA 0 to 10V 2 5mV M 0 625mV A resolution T 0 to 16000 characteristics 0 0 0 0 4mA A other than 1 Oto5V 4000 1 25mV Oto 0 416mV eel Tto 5V 1 0mV 12000 0 333mV OOO tiet 4000 8000 12000 10V series and Q S _ gt 1 Voltage output with the offset OV and gain 10 to 10V 4000 2 5mV to 0 625mV iin Ms 10V factory defa
7. Address _ Address Name Read write Name Read write decimal decimal 0 A D conversion enable disable setting R W 0 Conversion enable disable setting 1 Error code 1 CH1 Time count averaging setting 2 Disconnection detection flag R 2 CH2 Time count averaging setting R W 9 Out of measurement range flag CH3 averaging setting 4 4 CH4 Time count averaging setting 5 5 6 M 6 E 7 System area Use prohibited 7 System area Use prohibited 2 8 8 9 9 Averaging processing specification R W 10 CH1 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 10 Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 11 CH1 Measured temperature value 12 CH3 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value R 13 CHA Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit R 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 14 CH5 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 14 CH4 Measured temperature value 15 CH6 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 15 to 18 System area Use prohibited 16 CH7 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 19 Error code R 17 CH8 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 20 Setting range 18 System area Use prohibited _ 21 to 46 age area Use prohibited 19 47 Warning output enable disable setting R W 20 CH1 Scaling value 48 Warning output flag 21 CH2 Scaling value 49 Disconnection detection flag 22 CH3 Scaling value 50 CH1 Scaling
8. Device Device Device Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No WDT error flag Y0 Module ready YO Use prohibited A1S62DA detection CH1 Output enable X1 D A conversion READY Y1 Y1 disable flag CH2 Output enable 2 Error flag Y Y2 disable flag X3 Y3 Use prohibited Y3 4 Y4 Y4 X5 5 5 X6 Y6 Y6 Use prohibited XT YT YT High resolution mode X8 Y8 T Y8 Use prohibited status flag Operating condition Operating condition x9 Y9 Y9 setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode User range writing XA YA YA flag request Channel change XB YB YB _ Channel change request completed flag Set value change Set value change XC YC YC completed flag request Synchronous output Synchronous output XD YD YD mode flag request XE YE Use prohibited YE Use prohibited XF Use prohibited YF Error flag YF Error clear request CH1 D A conversion X10 Y10 output enable flag CH2 D A conversion X11 Y11 output enable flag X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 Use prohibited X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 Error reset X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C Use prohibited X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence p
9. 0 Analog output enable disable channel 0 D A conversion enable disable 1 CH1 digital value 1 CH1 Digital value 2 CH2 digital value 2 CH2 Digital value 9 CH3 digital value 3 CH3 Digital value 4 digital value R W 4 CH4 Digital value R W 5 CH5 digital value 5 CH5 Digital value 6 CH6 digital value 6 CH6 Digital value 7 CH7 digital value 7 CH7 Digital value 8 CH8 digital value 8 CH8 Digital value 9 System area Use prohibited 9 System area Use prohibited _ 10 CH1 set value check code 10 11 CH2 set value check code 11 CH1 Set value check code 12 CH3 set value check code 12 CH2 Set value check code 13 CH4 set value check code R 13 CH3 Set value check code 14 CH5 set value check code 14 CH4 Set value check code 15 CH6 set value check code 15 CH5 Set value check code 16 CH7 set value check code 16 CH6 Set value check code R 17 CH8 set value check code CH7 Set value check code CH8 Set value check code Error code Setting range CH1 to CH4 Setting range CH5 to CH8 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Offset gain setting mode Gain specification R W Offset gain adjustment value specification System area Use prohibited Mode switching setting R W System area Use prohibited CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH3 Industrial shipment
10. Device Signal name Signal name No Module ready YO Use prohibited CH1 Offset gain setting Y1 CH1 Offset setting status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset gain setting Y3 CH2 Offset setting status signal request CHA Offset gain setting Y4 CH2 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset setting Y5 request Y6 CH3 Gain setting request Use prohibited Offset setting YT request Y8 CH4 Gain setting request Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion signal setting request Offset gain setting mode YA Userrange write request status flag Use prohibited YB Disconnection detection signal Use prohibited Warning output signal YD Conversion completion YE flag Error flag YF Error clear request 5 38 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison Address decimal Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A1S62RD3N Q64RD G Read write Read write 0 Conversion enable disable specification Conversion enable disable setting CH1 Time count moving
11. A1SD70 QD73A1 u 0 0 Stroke limit upper limit 1 4 2 2 Stroke limit lower limit 3 3 Fixed parameter Numerator of command 4 4 pulse multiplication Electronic gear Denominator of command pulse 5 5 multiplication ae 20 20 Speed limit value 21 21 Acceleration time 22 22 i B Deceleration time 23 23 In position range 24 24 Positioning mode 25 25 40 40 OP address 41 41 42 42 OPR speed 43 43 OPR data 44 44 Creep speed 45 45 Setting for the movement amount after near point 46 46 dog ON 47 47 Positioning pattern 60 301 Positioning address P4 S1 302 62 303 Positioning speed V4 2 QUA Positioning data 64 305 Positioning address P5 85 ote 66 307 Positioning speed V5 er 008 68 309 80 80 New current value 81 81 82 82 New speed value 83 83 84 84 JOG speed area 85 85 Deviation counter clear command 86 86 Control change area Analog output adjustment area 1 87 87 m 88 88 New speed position movement amount 89 89 Current value change request 90 Speed change request 91 92 Analog output adjustment area 2 93 8 51 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address A1SD70 QD73A1 Item Zero gain adjustment specification 94 Zero gain adjustment Zero gain adjustment value specification 95 area Factory default zero gain adjustment value 96 restoration request 100 100 Curr
12. E 852 952 1052 852 952 1052 Md 102 Deviation counter value 853 953 1053 853 953 1055 854 954 1054 854 954 1054 ae 855 955 1055 855 955 1055 Md 104 Motor current 856 956 1056 856 956 1056 Md 105 Auto tuning 857 957 1057 857 957 1057 Md 106 Load inertia ratio 858 958 1058 858 958 1058 Md 107 Position loop gain 1 859 959 1059 859 959 1059 Md 108 Speed loop gain 1 860 960 1060 860 960 1060 Md 109 Position loop gain 2 861 961 1061 861 961 1061 Md 110 Speed loop gain 2 862 962 1062 862 962 1062 Pr 111 Speed integral compensation 863 963 1063 863 963 1063 Md 112 Servo amplifier software No 864 to 869 964 to 969 1064 to 1069 864 to 869 964 to 969 1064 to 1069 Md 113 Parameter error No 1 to 15 870 970 1070 870 970 1070 Md 114 Parameter error No 16 to 31 871 971 1071 871 971 1071 Md 115 Parameter error No 32 to 47 872 972 1072 872 972 1072 Parameter error No 48 to 63 873 973 1073 Parameter error No 64 to 75 874 974 1074 875 975 1075 Maker setting 876 976 1076 Md 116 Servo status 873 973 1073 877 977 1077 Md 117 Regenerative load ratio 876 976 1076 878 978 1078 Md 118 Effective load ratio 877 977 1077 879 979 1079 Md 119 Peak load ratio 878 978 1078 880 980 1080 Md 121 Absolute position restoration 879 979 4079 mode Md 120 FeRAM access count 880 to 883 980 to 983 1080 to 1083 Deceleration start flag 899 999 1099 8 36 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buff
13. Device Signal name Signal name No Module ready YO Use prohibited CH1 Offset gain setting Y1 CH1 Offset setting status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset gain setting Y3 CH2 Offset setting status signal request CHA Offset gain setting Y4 CH2 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset setting Y5 request U hibited Y6 CH3 Gain setting request se prohibite Pa CH4 Offset setting Y7 request Y8 CH4 Gain setting request Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion signal setting request Offset gain setting mode YA Userrange write request status flag Use prohibited YB Disconnection detection YC flag 2 Use prohibited Warning output signal YD Conversion completion YE flag Error flag Error clear request 5 8 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of buffer memories and sequence programs refer to the Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro Voltage Input Module User s Manual A1S68TD Q64TD
14. range write request status flag Channel change XB YB 6 YB Channel change request completion flag Q68TD G H02 Disconnection detection signal XC YC YC Q68TD G H01 Disconnection status Use prohibited monitor signal XD YD Warning output signal YD Conversion completion XE m YE YE Use prohibited flag XF YF Error flag Error clear request X10 Y10 Set lower upper limit X11 Y11 value update instruction X12 Y12 Error reset X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Use prohibited 1 1 X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E 1 1 Y1F 5 19 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of buffer memories and sequence programs refer to the Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro Voltage Input Module User s Manual A1S68TD Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 Address Address I Name Read write i Name Read write decimal decimal 0 A D conversion enable disable setting R W 0 Conversion enable disable setting 4 Error code Toe to CH8 Timelcountimoving average R W R time constant setting 2 Disconnection detection flag 9 System area Us
15. Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 20MQ or more o U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 I CTL 6 P H o Full scale x 1 0 3 to 255 32 points 2 slots 16 points slot i The number of occupied I O seg ae default I O assignment A I O assignment intelligent 16 points points and slots are different Vacancy for 16 points intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block Two 18 point terminal blocks 22 to 18 AWG x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Recalculation of internal 0 29A 0 33A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 17kg 0 28kg 27 4 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 55 2 W x 98 H x 112 D mm From the previous page Thermocouple type Temperature Temperature measurement range measurement range s 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 1 B 400 to 1800 1 800 to 3000 1 0 to 400 1 0 to 1800 1 E 0 to 1000 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 N 0 to 1300 1 0 to 2300 1 0 to 400 0 to 700 U 200 to 200 1 300 to 400 0 0 to 600 0 0 1 0 to 400 0 to 800 0 to 900 1 0 to 1600 z 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 900 0 d I I
16. Signal name Signal name Signal name Module ready YO Use prohibited Y1 CH1 Output enable disable flag CH2 Output enable Y2 disable flag CH3 Output enable disable flag ET CH4 Output enable Use prohibited Y4 disable flag Y5 CH5 Output enable disable flag CH6 Output enable Y6 disable flag CH7 Output enable YT disable flag High resolution mode Y8 CH8 Output enable status flag disable flag Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode YA User range writing flag request Channel change YB Channel change request completed flag Set value change YC Set value change completed flag request Synchronous output YD Synchronous output mode flag request Use prohibited YE Use prohibited Error flag Error clear request 3 31 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A1S68DAV Q68DAVN Address Address decimal decimal Read write Read write
17. 0 A D conversion enable disable R W 0 A D conversion enable disable setting 1 Writing data error code R 1 CH1 Average time average number of times 2 Average processing specification R W 2 CH2 Average time average number of times 9 3 CH3 Average time average number of times R W to to 8 See eS I 8 CH8 Average time average number of times 9 9 Averaging process setting 10 CH1 Average time count 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Average time count RIW 11 CH1 Digital output value to to 17 CH8 Average time count 17 CH7 Digital output value R 18 System area Use prohibited _ 18 CH8 Digital output value 19 19 Error code 20 CH1 Digital output value 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 CH2 Digital output value 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 CH3 Digital output value 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification RW 23 CH4 Digital output value Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 24 CH5 Digital output value 25 CH6 Digital output value 26 CH7 Digital output value System area Use prohibited 27 CH8 Digital output value 28 A D conversion completed flag R W 28 System area Use prohibited CH1 Maximum value CH1 Minimum value R CH8 Maximum value CH8 Minimum value System area Use prohibited Mode switching setting R W System area Use prohibited CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH8 Industrial shipmen
18. Address decimal Name Read write 1915 to System area 1919 1920 Error code First two Last two 1921 digits of digits of History the year the year 1922 12 Error Month B 1923 Minute Day of 1924 Second the week 1925 to System area 1929 1930 Error code First two Last two 1931 digits of digits of History the year the year 1932 13 Error Month Day B 1933 Minute Day of 1934 Second the week 1935 to System area 1939 1940 Error code First two Last two 1941 digits of digits of History the year the year 1942 14 Error Month 1943 time Hour Minute Day of 1944 Second the wadk 1945 to System area 1949 1950 Error code First two Last two 1951 digits of digits of History the year the year 1952 15 Error Month 1953 time Hour Minute Day of 1954 Second ins weak 1955 to System area 1959 1960 Error code First two Last two 1961 digits of digits of History the year the year 1962 16 Error Month _ R 1963 Hour Minute Day of 1964 Second ihewek 5000 to CH1 Logging data R 14999 15000 to CH2 Logging data R 24999 25000 to CH3 Logging data R 34999 4 17 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 48 Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name Read write CH4 Logging data System area 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 A1S66ADA 4 3 1 Performance specifications comparison O Co
19. cette terete ee eee u a a 3 16 Bid GATS68DA 3 18 3 4 1 Performance specifications comparison r 3 18 3 4 2 FUNCtONAl COMPANISOM 1 ieee 3 22 3 4 3 VO signal comparison iecore eerta ce eoe aede La d ea dd 3 23 3 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison a 3 24 3 ATISOIDAV ACER 3 26 3 5 1 Performance specifications comparison sssssssssssssssssseseeen nennen 3 26 3 5 2 Functional comparison kas ea nea cate 3 30 3 5 3 I O signal comparison U n a 3 31 3 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison U enne 3 32 CHAPTER 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 1to 4 35 4 1 List of Analog I O Module Alternative Models for Replacement 4 1 4 2 WE alee tied La cance een seen ene ean eed dered 4 3 4 2 1 Performance specifications comparison a 4 3 4 2 2 Functional COMPARISON roe ted a ek e Rte OR Ve Le POR pe LAUR NR R KR RR AR Tn E edd eR RA 4 6 4 2 3 I O signal comparison U n 4 9 4 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison eene 4 10 4 37 TATSOGADA m a at ada
20. Minute Day of 1874 Second ihe week 1875 to System area 1879 1880 Error code First two Last two 1881 digits of digits of the year the year 1882 History 8 Error Month Day R 1883 Hour Minute Day of 1884 Second the wask 1885 to System area 1889 1890 Error code First two Last two 1891 digits of digits of the year the year 1892 History 9 Emor i n Day 1893 me Hour Minute Day of 1894 Second the week 1895 to System area 1899 1900 Error code First two Last two 1901 digits of digits of History the year the year 1902 10 Eror Month Day R 1903 Minute Day of 1904 Second ihe weak 1905 to System area 1909 1910 Error code First two Last two 1911 digits of digits of History the year the year 1912 af Eror Month Day 1913 bs Hour Minute Day of 1914 Second the Week 4 33 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name Read write 1915 to System area 1919 1920 Error code First two Last two 1921 digits of digits of History Bes the year the year 1922 12 _ Month Day 1923 Minute 1924 Second D9Y of the week 1925 to System area 1929 1930 Error code Firsttwo Lasttwo 1931 digits of digits of History Eitor the year
21. Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO CH1 limit switch output x1 Y1 status flag CH2 limit switch output 2 Y2 status flag CH3 limit switch output X3 status flag CH4 limit switch output 4 Y4 status flag CH5 limit switch output X5 Y5 status flag CH6 limit switch output X6 Y6 status flag CH7 limit switch output XT pane YT status fla E ag Use prohibited CH8 limit switch output X8 Y8 status flag Limit switch output X9 Y9 enable flag External preset XA YA command detection flag XB Error flag YB Fuse external power XC YC cutoff detection flag s ling periodi XD ampling periodic YD counter flag XE YE XF X10 Y10 Count enable command Decrement count X11 Y11 command X12 Y12 command X13 Use prohibited Y13 Ring counter command Counter function X14 Y14 selection start command Limit switch output X15 Y15 command External preset X16 Y16 command detection reset command X17 Y17 Error reset command flag Signal name Signal name No CH1 Coincidence signal Module ready Y0 No 1 reset command CH1 Counter value large Y1 CH1 Preset command point No 1 CH1 Counter value Y2 CH1 Coincidence signal coincidence point No 1 enable command CH1 Counter value small CH1 Down count point No 1 command CH1 External preset YA CH1 Count enable request detection command CH1 Counter value large Y5 CH1 External pre
22. 4 19 4 3 1 Performance specifications comparison a 4 19 4 3 2 Functional comparison eee ee see eeaaaaeaaeaeceeeeeeeeesedseccesaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeseseaaees 4 22 4 3 3 Signal i cade ee ee niter dee t deseo 4 25 4 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison U 4 27 CHAPTER 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 1to 5 61 5 1 List of Temperature Input Module Alternative Models for Replacement 5 1 5 2 A1S68TD Replacing with the Q64TD rr 5 3 5 2 1 Performance specifications comparison 5 3 5 2 2 Functional COMPARISON d dS 5 7 5 2 3 VO signal comparison Pe 5 8 5 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison sss eem ener 5 9 5 3 A1S68TD Replacing with the Q68TD G H02 or Q68TD G H01 5 13 5 3 1 Performance specifications comparison 5 13 5 3 2 Functional comparison uuu uu 5 18 5 3 3 I O signal comparison 5 19 5 3 4 Buffer memo
23. 6 30 6 4 1 A1S64TCTRT BW series modules standard Control 6 30 6 4 3 A1S64TCTRT BW Q series modules heating cooling control 6 32 6 4 8 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 and Q series modules 6 34 644 A1S62TCTT BW S2 A1S62TCRT BW S2 and Q series modules 6 36 6 5 Buffer Memory Address Comparison u a 6 38 6 5 1 A1S64TCTRT BW and Q series modules standard control 6 38 6 5 2 A1S64TCTRT BW series modules heating cooling control 6 42 6 5 3 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 and Q series modules 6 46 6 5 4 A1S62TCTT BW S2 A1S62TCRT BW S2 and Q series modules 6 50 CHAPTER 7 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 1to 7 26 7 1 List of High Speed Counter Module Alternative Models for Replacement 7 1 FQ AT9D61 E TE EKE 7 5 7 2 1 Performance specifications comparison a 7 5 7 2 2 Functional comparison 7 11 7 2 3 O sigrial comparison n am a a tee ee 7 12 7 2 4 Buffe
24. LELE unit us Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 2 5us O 100 100 10KPPS 1 phase input 50 50 Unit us es Unit us 1 phase input Performance specifications of 1 channel Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 25us 142 i 10KPPS 2 phase input Ale Unit us 2 phase input HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT Performance specifications of 1 channel O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible A1SD62E Precautions for replacement Magnitude Comparison F 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary comparison range between CPU and Set value lt count value Comparison high speed ES Set value 7 count value counter Set value gt count value module External Preset 5 12 24VDC 2 to 5mA input Function start 5 12 24VDC 2 to 5mA Penal Colncdshen Transistor source type output x inci 12 24VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common output output 1 point channel 2 points channel Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 1A 0 33A Recalculation of internal current consumption 5VDC is required Weight 0 25kg 0 11kg T 18 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Comparison between A1SD62D and QD62D A1SD62D O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for replacement
25. Scaling value Applicable platinum RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 JPt100 JIS C1604 1981 Measured Pt100 180 to 600 C 27 10 to 313 710 t t Bee JPt100 180 t0 699 25 80 to 317 280 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Analog input points 2 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1 Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between platinum RTD input and channel not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Batch detected at all channels Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal 43 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD Compatibility Precautions for replacement 3 4 wire type O 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 200000 to 850000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 16 b
26. Scaling value R monitor flag 24 CH5 Scaling value 50 to 57 CH1 to CH8 Scaling value 25 CH6 Scaling value 58 Scaling valid invalid setting R W 26 CH7 Scaling value 59 to 61 System area Use prohibited 27 CH8 Scaling value 62 CH1 Scaling range lower limit value 28 A D conversion completion flag 63 CH1 Scaling range upper limit value 29 System area Use prohibited to 30 CH1 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 77 CH8 Scaling range upper limit value 31 CH1 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 32 CH2 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value R W 33 CH2 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit BAN to 34 CH3 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 99 CH8 Scaling width upper limit value 35 CH3 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 94 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 36 CH4 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 95 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 37 CH4 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 96 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Address decimal A1S68TD Read write Address decimal Read write 38 CH5 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 97 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value 39 CH5 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit to 40 CH6 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 125 CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value M
27. 2 Speed command range f 994 to 600000 000 degree min 0 001 to 2000000 000 degree min o 0 001 to 37500 000 degree min 1 to 1000000 pulse s 1 to 1000000 pulse s 1 to 62500 pulse s Machine OPR function Available 6 OPR methods Available 6 OPR methods O OPR method JOG operation Available Available O 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible A1SD75P1 A1SD75P2 A1SD75P3 QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat Precautions for 53 QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility replacement On QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the manual pulse generator cannot be used by each axis independent When connecting the manual pulse generator for each axis is required use Manual pulse generator 1 generator axis 1 generator module one axis module function The manual pulse generator itself can use the same one The operation for inputting one pulse differs Set the parameter so that movement amount may be same The starting time 1 5 to 2 0ms becomes fast Starting time 20ms when other axes are starting Check the 1 5 to 2 0ms 0 1ms to 0 5ms one processing timing Automatic trapezoidal Available Available Acceleration acceleration deceleration deceleration processing S curve acceleration Available Available deceleration Number of Acce
28. 30006 4000 O75mV 12000t012000 0 333mV A settings matched using a sequence 0 to 20mA 5 1 66 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 Current 4 to 20mA 4 1 3 settings Refer to Appendix 3 a ENDR 4000 to 4000 1 5pA 12000 to 12000 0 83yA settings Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 voltage 10mV current 20pA Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 9 voltage 30mV current 60 80us channel Voltage 12 Current 21 Q 2 channels module Max 100 000 times Available 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A1S62DA Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels not isolated Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance 32 points Number of occupied I O points b pa pa I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal 1 25 3 1 25 YS3A V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 80A 5VDC Voltage External Current power supply consumption Inrush current Weight 0 32kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q62DAN Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output ch
29. A1S68TD Temperature conversion function Imports temperature data Temperature conversion value Stores imported temperature data in the O storage buffer memory Conversion enable disable Sets whether to enable disable a function conversion per channel n Detects disconnection of the connected H02 O The Q68TD G H01 supports the Disconnection detection function thermocouple of each channel HO1 A disconnection monitor function For the Q68TD G H02 H01 input Input type selection function Sets an input type for each channel type is set with the intelligent u ion functi inpu PUPP function module switch setting of GX Developer x Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function exceeds the set temperature range o Processes the detected temperature by Averaging processing is added versi B specified method for the Q68TD G H02 H01 The concept of scaling value Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function A differs To use the scaling values into a percent value in set width program needs to be reviewed Sets whether th Id juncti Pt100 cold junction compensation E compensation using the Pt100 attached to enable disable setting function are M the terminal is performed or not Performs linear correction by individually Offset gain setting function co
30. CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS i AE ded dela EET ge Su aaa AAAS 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT a A 7 REVISIONS eet NIE II IM E LIMINE 8 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS na 14 CHAPTER1 INTRODUCTION 1 1to1 2 1 4 Advantages of Transition to Series ee eee eeeee eset aeeee 1 1 1 2 Precautions for Transition from AnS QnAS Series to Q Series 1 2 CHAPTER 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 1to2 27 2 1 List of Analog Input Module Alternative Models for Replacement 2 1 22 WILL DP 2 3 2 2 1 Performance specifications comparison rr 2 3 2 2 2 Functional comparison 2 7 2 2 3 UO sighal compas ON R SS 2 8 2 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison u 2 9 23 1568 Replacing with the Q68ADV or Q68ADI 2 11 2 3 1 Performance specifications comparison r 2 11 2 3 2 Functional comparison enden 2 15 2 3 3 VO sio
31. p Available Available system switching control Position speed POM Not available Available Switching control In Absolute system In Absolute system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 359 99999 degree 0 to 359 99999 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse Incremental system Incremental system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um Positioning range 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse In speed position switching control lt In speed position switching control 0 to 214748364 7 um 0 to 214748364 7 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 21474 83647 degree 0 to 21474 83647 degree 0 to 2147483647 pulse 0 to 2147483647 pulse 0 01 to 6000000 00 mm min 0 01 to 20000000 00 mm min 0 001 to 600000 000 inch min 0 001 to 2000000 000 inch min Speed command range 0 001 to 600000 000 degree min 0 001 to 2000000 000 degree min 1 to 1000000 pulse s 1 to 10000000 pulse s Corresponding to the OP unpassed error is required Return the motor Available 6 OPR methods Available 4 OPR methods A more than one r
32. Address decimal Name Read write 1800 Latest address of error history R 1801 to System area 1809 1810 Error code First two Last two 1811 digits of digits of i the year the year 7812 History 1 Day R 1813 Minute Day of 1814 Second the week 1815 to System area 1819 1820 Error code First two Last two 1821 digits of digits of the year the year 1822 History 2 Error Month Day R 1823 Minute Day of 1824 Second the Week 1825 to System area 1829 1830 Error code First two Last two 1831 digits of digits of the year the year 1832 History 3 Error Month Day R 1833 Minute Day of 1834 Second ine wince 1835 to System area 1839 1840 Error code First two Last two 1841 digits of digits of the year the year 7842 History 4 EO oath Bay R 1843 Minute Day of 1844 Second the weak 1845 to System area 1849 1850 Error code First two Last two 1851 digits of digits of the year the year 1852 History 5 Error Month Day R 1853 Minute Day of 1854 Second the wesk 1855 to System area 1859 4 15 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 16 Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name Rea
33. Full scale x 0 3 1 digit mbient temperature 0 to ull scale x 0 7 1 digit Ambi 0 to 55 C Full 0 7 1 digi Cold junction Temperature process value Within 1 0 C temperature PV 100 C or more Accuracy ti Temperature process value compensation perature valu Within a20 C accuracy PV 150 to 100 C ambient Temperature process value uL temperature 0 PV 200 to 150 C Within 3 0 C to 55 C Sampling cycle 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used Control output cycle 1 to 100s Input impedance 1MO Input filter 0 to 100s Sensor correction value setting 50 00 to 50 00 Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing Temperature control method Standard control PID ON OFF pulse or two position control Heating cooling control PID ON OFF pulse PID constants setting Standard control Can be set by auto tuning or self tuning Heating cooling control Can be set by auto tuning PID constants range Proportional band P Standard control 0 0 to 1000 0 Heating cooling control 0 1 to 1000 0 Integral time 1 1 to 3600s Derivative time D 0 to 3600s Set value SV setting range Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used Output signal ON OFF pulse Rated load voltage 10 2 to 30VDC peak voltage 30 0V Max load current 0 1A point 0 4
34. 2 3 4 5 store spare parts under a high temperature or high humidity condition even within the range guaranteed by the specifications Storage ambient temperature 20 to 75 C Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 no condensation Store in a place avoiding direct sunlight Store under condition with less dust or no corrosive gas The battery capacity of a A6BAT battery or a lithium coin battery commercially available for memory card will be decreased by its self discharging even when not used Replace it with new one in 5 years as a guideline For a power supply module CPU module with built in power supply or analog module that use any aluminum electrolytic capacitor which is indicated in the table below take the following measures since the characteristics will be deteriorated when the aluminum electrolytic capacitor is left un energized for a long time Product Model AnS series CPU module A1SJHCPU Power supply built in type Power supply module A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P A1S64AD A1S68AD A1S62DA A1S68DAI A1S68DAV A1S63ADA Analog module A1S66ADA Countermeasures for preventing aluminum electrolytic capacitor characteristics deterioration Apply the rated voltage to the aluminum electrolytic capacitor for several hours once a year to activate it Or rotate products at the periodic inspection in every 1 year or two Reference The life of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor even if not
35. Current consumption Inrush current Weight 0 22kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68DAVN 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement The number of occupied I O points has changed to 16 points A 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm FG terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Terminals other than FG R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used Wiring change is required 0 38A 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less 0 20A x External power supply is required 2 5A 230us or less 0 20kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 5 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available A 1568 Q68 Item Description Precautions for replacement DAV DAVN On Q68DAVN by disabling the D A conversion enable Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion for D A conversion for the channels 7 disable function each channel that are not used the conversion speed can be shortened Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the D A output enable offset value for each channel disable function The conversion speed stays constant regardless of whether 9 D A output is enabled or disabled Obtains analog
36. Resolution Resolution measurement measurement range R 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 1 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 1 0 to 2400 0 to 1300 K 200 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 500 0 0 0 to 800 0 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 0 to 1600 1 J 0 to 1200 0 to 2100 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 500 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 800 0 200 to 400 200 to 200 1 to 700 4 0 to 200 300 to 400 0 to 400 200 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 0 0 to 400 0 6 14 To the next page 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible WOIIQUU UI IuIIII Specifications Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Thermocouple Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more O Between input channels 500VDC 20MQ or more U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 I CTL 6 P H o Full scale x 1 0 3 to 255 32 points 2 slots 16 points slot The number of occupied I O I default I O assignment A I O assignment intelligent 16 poi
37. Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock or damage to the product After wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock NCAUTION Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 1000 or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range If any spade solderless terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Connectors for external devices must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer or must be correctly soldered Incomplete connections may cause short circuit fire or malfunction Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire fai
38. X3 Hardware error flag Y3 Use prohibited CH1 Auto tuning X4 CH1 tuning status flag 4 X4 1 Auto tuning status Y4 instruction CH2 Auto tuning X5 CH2 tuning status flag Y5 X5 CH2 Auto tuning status Ya IF instruction CH3 Auto tuning X6 CHS3tuning status flag Y6 X6 CH3 Auto tuning status Y6 instruction Auto tuning CHA tuning status flag YT X7 CH4 Auto tuning status Y7 instruction FeRAM write complete T E E PROM write va E2PROM backup flag Use prohibited completion flag instruction Default value write Default value write Default setting Y9 X9 Y9 AM complete flag completion flag registration instruction FeRAM write 2 ite fai XA dd YA EN E PROM write failure YA Use prohibited incomplete flag flag as Setting change Setting change XB Use prohibited YB XB YB completion flag instruction CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 PID control forced XC YC XC YC flag flag stop instruction CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 PID control forced XD YD XD YD flag flag stop instruction CH3 Alert occurrence CH3 Alert occurrence CH3 PID control forced XE YE XE YE flag flag stop instruction CH4 Alert occurrence CH4 Alert occurrence CH4 PID control forced flag flag stop instruction X10 Y10 X10 Module READY flag Y10 Use prohibited X11 Y11 Setting operation mode xt Setting operation mode Z Setting operation mode command status instruction
39. Address hexadecimal Name Read write CH1 CH2 0 Write data error code 1 2 Decimal point position 5 6 Alert definition 9 A Temperature process value PV D Manipulated value for heating MVh 11 12 Temperature rise judgment flag R 15 16 Heating transistor output flag 19 1A Set value SV monitor 1D Cold junction temperature process value 2 1E MAN mode shift completion flag 1 E2PROM s PID constants read write completion flag 20 40 Input range 21 41 Stop mode setting 22 42 Set value SV setting 23 43 Heating proportional band Ph setting 24 44 Integral time 1 setting 25 45 Derivative time D setting 26 46 Alert set value 1 27 47 Alert set value 2 28 48 Alert set value 3 29 49 Alert set value 4 2A 4A Upper limit output limiter RAN 2B 4B Lower limit output limiter 2C 4 Output variation limiter setting 2D 4D Sensor correction value setting 2E 4E Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 2F 4F Heating control output cycle setting 30 50 Primary delay digital filter setting 31 51 Control response parameter 32 52 AUTO MAN mode shift 33 53 MAN output setting 34 54 Setting change rate limiter 35 55 AT bias 36 56 System area Use prohibited 37 57 Upper limit setting limiter RAN 38 58 Lower limit setting limiter 39 59 System area Use prohibited 3A 5A Heater disconnection alert setting R W 3B 5B
40. 10 515 Performance specifications of 1 channel 100KPPS Li Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 2 5us 20 Set the counting speed of 50KPPS A the QD62 to 100K ee Unit ws 1 phase and 2 phase input HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT A1SD61 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for ibility replacement Counting speed switch setting 50KPPS 10KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 100 100 10KPPS 1 phase II II input POP Unit us PU BU Unit us Counter 1 phase input Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 25 5 142 2 us 10KPPS Es 2 phase input g eu Unit us 5 2 phase input Comparison M 5 Magnitude 32 bit signed binary comparison B e HORE a contact Wi 9 Dog ON address lt Count 2 and Set value lt count value amp ls Comparison value lt Dog OFF address high speed Set value 7 count value A Two points can be set result b contact g counter Set value gt count value Dog OFF address lt Count module 5 value lt Dog ON address Preset Since the external input External 12 24VDC 3 6mA specifications differ check 5 12 24VDC 2 to 5mA A mp input Function start 5VDC 5mA the specifications
41. 1260 CH1 to CH8 Rate alarm warning detection 41 CH6 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit R W 133 period R W 42 CH7 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 134 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 43 CH7 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 135 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 44 CH8 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit to 45 CH8 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 149 CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value 150 to 46 157 System area Use prohibited 158 to 47 159 Mode switching setting R W System area Use prohibited 160 to 48 163 System area Use prohibited 49 Q68TD G H02 Conversion setting for 164to disconnection detection 165 Q68TD G H01 Disconnection state conversion setting RW Q68TD G H02 Conversion setting value for 166 to disconnection detection 173 Q68TD G H01 Conversion setting value for disconnection state 174 to System area Use prohibited 189 190 CH1 Factory default offset value 191 CH1 Factory default gain value 192 CH1 User range settings offset value 193 CH1 User range settings gain value 194 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF offset value L 195 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF offset value H 196 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF gain value L 197 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF gain value H to R W 246 CH8 Factory default offset value 247 8 Factory default gain value 248 CH8 User range settings offset value 249 CH8 User range settings gain value 250 CH8 User range settings thermal EMF offset value
42. 1719 1720 CH1 Maximum digital output value R 1721 CH1 Minimum digital output value R 1722 CH2 Maximum digital output value R 1723 CH2 Minimum digital output value R 1724 CH3 Maximum digital output value R 1725 CH3 Minimum digital output value R 1726 CH4 Maximum digital output value R 1727 CH4 Minimum digital output value R 1728 to System area 1739 1740 CH1 Maximum scaling value R 1741 CH1 Minimum scaling value R 1742 CH2 Maximum scaling value R 1743 CH2 Minimum scaling value R 1744 CH3 Maximum scaling value R 1745 CH3 Minimum scaling value R 1746 CH4 Maximum scaling value R 1747 CH4 Minimum scaling value R 1748 to System area 1763 1764 CH5 Set value check code R 1765 CH6 Set value check code R 1766 to System area 1773 1774 CH5 Real conversion digital value R 1775 CH6 Real conversion digital value R 1776 to System area 1789 4 13 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 14 Address decimal Latest error code Name Q64AD2DA Read write System area First two Last two 1791 digits of the digits of the year year 1792 Error time Month Day 1793 Hour Minute 1794 Second Day ofthe week 1795 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA
43. 3 3 3 Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 J 40 to 750 C 2 0 25 of measured 5 625 C of measured temperature temperature 750 to 1200 C 9 3 9 270 to 200 C 3 3 3 Larger value of 0 5 C or x0 596 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 1 M 200 to 0 C 2 6 0 C of measured temperature of measured temperature Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 valu 0 0 0 to 350 C 2 0 25 of measured I 2 625 of measured temperature temperature 350 to 400 C 3 3 3 270 to 200 C 3 3 29 35 Larger value of 0 5 C or x0 596 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 2 200 to 0 C 11 0 C of measured temperature of measured temperature N Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 to 1250 2 0 25 of measured 9 375 C of measured temperature temperature 1250 to 1300 C 8 9 8 1 If a value entered from the thermocouple is outside the measured temperature range given in the table it is handled as the maximum minimum value of the measured temperature range 2 The accuracy only in the temperature ranges of Class 1 to 3 shaded areas in JIS C1602 1995 apply 3 Temperature can be measured but accuracy is not guaranteed 5 17 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 3 2 Functional comparison Available A Partial change required Not available Q68TD G Description Precautions for replacement H02 H01
44. 384 to 16383 288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 3288 to 13787 STRE 10 to 10VDC 10 to 10VDC Analog External load resistance value 2 to 1 External load resistance value 1kO to 1MQ output 0 to 20mADC 0 to 20mADC o External load resistance value 0 to 6000 External load resistance value 0 to 600Q characteristics Analog output Digital Normal resolution High resolution Resolution range input value z Anal mode mode 0 to 10V 2 5mV a 9 Digital Digital input range output Maximum Output Maximum 0 to 5V 1 25mV Voltage Value resolution value resolution Because of the 0 to 4000 i Ot resolution 10to 10V 5 0mV 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 625mV Current 012 20mA 5pA 0 to Eden urren etween the An 410 20mA ZUA 0 to 5V 4000 1 25mV Oto 0 416mV a o 1to5V TOmV 12000 0 333mV ded ies the support 8 4000 16000 ad i i 10 to 10V 2 5mV 0 625mV Maximum resolution to 4000 m to 16000 m A of a sequence To BV program user 1000 3000 to range settings or extended to 4500 1 0mV 13500 0 333mV the scaling mode Wn function is 0to 20mA Oto 5yA 0 to 1 660A required Refer to z 4 to 20mA 4000 4uA 12000 1 33pA Appendix 3 4 to 20mA GI extended 1090 apa 200019 to4500 U 43500 P mode Analog input Normal resolution High resolution range mode mode Ambient 0 to 0 to temperature 55 C 2939 55 C PSSC 0 to 10V 0
45. 40 pin connector x Within 0 3mm x Wiring change is required Recalculation of internal 0 46A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 16kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 4 2 Functional comparison Description A1S68AD Q68AD G O Available Not available Precautions for replacement A D conversion enable disable Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel By disabling the conversion for the channels that are not used the sampling time can be shortened Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion Averaging processing For each channel A D conversion values are averaged for the set number of times or set amount of time and the average value is output as a digital value Moving average takes the average of the specified number of digital output values measured per sampling time The setting range of average time and count differ Check the specifications referring to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual Maximum and minimum values hold function The maximum and minimum values of the digital output values are retained in the module Resolution mode The resolution can be switched according to the application The resolution mode is batch set for all the channels
46. 510 710 Minimum scaling value R 111 311 511 711 System area 112 312 512 712 Setting range R 113 313 513 713 A D conversion completed flag R 114 314 514 714 Input signal error detection flag R 115 315 515 715 to to to to System area 119 319 519 719 120 320 520 720 Oldest pointer R 121 321 521 721 Latest pointer R 122 322 522 722 Logging data points R 123 323 523 723 Trigger pointer R 4 10 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Readiwrit ead write 124 324 524 724 to to to to System area 189 389 589 789 190 390 590 790 Latest error code R First two Last two 191 391 591 791 digits of the digits of the R year year 192 392 592 792 Error time Month Day R 193 393 593 793 Hour Minute R 194 394 594 794 Second Dy ofthe R week 195 395 595 795 to to to to System area 199 399 599 799 4 11 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Nama Readiwrite CH5 CH6 800 1000 D A conversion enable disable setting R W 801 1001 System area 802 1002 Digital input value R W 803 1003 to to System area 809 1009 810 4010 DIA conversion scaling enable disable RW setting 811 1011 D
47. 903 1103 to to System area 911 1111 912 1112 Setting range R 913 1113 HOLD CLEAR function setting R 914 1114 to to System area 989 1189 990 1190 Latest error code R First two Last two 991 1191 digits ofthe digits of the R year year 992 1192 Error time Month Day R 993 1193 Hour Minute R 994 1194 Second cavers R week 995 1195 to to System area 999 1199 4 29 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name Read write 1200 to System area 1599 1600 Level data 0 R W 1601 Level data 1 R W 1602 Level data 2 R W 1603 Level data 3 R W 1604 Level data 4 R W 1605 Level data 5 R W 1606 Level data 6 R W 1607 Level data 7 R W 1608 Level data 8 R W 1609 Level data 9 R W 1610 to System area 1699 1700 CH1 Digital output value R 1701 CH2 Digital output value R 1702 CH3 Digital output value R 1703 CH4 Digital output value R 1704 to System area 1709 1710 CH1 Scaling value R 1711 CH2 Scaling value R 1712 CH3 Scaling value R 1713 Scaling value R 1714 to System area 1719 1720 CH1 Maximum digital output value R 1721 CH1 Minimum digital output value R 1722 CH2 Maximum digital output value R 1723 CH2 Minimum digital output value R 1724 CH3 Maximum digital output value R 1725 CH3 Minimum digital output value R 1726 CH4 Maximum digital ou
48. JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this handbook does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice L NA 08220ENG D 1409 MEE
49. PLII 0 to 1200 1 0 to 2300 1 W5Re W26Re 0 to 2300 1 0 to 3000 1 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 2 2 A1S64TCTRT BW platinum resistance thermometer connection Item Control output Specifications A1S64TCTRT A1S64TCTRTBW Transistor output Number of temperature input points Standard control 4 channels module Heating cooling control 2 channels module Applicable temperature sensor Refer to Section 6 2 2 1 Indication accuracy Ambient temperature 25 5 Full scale x 0 3 1 digit mbient temperature 0 to ull scale x 0 7 1 digit Ambi 0 to 55 C Full 0 7 1 digi Sampling cycle 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used Control output cycle 1 to 100s Input impedance 1MO Input filter 0 to 100s Sensor correction value setting 50 00 to 50 00 Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing Temperature control method Standard control PID ON OFF pulse or two position control Heating cooling control PID ON OFF pulse PID constants setting Standard control Can be set by auto tuning or self tuning Heating cooling control Can be set by auto tuning Proportional band P PID constants range Standard control 0 0 to 1000 096 Heating cooling control 0 1 to 1000 0 Integral time 1 1 to 3600s Derivative time D 0 to 3600s Set value SV setting ran
50. SENNGS 412 digits 16 digits 4 digits 0 to CETA giS aa o ROS 10 396 10 496 0 196 20mA 36 digits 48 digits 12 digits 4 to Current 20mA User range settings 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Maximum conversion speed A1S64AD 20ms channel Absolute maximum input Voltage 15V Current 30mA Analog input points 4 channels module Maximum number of writes for EPROM Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 5MQ or more Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59Necm Applicable solderless terminal 1 25 3 1 25 YS3 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 40A Weight 0 25kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64AD Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conversio
51. Use prohibited Y4 disable flag Y5 CH5 Output enable disable flag CH6 Output enable Y6 disable flag CH7 Output enable YT disable flag High resolution mode Y8 CH8 Output enable status flag disable flag Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode YA User range writing flag request Channel change YB Channel change request completed flag Set value change YC Set value change completed flag request Synchronous output YD Synchronous output mode flag request Use prohibited YE Use prohibited Error flag Error clear request 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A1S68DAI Q68DAIN Address Address decimal decimal Read write Read write 0 Analog output enable disable channel 0 D A conversion enable disable 1 CH1 digital value 1 CH1 Digital value 2 CH2 digital value 2 CH2 Digital value 9 CH3 digital value 3 CH3 Digital value 4 digital value R W 4 CH4 Digital value
52. X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Use prohibited X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F gt Device Signal name Signal name No Module ready YO Use prohibited CH1 Offset gain setting Y1 CH1 Offset setting status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset gain setting Y3 CH2 Offset setting status signal request CHA Offset gain setting Y4 CH2 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset setting Y5 request U hibited Y6 CH3 Gain setting request se prohibite Pa CH4 Offset setting Y7 request Y8 CH4 Gain setting request Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion signal setting request Offset gain setting mode YA Userrange write request status flag Use prohibited YB Disconnection detection signal Use prohibited Warning output signal YD Conversion completion YE flag Error flag Error clear request 5 48 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison Address decimal Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A1S62RD4N Q64RD Read
53. cannot be mounted on the Q large type base unit or AnS size version Q large type base unit Product MELSEC AnS QnAS series module MELSEC Q series module Conversion adaptor A1S64TCTTBW S1 _ Q64TCTTBWN ERNT ASQT64TCTTBW A1S64TCTRTBW 2 A1S64TCRTBW S1 Disconnection detection Y Q64TCRTBWN ERNT ASQT64TCRTBW a a A1S64TCTRTBW 3 1 1 5 SERAS A1S62TCTTBW S2 temperature control module Q64TCTTBWN ERNT ASQT62TCTTBW A1S64TCTRTBW 4 A1S62TCRTBW S2 T Q64TCRTBWN ERNT ASQT62TCRTBW A1S64TCTRTBW 1 These models refer to the set product consisting of an one slot type conversion adapter ERNT ASQT64TCLILI and disconnection detection connector conversion cable 2 With the standard control and thermocouple input used 3 With the standard control and platinum resistance thermometer input used 4 With the heating cooling control and thermocouple input used 5 With the heating cooling control and platinum resistance thermometer input used 6 5 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 2 Performance Specifications Comparison 6 2 1 A1S64TCTRT BW thermocouple connection Control output Specifications A1S64TCTRT A1S64TCTRTBW Transistor output Number of temperature input points Standard control 4 channels module Heating cooling control 2 channels module Applicable temperature sensor Refer to Section 6 2 1 1 Indication accuracy Ambient temperature 25 5
54. out type sold separately Applicable wire size 10136 3000VE 24 to 30 AWG approx 0 05 to 0 2 mm A6CON1 A6CON4 0 3mm 22 AWG 10136 6000EL 28 AWG approx 0 08 mm A6CON2 24 AWG As the connectors differ wiring change is required The connectors of QD75PLIN QD75DLIN are sold separately Command pulse output System Differential driver Open collector QD75PLIN Open collector QD75DLIN Differential driver The differential driver and the open collector are separate module In initial condition A1SD75PLI S3 outputs with positive logic and QD75PLI DLI outputs with negative logic Maximum output pulse When connected to open collector 200kpps When connected to differential driver 400kpps When connected to open collector 200kpps When connected to differential driver 4Mpps Maximum connection distance between servos When connected to open collector 2m When connected to differential driver When connected to open collector 2m When connected to differential driver 10m 10m 0 7A or less QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75PAN Internal current 0 29A 0 30A 0 36A when connected to differential driver consumption A BVDC QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75DAN 0 78A 0 43A 0 45A 0 66A Flash ROM write count Max 100 000 times Max 100 000 times When QD75PON QD75DLIN carries out the flash write 26 times from the sequence program an error occu
55. standard control n CHI CH2 CH3 CH4 Name Read write 0 Error code 1 2 3 4 Decimal point position 5 6 7 8 Alert detail 9 A B Temperature process value PV D F 10 Manipulated value MV R 11 12 13 14 Temperature rise judgment flag 15 16 17 18 Transistor output flag 19 1A 1B 1 Measured heater current value 1D Cold junction temperature process value MAN mode shift completion flag 1E System area Use prohibited 20 40 60 80 Input range 21 41 61 81 Stop mode setting 22 42 62 82 Set value SV setting 23 43 63 83 Proportional band P setting 24 44 64 84 Integral time 1 setting 25 45 65 85 Derivative time D setting 26 46 66 86 Setting of Alert alarm 1 27 47 67 87 Setting of Alert alarm 2 28 48 68 88 Setting of Alert alarm 3 29 49 69 89 Setting of Alert alarm 4 2A 4A 6A 8A Upper output limiter 2B 4B 6B 8B Lower output limiter 2C 4 6 8 Output variation limiter 2D 4D 6D 8D Sensor compensation value setting 2E 4E 6E 8E Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting RW 2F 4F 6F 8F Control output period setting 30 50 70 90 Primary delay digital filter setting 31 51 71 91 Control response parameter 32 52 72 92 AUTO MAN mode switching 33 53 73 93 MAN output setting 34 54 74 94 Setting change rate limiter 35 55 75 95 AT bias 36 56 76 96 Direct reverse action setting 37 57 77 97 Upper setting limit
56. 1 27 47 Setting of Alert alarm 2 28 48 Setting of Alert alarm 3 29 49 Setting of Alert alarm 4 2A 4A Heating upper output limiter 2B 4B System area Use prohibited 2C 4C 2D 4D Sensor compensation value setting R W 2E 4E System area Use prohibited 2F 4F Heating control output period setting 30 50 Primary delay digital filter setting R W 31 51 Control response parameter 32 52 m System area Use prohibited 33 53 34 54 Setting change rate limiter R W 2 gt System area Use prohibited 36 56 37 57 Upper setting limiter 38 58 Lower setting limiter RW 39 59 CT selection 3A 5A Heater disconnection alert setting 3B 5B x System area Use prohibited 3C 5C 3D 5D Unused channel setting R W 6 42 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE EE Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Address hexadecimal Name Read write CH1 CH2 0 Write data error code 1 2 Decimal point position 5 6 Alert definition 9 A Temperature process value PV D E Manipulated value for heating MVh R 11 2 Temperature rise judgment flag 15 16 Heating transistor output flag 19 1A Set value SV monitor 1D Cold junction temperature process value 1E MAN mode shift completion flag 1F System area Use prohibited 20 40 Input range 21 41 Stop mode setting 22 42 Set value SV setting 23 43 Heating
57. 1 2 3 4 689 to 749 1358 to 1418 690 to 750 1359 to 1419 691 to 751 1360 to 1420 692 to 752 1361 to 1421 753 1422 8 34 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of A1SD75MO A1SD75MO QD75MLI Md 29 Current feed value 801 901 1001 801 901 1001 802 902 1002 802 902 1002 Md 30 Machine feed value 803 903 1003 803 903 1003 804 904 1004 804 904 1004 Feedrate 805 905 1005 805 905 1005 Md 32 Valid M code 806 906 1006 808 908 1008 Md 33 Axis error No 807 907 1007 806 906 1006 Md 34 Axis warning No 808 908 1008 807 907 1007 Md 35 Axis operation status 809 909 1009 809 909 1009 810 910 1010 810 910 1010 Md 36 Current speed 811 911 812 912 1012 812 912 1012 813 913 1013 813 913 1013 Md 38 Speed position switching control 814 914 1014 814 914 1014 positioning amount 815 915 1015 815 915 1015 Md 39 External input signal 816 916 1016 816 916 1016 Md 40 Status 817 917 1017 817 917 1017 818 918 1018 818 918 1018 Target value 819 919 1019 819 919 1019 820 920 1020 820 920 1020 Md 42 Targat speed 821 921 1021 821 921 1021 g 822 922 1022 Md 43 OP absolute position 823 92
58. 100 C or more Accuracy compensation Temperature accuracy process value PV Within 2 0 C ambient 150 to 100 C temperature 0 Temperature to 55 C process value PV Within 3 0 C 200 to 150 C Sampling cycle 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used Control output cycle 1 to 100s Input impedance 1MO Input filter 0 to 100s Sensor correction value setting 50 00 to 50 00 Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing Temperature control method PID ON OFF pulse or two position control PID constants setting Can be set by auto tuning Proportional band PID constants range P 0 0 to 1000 0 Integral time 1 1 to 3600s Derivative time D 0 to 3600s Set value SV setting range Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used Output signal ON OFF pulse Rated load voltage 10 2 to 30VDC Max load current 0 1A point 0 4A common Max inrush current 0 4A 10ms Transistor output Leakage current at OFF 0 1mA or less Max voltage drop at ON 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A Response time OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less Number of writes to E7PROM 6 12 Max 100 000 times 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible III Specif
59. 2 A1SD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 8 2 1 Performance specifications comparison O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Model A1SD75P1 A1SD75P2 A1SD75P3 QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat Precautions for QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility replacement Number of control axes 1 2 3 1 2 4 Number of positioning data 600 axis 600 axis items Available 4 axi 2 axis linear Not Not Position Available Available Available linear interpolation available available control interpolation interpolation available function 2 axis Not Not gt circular Available Available Available Available I available available interpolation Position Available Available control Speed Available Available control Speed Positioning position mE Available Available system switching control Position speed in Available Available Switching control 8 5 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT A1SD75P1 A1SD75P2 A1SD75P3 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat Precautions for QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility replacement Positioning range 2 lt Absolute system gt 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 13421772 8 to 13421772 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 1342 17728 to 13
60. 3C 5 System area Use prohibited 3D 5D Unused channel setting R W 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE A1S62TCTT BW S2 A1S62TCRT BW S2 Address hexadecimal Name Read write CH2 3E 5E System area Use prohibited 3F 5F AO Alert alarm 1 mode setting A1 Alert alarm 2 mode setting A2 Alert alarm 3 mode setting A3 Alert alarm 4 mode setting 4 Alert blind section setting A5 Number of alert delays AG Number of delays for heater wire breakage current error detection when output is turned off R W A7 Temperature increase complete range setting A8 Temperature increase complete soak time setting A9 PID continue flag AA Heater voltage compensation function setting AB AC Standard heater current value AF Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting B0 CT monitor method switch 1 B2 Heating manipulated value MV 0 to 4000 R B5 B6 System area Use prohibited B7 B8 B9 to CO C1 Cooling manipulated value MV C2 C3 Cooling manipulated value MV 0 to 4000 R C4 C5 Cooling transistor output flag CF Cooling method setting DO EO Cooling proportional band Pc setting D1 E1 Cooling upper output limiter R W D2 E2 Cooling control output cycle setting D3 E3 Overlap dead band Point Default values for A series modules and Q series modules may be different To apply an A series program using a default v
61. 42 targst speed 821 921 1021 821 921 1021 822 922 1022 Md 43 OP absolute position 823 923 1023 824 924 1024 824 924 1024 Md 44 Movement amount after near point dog ON 825 925 1025 825 925 1025 Md 45 Torque limit stored value 826 926 1026 826 926 1026 Md 46 Special start data instruction code setting value 827 927 1027 827 927 1027 Md 47 Special start data instruction parameter setting value 828 928 1028 828 928 1028 Md 48 Start positioning data No setting value 829 929 1029 829 929 1029 Md 49 In speed limit flag 830 930 1030 830 930 1030 Md 50 In speed change processing flag 831 931 1031 831 931 1031 Md 51 Start data pointer being executed 832 932 1032 834 934 1034 Md 52 Last executed positioning data No 833 933 1033 837 937 1037 Md 53 Repeat counter QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 41 Special start repetition 834 934 1034 832 932 1032 counter Md 54 Positioning data No being executed 835 935 1035 835 935 1035 Md 55 Block No being executed 836 936 1036 836 936 1036 1038 to 1038 to Md 56 Positioning data being executed 838 to 847 938 to 947 1047 838 to 847 938 to 947 1647 Deceleration starting flag 899 999 1099 8 16 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of 15075 0 53 Buffer memory address
62. 5 6 Alert occurrence details 9 A Temperature process value PV D E Heating manipulation value MV R 11 12 Increased temperature determination flag 15 16 Heating transistor output flag 19 1A Heater current process value 1D Cooling contact temperature process value System area Use prohibited 20 40 Input range 21 41 Stop mode setting 22 42 Set value SV setting 23 43 Heating proportional band Ph setting 24 44 Integral time 1 setting 25 45 Derivative time D setting R W 26 46 Alert set value 1 27 47 Alert set value 2 28 48 Alert set value 3 29 49 Alert set value 4 2A 4A Heating cooling upper output limiter setting 2B 4B WT System area Use prohibited 2C 4C 2D 4D Sensor compensation value setting R W 2E 4E System area Use prohibited 2F 4F Heating control output cycle setting 30 50 First order delay digital filter setting R W 31 51 Control response parameter 32 52 m System area Use prohibited 33 53 34 54 Setting change rate limiter R W 2 gt System area Use prohibited 36 56 37 57 Upper setting limiter 38 58 Lower setting limiter RW 39 59 CT selection 3A 5A Heater wire breakage alert setting 3B 5B x System area Use prohibited 3C 5C 3D 5D Not used channel setting R W 1 For the 1562 this area is prohibited to use 2 For the Q64TCRT BW N this area is prohibited to use 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN
63. 8 Dwell time JUMP No 1 1302 2302 3302 2002 8002 14002 destination positioning data No Oo 5 Not used 1303 2303 3303 2003 8003 14003 E 1304 2304 3304 2004 8004 14004 Command speed 1305 2305 3305 2005 8005 14005 8 Da5 Positioning address 1306 2306 3306 2006 8006 14006 OF rosamant amauni 1307 2307 3307 2007 8007 14007 1308 2308 3308 2008 8008 14008 Da 6 Arc address 1309 2309 3309 2009 8009 14009 14010 to No 2 1310 to 1319 2310 to 2319 3310 to 3319 2010 to 2019 8010 to 8019 m 14020 to No 3 1320 to 1329 2320 to 2329 3320 to 3329 2020 to 2029 8020 to 8029 es to to to to to to to 14990 to No 100 2290 to 2299 3290 to 3299 4290 to 4299 2990 to 2999 8990 to 8999 pom Da 10 Shape Da 11 Start data No i s 8 Da 42 Special star 4300 4350 4550 4600 4800 4850 27000 27050 28000 28050 S instruction Da 13 Parameter 8 2nd point 4301 4351 4551 4601 4801 4851 26001 26051 27001 27051 28001 28051 3rd point 4302 4352 4552 4602 4802 4852 26002 26052 27002 27052 28002 28052 T to to to to to to to 50th point 4349 4399 4599 4649 4849 4899 26049 26099 27049 27099 28049 28099 5 2 4400 4650 4900 26100 27100 28100 c Da 15 Condition operator Oo 4402 4652 4902 26102 27102 28102 2 Da 16 Address No 1 4403 4653 4903 26103 27103 28103 5 4404 4654 4904 26104 27104 28104 o A 8 g De Parameter 4405 4655 4
64. 93 value H to 116 CH4 Warning output upper upper limit L 117 value H 118 L CH1 Offset temperature set value 119 H 120 L CH1 Gain temperature set value 121 H to 132 L CH4 Gain temperature set value 133 H 134 Extended averaging processing specification 135 to System area Use prohibited 147 Conversion setting for disconnection 148 R W detection 149 System area Use prohibited 150 CH1 Conversion setting value for L RW 151 disconnection detection H 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G Address decimal Read write i to 156 CH4 Conversion setting value for L 157 disconnection detection H 158 T Mode switching setting 159 160 3 wire type CH1 Factory default offset L 161 value H 162 3 wire type CH1 Factory default gain L 163 value H 164 3 wire type CH1 User range settings L 165 offset value H 166 3 wire type CH1 User range settings L 167 gain value H 168 3 wire type CH1 User range settings L 169 offset resistance value H 170 3 wire type CH1 User range settings L RW 171 gain resistance value H 172 4 wire type CH1 Factory default offset L 173 value H 174 4 wire type CH1 Factory default gain L 175 value H 176 4 wire type CH1 User range settings L 177 offset value H 178 4 wire type CH1 User range settings L 179 gain valu
65. A1S62TCRT S2 A1S62TCRTBW S2 Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more Current sensor Heater disconnection detection specifications U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 6 P H Input accuracy Full scale x 1 0 Number of alert delay 3 to 255 Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connection terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 19A 0 28A Weight 0 25kg 0 28kg External dimensions 34 5 W x 130 H x 93 6 D mm 1 List of usable platinum resistance thermometer temperature measurement range and resolution Platinum resistance thermometer type Temperature Temperature Resolution Resolution measurement range measurement range 200 0 to 600 0 300 to 1100 1 Pt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 200 0 to 500 0 300 to
66. Available Not available Item Description A1S62RD4N Q64RD G Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enables disables a detection of Sd specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Check the specifications selection specified method referring to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual Detected temperature value Stores temperature data in the buffer storage memory I For the Q64RD G a Detects a disconnection of the connected E Disconnection detection O O disconnection is detected per RTD or cable channel Type specification of RTD Specifies a RTD type used O O ee Switches the measured temperature Range switching function Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function O exceeds the set temperature range Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function into a percent value in set width The Process CPU and p A module can be replaced without the Online module replacement O Redundant CPU support this system being stopped function 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 7 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program ref
67. CH2 User range settings offset value CH2 User range settings gain value 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3 A1S62DA Replacing with the Q64DAN 3 3 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S62DA Digital input Voltage 4000 to 4000 8000 to 8000 12000 to 12000 Current 0 to 4000 0 to 8000 0 to 12000 Analog output Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC External load resistance value 2kQ to 1MQ Current 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0 to 600Q Resolution Voltage output Current output 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 value value 2 4000 8000 12000 10V 20mA icto 2000 4000 6000 5V 12mA I O characteristics igital inpu 0 0 0 0 AmA value 2000 4000 6000 5V 4000 8000 12000 10V 1 The offset value is set to OV and the gain value is set to 10V 2 The offset value is set to 4mA and the gain value is set to 20mA Maximum resolution 1 4000 2 5mV 10V 1 8000 1 25mV 10V 1 12000 0 83mV 10V 20mA 2 5 20mA 1 7 20mA Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog output value 1 voltage 100mV current 200pA Maximum conversion speed Within 25ms 2 channels same time for one channel Absolute maximum output Voltage 12V Current 28mA Analog output points 2 channels module Number of writes to EPROM Output short prot
68. Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual A1S68AD Q68AD G Address I Address I Name Read write N Name Read write decimal decimal 0 A D conversion enable disable R W 0 A D conversion enable disable setting 1 Average time Average number of times 1 Writing data error code R 1 Moving average Time constant settings 2 Average time Average number of times 2 Average processing specification R W 2 Moving average Time constant settings RW 3 3 CH3 Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings to to System area Use prohibited 8 8 CH8 Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings 9 9 System area Use prohibited 10 CH1 Average time count 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Average time count RW 11 CH1 Digital output value to to 17 CH8 Average time count 17 CH7 Digital output value R 18 18 CH8 Digital output value System area Use prohibited 19 19 Error code 20 CH1 Digital output value 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 CH2 Digital output value 21 Setting range CH5 to CH8 22 CH3 Digital output value 22 Offset gain setting mode offset specification 23 CHA Digital output val
69. Counter value small 2 Coincidence signal point No 1 enable command CH2 External preset YB CH2 Down count request detection command CH2 Counter value large YC CH2 Count enable point No 2 command CH2 Counter value YD CH2 External preset coincidence point No 2 detection reset command CH2 Counter value small YE CH2 Counter function point No 2 selection start command Fuse broken detection YF CH2 Coincidence signal No 2 reset command HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT A1SD62 E D D S1 Device z Device Signal name Signal name No No CH2 Coincidence signal enable command X1A Y1A CH2 Down count command X1B Y1B CH2 Count enable command x1c_ Use prohibited Y1C CH2 Count value read request CH2 Count function X1D Y1D selection start command X1E X1F Y1F These signals use prohibited in the A1SD62D S1 Use prohibited T 25 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the High Speed Counter Module User s Manual A1SD62 E D D S1 QD62 E D Add
70. I O assignment A 1 I O assignment special 32 points intelligent 16 points Number of channels 1 channel 2 channels O Set 2 at the intelligent Counting speed switch settings 50K 10K 50K I function module switch setting Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input Count input 5VDC nal leve signal 9 d 12VDC 2to5mA 9B 24VDC Counting 1 phase input 50KPPS 10KPPS 1 phase input 50KPPS 2 speed 2 phase input 50KPPS 7KPPS 2 phase input 50KPPS Counting 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 UP DOWN preset counter ring counter function Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 Counter 20 Minimum count g O 5 pulse MS 5 width Unit us 2 1 phase and 2 phase input o E Set input rise time to 5us or less Comparison 5 32 bit signed binary Magnitude range g comparison a contact amp between Dog ON address lt Count value lt Set value lt count value 5 CPU and Comparison Dog OFF address Set value count value O A1SD61 result b contact a Set value gt count value QD62 H01 Dog OFF address lt Count value lt Dog ON address Preset Since the external input External 12 24VDC 3 6mA specifications differ check the Function 5 12 24VDC 2 to 5mA A input E 5VDC 5mA specifications of external device Transistor sink type Coincidence output 2 points channel
71. Input signal error detection function The voltage current outside the setting range is detected Warning output function 1 Process alarm A warning is output if a digital output value falls outside the setting range 2 Rate alarm A warning is output if the varying rate of a digital output value falls outside the preset varying rate range Scaling function Conversion of A D conversion values to preset percentage values and loading into the buffer memory is available Programming steps for the scaling can be eliminated Online module change A module can be replaced without the system being stopped 1 For the A1S68AD the resolution is 1 4000 fixed For the Q68AD G the resolution for both voltage and current is 1 4000 in normal resolution mode In high resolution mode the resolution for the voltage range 10 to 0 to 10V is 1 16000 and the resolution for the voltage in other ranges and current is 1 12000 2 23 Redundant CPU support this function 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 4 3 signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual A1S68AD Q68AD G
72. L 251 CH8 User range settings thermal EMF offset value H 252 CH8 User range settings thermal EMF gain value L 253 CH8 User range settings thermal EMF gain 5 21 value H 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 4 A1S62RD3N Replacing with the Q64RD 5 4 1 Performance specifications comparison Item Measuring method A1S62RD3N 3 wire type Temperature conversion value Output 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Scaling value Applicable platinum RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 JPt100 JIS 1604 1981 Measured Pt100 180 to 600 C temperature 27 10 to 313 71Q ran JPt100 180 to 600 C i 25 80 to 317 28Q 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Analog input points 2 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1 Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between platinum RTD input and channel not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Detected per channe
73. Maker setting 30158 30258 30358 Maker setting 30159 30259 30359 Optional function C 30160 30260 30360 Machine resonance suppression filter 30161 30261 30361 Maker setting 30162 30262 30362 Maker setting 30163 30263 30363 Maker setting 30164 30264 30364 Maker setting 30165 30265 30365 Maker setting 30166 30266 30366 8 22 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of A1SD75MO Buffer memory address 15075 0 QD75MLI Common for axis 1 2 3 Common for axis 1 2 3 4 Md 1 In test mode flag 450 1200 Md 2 Module name 451 88 452 453 ype 454 455 i OS 456 Md 4 version 457 Md 5 Clock data Hour minute 460 Md 6 Clock data Second 100ms 461 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 7 Start axis 462 to 537 1212 to 1287 QD75MLI Md 3 Start information Md 8 Operation type 463 to 538 1213 to 1288 QD75MLDI Md 4 Start No gt Md 9 Start time Hour minute E 464 to 539 1214 to 1289 QD75MO Md 5 Start Hour 8 Md 10 Start time Second 100ms 465 to 540 1215 to 1290 QD75MLI Md 6 Start Minute second Md 11 Error judgment 466 to 5
74. Q62 VS Q62 VS Q62B A61LS A62LS A62LS B5 A63LS A1S62LS Were VS Q62 EDWU Module standard equipment remote setting module B 9 POSITION DETECTION MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 1 REPLACEMENT OF OTHER MODULES REPLACEMENT OF OTHER MODULES 10 1Replacement of Other Modules This section lists AnS series modules not introduced in previous chapters and describes their alternative methods The AnS series modules listed in this section require some special alternative methods because there are no Q series alternative models or their functions and specifications differ from those of Q series modules Product Model Alternative method Consider using the interrupt module QI60 as an alternative Pulse catch module A1SP60 An interrupt program needs to be prepared p Consider programmed timer control by indirectly specifying Analog timer module A1ST60 internal timer There are no alternative models Consider using our partner A1SD35ID1 manufacturer s products Balluff ID system BIS M series which can be connected to Mitsubishi programmable ID interface module controllers A1SD35ID2 For details of a system transition method refer to the technical bulletin FA A 0062 Consider replacing the system with a CC Link system MELSECNET MINI S3 master module A1SJ71PT32 S3 Refer to the Transition from MELSECNET MINI S3 A2C I O to CC Link Handbook L 08061ENG Consider shift
75. R W 5 CH5 digital value 5 CH5 Digital value 6 CH6 digital value 6 CH6 Digital value 7 CH7 digital value 7 CH7 Digital value 8 CH8 digital value 8 CH8 Digital value 9 System area Use prohibited 9 System area Use prohibited _ 10 CH1 set value check code 10 11 CH2 set value check code 11 CH1 Set value check code 12 CH3 set value check code 12 CH2 Set value check code 13 CH4 set value check code R 13 CH3 Set value check code 14 CH5 set value check code 14 CH4 Set value check code 15 CH6 set value check code 15 CH5 Set value check code 16 CH7 set value check code 16 CH6 Set value check code R 17 CH8 set value check code CH7 Set value check code CH8 Set value check code Error code Setting range CH1 to CH4 Setting range CH5 to CH8 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Offset gain setting mode Gain specification R W Offset gain adjustment value specification System area Use prohibited Mode switching setting R W System area Use prohibited CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value Industrial shipment settings offset value Industrial shipment settings gain value R W CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH6 Industrial ship
76. R W analog module B6 Cold junction temperature compensation selection R W B7 Control switching monitor B8 B9 BA BB Auto tuning mode selection R W BC to BF System area Use prohibited CO DO EO FO Alert 1 mode setting C1 D1 E1 1 Alert 2 mode setting C2 D2 E2 F2 Alert 3 mode setting ai C3 D3 E3 F3 Alert 4 mode setting C4toCF D4toDF E4 to EF F4 to FF System area Use prohibited 100 to 107 Heater current process value R 108 to 10F CT input channel assignment setting 110 to 117 CT selection R W 118 to 11F Reference heater current value to 23E 25E 27E 29E Self tuning setting R W 23F 25F 27F 29F Self tuning flag R 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 5 2 A1S64TCTRT BW and Q series modules heating cooling control m Name Read write CH1 CH2 0 Error code 1 2 Decimal point position 5 6 Alert detail 9 A Temperature process value PV D E Manipulated value for heating MVh R 11 12 Temperature rise judgment flag 15 16 Heating transistor output flag 19 1A Measured heater current value 1D Cold junction temperature process value System area Use prohibited 20 40 Input range 21 41 Stop mode setting 22 42 Set value SV setting 23 43 Heating proportional band Ph setting 24 44 Integral time 1 setting 25 45 Derivative time D setting R W 26 46 Setting of Alert alarm
77. S Md 27 Axis warning occurrence time Second 100ms QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 17 Axis warning 3692 to 752 1361 to 1421 occurrence Minute second Md 28 Warning history pointer 753 1422 8 15 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of A1SD75PO S3 Buffer memory address 15075 0 53 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 29 Current feed value 801 901 1001 801 901 1001 802 902 1002 802 902 1002 Md 30 Machine feed value 803 903 1003 803 903 1003 804 904 1004 804 904 1004 Md31F6edr te 805 905 1005 805 905 1005 Md 32 Valid M code 806 906 1006 808 908 1008 Md 33 Axis error No 807 907 1007 806 906 1006 Md 34 Axis warning No 808 908 1008 807 907 1007 Md 35 Axis operation status 809 909 1009 809 909 1009 810 910 1010 810 910 1010 Md 26 Curment speed 811 911 1011 811 911 1011 812 912 1012 812 912 1012 Teedrate 813 913 1013 813 913 1013 s I w 814 914 1014 814 914 1014 Md 38 Speed position switching control positioning amount 815 915 1015 815 915 1015 Md 39 External input output signal 816 916 1016 816 916 1016 Md 40 Status 817 917 1017 817 917 1017 818 918 1018 818 918 1018 Mea Target value 819 919 1019 819 919 1019 820 920 1020 820 920 1020 Md
78. TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this handbook uses the following generic terms and abbreviations Generic term abbreviation Description mSeries A series Abbreviation for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A series programmable controllers AnS series Abbreviation for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A series programmable controllers A AnS series Generic term for A series and AnS series QnA series Abbreviation for large types of Mitsubishi MELSEC QnA series programmable controllers QnAS series Abbreviation for compact types of Mitsubishi MELSEC QnA series programmable controllers QnA QnAS series Generic term for QnA series and QnAS series A AnS QnA QnAS series Generic term for A series AnS series QnA series and QnAS series Q series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers BCPU module type CPU module Generic term for A series AnS series QnA series QnAS series and Q series CPU modules Basic model QCPU Generic term for the QO0JCPU QOOCPU and Q01CPU High Performance model QCPU Generic term for the QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU This handbook mainly explains about the QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU and Q12HCPU Process CPU Generic term for the QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU Universal model QCPU Generic term for the QOOUJCP
79. Terminal block wiring Connector wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Counting speed Changed 50KPPS 4 Counting range 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 A1SD61 QD62 H01 Program does not need to be reviewed 5 The number of occupied l O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 6 Performance specifications Not changed 7 Function specifications Limit switch output function Coincidence output function Two coincidence detection output points be High speed counter set module m 1 External wiring Terminal block wiring Connector wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Counting speed Changed 1 phase input 10KPPS 2 phase input 7KPPS 4 Counting range 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 QD62 H02 Program does not need to be reviewed P 5 Program The number of occupied l O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 6 Performance specifications Not changed 7 Function specifications Limit switch output function Coincidence output function Two coincidence detection output points can be Set 1 External wiring Terminal block wiring Connector wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Counting speed Can be switched 200KPPS 100KPPS or 10KPPS 4 Counting range 24 bit binary 0 to 16777215 gt A1SD62
80. The number of 32 points Number of occupied I O 16 points occupied I O points S pd I O assignment special 32 P n po points oints I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 i p points Number of channels 2 channels Set the counting d of the QD62D 500K 200K 100K 10K Counting speed switch with the intelligent 200K 10K 200K to 100K to 10K to 10KPPS settings 500KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS or less function module switch setting of GX Developer Count Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input input Signal level EIA Standard RS 422 A Differential line driver level signal oA 9B AM26LS31 manufactured by Texas Instruments or equivalent 1 phase 200KPPS 10KPPS Counting input d M alae 500KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS speed Max 2 phase 7kpps input Since the QD62D 32 bit signed Counting 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary Mii binary values range 0 to 16 777 215 2147483648 to 2147483647 sequence program needs to be changed Type UP DOWN preset counter ring counter function Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 o 2 o T 500KPPS TUI te amp Counter Minimum phase difference 8 in 2 phase input O 5us Es E o S a a 200KPPS 2525 23 Unit us Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 1 25u
81. Use prohibited Warning output signal YD Conversion completion YE flag Error flag YF Error clear request 5 58 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 7 4 Buffer memory address comparison Address decimal Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A1S62RD4N Q64RD G Read write Read write 0 Conversion enable disable specification Conversion enable disable setting 7 CH1 Time count moving average time 1 Averaging processing specification i constant setting R W CH2 Time count moving average time 2 CH1 Averaging time count constant setting R W 7 CH3 Time count moving average time 3 CH2 Averaging time count i constant setting CH4 Time count moving average time constant setting 5 6 System area Use prohibited 7 System area Use prohibited 8 9 Averaging processing specification R W 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit R Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperature value 16bit CH1 Measured temperature value 16bit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value 16bit R 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 16bit 14 n CH4 Measured temperature value 16bit E System area Use prohibited 16 xa 17 System area Use prohibited 18
82. a 8 21 8 3 2 Functional comparison a nennen rre ener nnne nnns 8 25 8 3 3 1 O signal COMPARISON 5 2 ie re e d p te iu PE p 8 28 8 3 4 X Buffer memory address comparison sssssssssssseeeeee eene nnns 8 29 8 3 5 External interface specifications comparison eene 8 41 B4 A DTO u eer nien 8 44 8 4 1 Performance specifications comparison enne 8 44 8 4 2 Function COMPARISON 5 ctetu aeta Bd UR NR BL CER NATA TA RA AR ERRAT 8 46 8 4 3 I O signals comparison U nemen ennemi en nennen nennen nenne 8 50 8 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison aa 8 51 8 4 5 Interface specifications comparison with external devices 8 53 8 4 6 X Precautions for the replacement of the A1SD70 by the QD73A11 8 54 CHAPTER9 POSITION DETECTION MODULE REPLACEMENT 9 1to9 2 9 1 Position Detection Module Replacement r 9 1 CHAPTER 10 REPLACEMENT OF OTHER MODULES 10 1 to 10 2 10 1 Replacement of Other Modules eene nnne nemen nns 10 1 CHAPTER 11 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 11 1to 11 2 11 1 External Lena nnn nn BEN eR NER XERRER EXER XR 11 1 APPENDICES App 1 to App 8 A
83. amplifier MR H Between QD75M and MR H Between AD75M and MR H Between MR H amplifier SSCNET cable amplifier amplifier and MR H amplifier MR J2HBUSOM x x x MR J2HBUSOM A MR HBUSOM x MR J2CN1 x x x MR J2CN1 A 1 MR HBCNS x 1 Connector set for making the cable by user 8 43 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 4 A1SD70 8 4 1 Performance specifications comparison A1SD70 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD73A1 Precautions for replacement Number of control axes 1 axis 1 axis Capacity 1 data 1 data Positioning data rata Sequence program Sequence program Position control mode Position control mode Mode Positioning two phase trapezoidal Positioning two phase trapezoidal positioning positioning Speed position control switch mode Speed position control switch mode Position control mode Position control mode System Absolute system incremental system Absolute system incremental system Speed position control switch mode Speed position control switch mode Incremental system Incremental system Position 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse command 32 bit signed binary 32 bit signed binary The specification has Speed 1 to 400 000 pulse s 1 to 4 000 000 pulse s improved Upward compatibility Positioning Acceleration deceleration Auto
84. and scaling lower limit value as those of resolution mode of the A1S63ADA using the scaling function 4 Point The Q64AD2DA of the replacement modules is not equipped with the simple loop control Function expressions function Continuous use of the simple loop control Function expressions which has been used with the A1S63ADA requires preparation of a sequence program Refer to Section 4 1 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 2 3 signal comparison Because the I O signals differ between the modules the sequence program needs to be changed For details on the I O signals and the sequence program refer to Analog Input Output Module User s Manual Q64AD2DA A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA DS Signal name Device Signal name No 9 No s X0 WDT error Y0 X1 Conversion READY Y1 2 Error detection Y2 x3 CH3 output upper limit Y3 value hold x4 CH3 output lower limit value hold X5 Simple loop control in Y5 execution X6 Y6 Unusable Unusable X8 Y8 9 Y9 Offset gain selection XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE YE XF x10 Y10 CH3 D A conversion value output enable xu YA Simple loop control execution enable X12 Y12 Error reset x13 Y13 CH3 upper lower limits Unusable cancel X14 Y14 X15 Y15 Unusable X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A Offse
85. band setting 2F 4F 6F 8F Control output cycle setting 30 50 70 90 Primary delay digital filter setting 31 51 71 91 Control response parameter 32 52 72 92 AUTO MAN mode shift 33 53 73 93 MAN output setting 34 54 74 94 Setting change rate limiter 35 55 75 95 AT bias 36 56 76 96 Forward reverse action setting 37 57 77 9 Upper limit setting limiter 38 58 78 98 Lower limit setting limiter 39 59 79 99 System area Use prohibited 3A 5A 9 Heater disconnection alert setting 3B 5B 7B 9B Loop disconnection detection judgment time RIW 3C 5C 7 9C Loop disconnection detection dead band 3D 5D 7D 9D Unused channel setting 1 For the Q64TCRT BW N this area is prohibited to use 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 40 A1S64TCTRT BW Name Read write 3E 5E 7E 9E Self tuning setting R W 3F 5 9F Self tuning flag R A0 Mode setting for Alert alarm 1 A1 Mode setting for Alert alarm 2 A2 Mode setting for Alert alarm 3 A3 Mode setting for Alert alarm 4 A4 Alert dead band setting A5 Alert delay count A6 Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count R W A7 Temperature rise completion range setting A8 Temperature rise completion soak time setting A9 PID continuation flag AA Heater voltage compensation setting AB AG AD AE Heater current reference value AF Transistor output monitor ON delay time settin
86. changed 6 Performance specifications Not changed 7 Function specifications Not changed 4 An input filter system of the QD62 H01 and QD62 H02 is the same as that of A AnS series high speed counter modules For this reason modules can be replaced without considering the specifications of the existing pulse generator such as an encoder When replacing the A1SD61 select a module based on the specifications such as the counting speed HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Point 1 Module replacement A pulse generator such as an encoder that is connected to an AnS series module can be connected to a Q series module Check the operation of the device before actually used in the system because the operating environment the external wiring method differs 2 Counting range of the counter Counting range differs between AnS series modules and Q series modules To change the counting range so that the ranges will be the same in the modules before and after the replacement program needs to be reviewed A1SD62 E D D S1 0 to 16 777 215 24 bit unsigned binary A1SD61 QD62 E D QD62 H01 H02 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 32 bit signed binary 3 Wiring An external wiring method differs between AnS series modules and Q series modules 15061 A1SD62 E D D S1 Wiring using a terminal block QD62 E D QD62 H01 H02 Wiring using a connector In module replacement continuous use of the I O signal wire with solderless te
87. changed 2 Number of slots Not changed Q64RD G 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Transformer isolation is provided between channels 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Point The existing wiring for the AnS QnAS series modules can be connected directly to the Q series modules using the upgrade tool conversion adaptor manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd MELSEC AnS QnAS MELSEC Q Product Conversion adaptor series module series module Q68TD G H01 2 R 1 A1S68TD ae ERNT ASQT68TD Temperature input module Q68 1D 6 ERNT ASQT68TD H02 A1S62RD3 N Q64RD A1862RD4 N ERNT ASQT62RD 4 Conversion adapter with fixture Before using the conversion adapter with fixture be sure to fasten its fixture to the base adapter or DIN rail mounting bracket using screws 2 Cannot be mounted on the AnS size version Q large type base unit 5 2 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 2 A1S68TD Replacing with the Q64TD 5 2 1 Performance specifications comparison 1 Performance specifications comparison Item Temperature sensor input A1S68TD 0 to 1700 C Detected temperature value 16 bit signed binary 0 to 17000 value up to the first decimal place x 10 Output Scaling value 1
88. channels used 1 to 100s 1MO 0 to 100s 50 00 to 50 0096 Upscale processing PID ON OFF pulse or two position control Can be set by auto tuning or self tuning 0 0 to 1000 0 0 to 3600s 0 to 3600s Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used ON OFF pulse 10 to 30VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common 0 4A 10ms O O O O OJO O JOJO 0 1mA or less 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A OFF ON 2 or less ON OFF 2ms or less O Max 1012 times number of read write from to a non volatile memory 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method only when it is not affected by noise Accuracy C full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy Example Accuracy at the input range of 38 200 0 to 400 0 C the operating ambient temperature of 35 C and the temperature process value PV of 300 C Full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy 400 0 200 0 C x 0 007 1 0 5 2 C 6 17 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Item Insulation output Specifications A1S64TCRT S1 A1S64TCRTBW S1 Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between inpu
89. cold junction temperature compensation accuracy 400 0 200 0 C x 0 007 1 0 5 2 C 6 13 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Item Insulation method Specifications A1S64TCTT S1 A1S64TCTTBW S1 Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more Current sensor Heater disconnection detection specifications U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 6 P H Input accuracy Full scale x 1 0 Number of alert delay 3 to 255 Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connection terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 33A 0 42A Weight 0 27kg 0 30kg External dimensions 34 5 W x 130 H x 93 6 D mm 1 List of thermocouple type temperature measurement range and resolution Thermocouple type Temperature Temperature
90. connection Solid wire size Stranded wi Screw tightening torque re 0 2 to 0 8mm x 2 wires 0 5 to 0 6Nem The following table shows the specifications of the applicable wire to the external power supply connector 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 3 2 Functional comparison 1 Functions of A D conversion O Available Not available Item Description A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA Precautions for replacement AD conversion enable disable Allows specifying whether to enable or disable A D conversion ET for each channel Disabling the conversion on unused channels reduces the sampling time Samplindibrocessin Sequentially performs A D conversion on analog input values HIR 9 for each channel outputting the digital output value each time Performs averaging processing A D conversion units of Time average time for each channel and performs digital output of its average value Performs averaging processing on A D conversion in units of Averaging Count average counts for each channel and performs digital output of its processing average value Performs averaging processing on A D conversion in units of counts for each channel with the range moving response to Moving average I each sampling processing and performs digital output of its average value Range switching function Allows selection of the input range to be used Maximum and minimum values Hol
91. internally changed into the continuous positioning control restart after deceleration stop QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Even if the reference axis operates in reverse direction with interpolation the control remains as the continuous path control In single axis operation the operation is the same as that of the A1TSD75PLI S3 Near pass For the continuous path control only the near pass function is available Positioning address pass is not conducted 2 axis interpolation 2 axis linear interpolation 2 axis fixed feed Circular interpolation The interpolation target axis can be randomly set with a positioning identifier Step function 8 9 1 Step stopped is changed to Stopped and Step error occurring is changed to Error occurring in the axis operations status parameters 2 The restart command for step start information 02H is deleted 3 The step operation is restarted with the restart command 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Changed function Description The command in position width is expanded AD75A1SD75PLI S3 1 to 32767000 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN 1 to 2147483647 Positioning start No 7004 to 7010 block start designation and 8000 to 8049 indirect designation are deleted With QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the number of blocks has been change to 5 7000 to 7004 With the ATSD75PLI S3 this data is called Positioning start information Start history The configuration of start informatio
92. lower limit value This function reduces the time and i A1S63ADA allows use of the effort to create a program of the scale conversion nie same digital output values as in the A1S63ADA Logs records digital output values or scaling values digital Logging function operation values 10000 points of data can be logged for each O 4 6 channel 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Functions of D A conversion Item D A conversion enable disable Description Allows specifying whether to enable or disable D A conversion O Available Not available A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA Precautions for replacement Disabling the D A conversion on channels that are not to be used function for each channel O 9 in the Q64AD2DA reduces the conversion cycle Allows specifying whether to output D A conversion values o ON offset values for each channel The conversion speed remains constant irrespective of the output enabled disabled state Range switching function Allows selection of the range to be used For the A1S63ADA all the channels are set collectively by means of the HLD CLR terminal All tti hether to hold HOLD CLEAR Analog output HOLD CLEAR ows setting whether to hold or clear CLEAR a alog on the front side of the module output values depending the CPU module operating status function For the Q64AD2DA each RUN STOP or a stop error cha
93. lower upper limit L 89 value H 90 CH1 Warning output upper lower limit L 91 value H 92 CH1 Warning output upper upper limit L 93 value H to 116 CH4 Warning output upper upper limit L 117 value H 118 L CH1 Offset temperature set value 119 H 120 L CH1 Gain temperature set value 121 H 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 51 Q64RD Read write Address decimal 132 CH4 Gain temperature L 133 H R W 134 Extended averaging processing specification 135 to 147 System area Use prohibited Conversion setting for disconnection 148 R W detection 149 System area Use prohibited 150 CH1 Conversion setting value for L 151 disconnection detection H to CH4 Conversion setting value for L 157 disconnection detection H Mode switching setting R W 161 3 wire type CH1 Factory default offset value L 4 wire type 4 User range settings gain resistance value L 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 7 A1S62RD4N Replacing with the Q64RD G 5 7 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S62RD4N Measuring method 4 wire type 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Temperature Value up to the first decimal place 10 conversion
94. of external device Transistor sink type output 2 Coincidence points channel output 12 24 VDC 0 5A point External 2A common A Output currents differ output Transistor open collector Limit switch output output 12 24VDC 0 1A point 0 8A common Internal current consumption s 0 35A 0 30A 5VDC Weight 0 27kg 0 11kg 1 A program used before replacement be utilized by setting the start I O signal numbers of the modules mounted to the right of the QD62 so that they can be the same as that of the module before replacement Set the start number at Start XY of the I O assignment tab The number of occupied points of the QD62 cannot be changed 2 The rise fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed Countable counting speeds as follows Counting a pulse greater than t 50us may result in a miscount For the QD62 Rise fall time Common to 1 phase input and 2 phase input t 1 25us or less 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS t 2 5us or less 100KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS t 25 or less 10KPPS 10KPPS B t 500us 500KPPS t t HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Comparison between A1SD61 and QD62 H01 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat A1SD61 QD62 H01 ibilit Precautions for replacement ibility 16 points 32 points Number of occupied I O points
95. output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU The analog output will be updated after Synchronous output request YD is set to ON and the time specified as programmable controller CPU processing time 120us has Synchronous output elapsed However the analog output will be fixed to CH1 and other channels CH2 to CH8 cannot be used When the module is mounted on a remote I O station the analog output will not be synchronized because of a link scan delay if the synchronous output function is specified 1 On Q68DAVN the setting of HOLD CLEAR is carried out for each channel 2 Forthe Q68DAVN the status is set with the intelligent Holds an analog value that was output when the function module switch Analog output HOLD 6 i programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status or an setting of GX Developer CLEAR function error occurs 3 Check the execution status of output referring to Analog output status combination list in the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when CHO Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Analog output test while the programmable DA Enable Disable Setting enable disable controller CPU is in the Psa CHO Output STOP status enable disable Enable Disable Enable Disable flag Analog output test Allowed
96. settings offset value CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value Industrial shipment settings offset value Industrial shipment settings gain value R W 3 32 CH5 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH5 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH6 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68DAVN Address decimal Read write CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 User range settings offset value 225 User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value CH8 User range settings gain value R W 3 33 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 4 ANALOG I O MODULE
97. signal error detection flag R 315 515 715 to to to System area 319 519 719 320 520 720 Oldest pointer R 321 521 721 Latest pointer R 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA 122 322 522 722 Logging data points R 123 323 523 723 Trigger pointer R 124 324 524 724 to to to to System area 189 389 589 789 190 390 590 790 Latest error code R First two Last two 191 391 591 791 digits of the digits of the R year year 192 392 592 792 Error time Month Day R 193 393 593 793 Hour Minute R 194 394 594 794 Second Bay ovine R week 195 395 595 795 to to to to System area 199 399 599 799 4 28 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal NAS Readiwrite CH5 CH6 800 1000 D A conversion enable disable setting R W 801 1001 System area 802 1002 Digital input value R W 803 1003 to to System area 809 1009 810 1010 bu conversion scaling enable disable RW setting 811 1011 D A conversion scaling lower limit value R W 812 1012 D A conversion scaling upper limit value R W 813 1013 Shifting amount to input value R W 814 1014 to to System area 899 1099 900 1100 Set value check code R 901 1101 System area 902 1102 Real conversion digital value R
98. temperature value Stores temperature data in the buffer storage memory E DAL This function detects connected platinum For the Q64RD a disconnection i i i RTD or cable breakage is detected per channel Specification of platinum RTD i e Specifies a platinum RTD type used O O y ee Switches the measured temperature Range switching function Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function exceeds the set temperature range x Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function into a percent value in set width 5 A module can be replaced without the I Online module replacement Redundant CPU support this system being stopped function 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 6 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A1S62RD4N Q64RD Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO WDT error flag YO X1 READY flag Y1 X2 Write data error flag Y X disconnection detected X3 Y3 flag CH1 and CH2 4 Y4 X5 5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 Use prohibited 8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE YE Use prohibited XF YF X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15
99. the AnS QnAS series modules can be connected directly to the Q series modules using the upgrade tool conversion adaptor manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd MELSEC AnS QnAS MELSEC Q Product Conversion adaptor series module series module A1S62DA Q62DAN ERNT ASQT62DA Analog output module A1S68DAV Q68DAVN A1S68DAI Q68DAIN For contact information for inquiries on the upgrade tool manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd refer to Section 2 1 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 2 A1S62DA Replacing with the Q62DAN 3 2 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S62DA Digital input Voltage 4000 to 4000 8000 to 8000 12000 to 12000 Current 0 to 4000 0 to 8000 0 to 12000 Analog output Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC External load resistance value 2kQ to 1MQ Current 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0 to 600Q Resolution Voltage output Current output 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 value value 2 4000 8000 12000 10V 20mA _ 2000 4000 6000 5V 12mA I O characteristics Digital input 0 0 0 0 value 2000 4000 6000 5V 4000 8000 12000 10V 1 The offset value is set to OV and the gain value is set to 10V 2 The offset value is set to 4mA and the gain value is set to 20mA 14000 2 5mV 10V BUA 20mA Maximum resolution 4 8000 1 25 10V 2 5 20mA 1 12000 0 83m
100. time changes depending on the number of channels used number of channels set to A D conversion enable and whether with or without the temperature drift compensation The A D conversion for analog input values is function unction performed successively for each channel and Sampling processing a a Without temperature drift the digital output value is output upon each compensation function processing conversion time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel b With temperature drift compensation function processing time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel 160us I The setting range of average time and For each channel A D conversion values are count differ averaged for the set number of times or set ERAT Averaging processing Check the specifications referring to amount of time and the average value is c b the Analog Digital Converter Module output as a digital value User s Manual 7 r The maximum and minimum values of the Maximum and minimum S digital output values are retained the values hold function module Errors arising from changes in the ambient temperature of the module are automatically Temperature drift compensated to improve conversion accuracy compensation function The temperature drift compensation function can be performed at A D conversion time for all channels 160us The resolution can be switched accor
101. to to to to System area 17 Coordinate points setting 29 229 429 629 18 poto CH coordinates 30 230 430 630 Logging enable disable setting R W 19 CH3 coordinates 31 231 431 631 Logging cycle setting value R W 20 Point 1 CH1 coordinates 32 232 432 632 Logging cycle unit setting R W 21 CH3 coordinates 33 233 433 633 Logging data setting R W 22 Point 2 CH1 coordinates 34 234 434 634 Logging points after trigger R W 23 coordinates 35 235 435 635 Level trigger condition setting R W 24 91 coordinates 36 236 436 636 Trigger data R W 25 CH3 coordinates 37 237 437 637 Trigger setting value R W 26 CH1 coordinates 238 438 638 27 Point 4 CH3 coordinates RW to to i System area 28 Sains CH1 coordinates 99 299 499 699 29 coordinates 100 300 500 700 Digital output value R 30 Point 6 CH1 coordinates 101 301 501 701 System area 31 CH3 coordinates 102 302 502 702 Scaling value R 32 Point 7 CH1 coordinates 103 303 503 703 System area 33 CH3 coordinates 104 304 504 704 Maximum digital output value R 34 Point 8 CH1 coordinates 105 305 505 705 System area 35 CH3 coordinates 106 306 506 706 Minimum digital output value R 36 Point 9 CH1 coordinates 107 307 507 707 System area 37 CH3 coordinates 108 308 508 708 Maximum scaling value R 109 309 509 709 System area 110 310
102. to 114 CH8 Process alarm lower lower limit value 115 CH8 Process alarm lower upper limit value 116 CH8 Process alarm upper lower limit value 117 CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value 118 CH1 Rate alarm warning detection period to 125 CH8 Rate alarm warning detection period 126 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 127 CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value to 140 CH8 Rate alarm upper limit value R W 141 CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value CH1 Input signal error detection setting 142 value CH1 Input signal error detection lower limit setting value to CH8 Input signal error detection setting 149 value CH8 Input signal error detection lower limit setting value 150 CH1 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value to 157 CH8 Input signal error detection upper limit setting value 158 e Mode switching setting 159 160 to System area Use prohibited 199 200 Save data classification setting R W 201 System area Use prohibited 202 CH1 Factory default offset value 203 CH1 Factory default gain value to 216 CH8 Factory default offset value 217 CH8 Factory default gain value RW 218 CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value to 232 CH8 User range settings offset value 233 CH8 User range settings gain value 2 26 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 1 List of Analog Output Module Alternative Models for Repl
103. to System area 1819 1820 Error code First two Last two 1821 digits of digits of the year the year 1822 History 2 Ertor Month Day R 1823 us Hour Minute 1824 Second Day of the week 1825 to System area 1829 1830 Error code First two Last two 1831 digits of digits of the year the year 1832 History 3 Error Month Day R 1833 tme Hour Minute 1834 second Day of the week 1835 to System area 1839 1840 Error code First two Last two 1841 digits of digits of the year the year 7842 History 4 Error Tenth Day R 1843 ime Hour Minute 1844 secondi Day of the week 1845 to System area 1849 1850 Error code First two Last two 1851 digits of digits of the year the year 1852 History 5 Error Month Day R 1853 zu Hour Minute 1854 Second 22797 the week 1855 to System area 1859 4 32 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name 1860 Error code First two Last two 1861 digits of digits of the year the year 1862 History 6 Error ont Day R 1863 ime Hour Minute Day of 1864 Second he week 1865 to System area 1869 1870 Error code First two Last two 1871 digits of digits of i the year the year 1872 History 7 Error Month Day R 1873
104. used under a normal temperature decreases approximately at 1 4 speed of the case when it is energized App 1 Appendix 2 Relevant Manuals Appendix 2 1 Replacement handbooks 1 Transition guide Manual name MELSEC A QnA Series Transition Guide Manual number L NA 08077E A large AnS small 2 MELSEC AnS QnAS Series Transition Guide 2 Transition from MELSEC A QnA large type to Q series handbook No Manual name L NA 08236E Manual number Target A large AnS small Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series L 08043ENG 1 Handbook Fundamentals Transition from MELSEC AnS QnAS Small Type Series to Q L 08219ENG x Series Handbook Fundamentals Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series L 08046ENG x 2 Handbook Intelligent Function Modules Transition from MELSEC AnS QnAS Small Type Series to Q L 08220ENG x Series Handbook Intelligent Function Modules Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type AnS QnAS 3 L 08048ENG Small Type Series to Series Handbook Network Modules Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type AnS QnAS 4 L 08050ENG Small Type Series to Series Handbook Communications 5 Transition from MELSEC A0J2H Series to Q Series Handbook L O8060ENG Transition from MELSECNET MINI S3 A2C I O to CC Link 6 L 08061ENG 7 Tr
105. value 126 to 147 System area Use prohibited Conversion setting for disconnection 148 R W detection 149 System area Use prohibited Conversion setting for disconnection 150 to 153 R W detection CH1 to CH4 154 to 157 System area Use prohibited 158 to 159 Mode switching setting 160 CH1 Factory default offset value 161 CH1 Factory default gain value 162 CH1 User range settings offset value 163 CH1 User range settings gain value CH1 User range settings thermal EMF 164 offset value L 165 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF offset value H 166 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF gain value L 167 CH1 User range settings thermal EMF gain value H R W 168 CH2 Factory default offset value 169 CH2 Factory default gain value 170 CH2 User range settings offset value 171 CH2 User range settings gain value CH2 User range settings thermal EMF 172 offset value L 173 CH2 User range settings thermal EMF offset value H 174 CH2 User range settings thermal EMF gain value L 175 CH2 User range settings thermal EMF gain value H 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 11 Q64TD Address 3 Read write decimal 176 CH3 Factory default offset value 177 CH3 Factory default gain value 178 CH3 User range settings offset value 179 CH3 User range settings gain value 180 CH3 User rang
106. value 23 55 H 24 56 to to System area Use prohibited 31 1 These addresses are use prohibited in the A1SD62D S1 T 26 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 1 List of Positioning Module Alternative Models for Replacement AnS series Transition to Q series 1 External wiring Not changed 2 An external power supply 15VDC is not required The connector installation direction is reverse 2 Number of slots Not changed Two slots are occupied 3 Program Buffer memory assignment and change of the setting method 4 Performance specifications change Upward compatibility 5 Function specifications Partly changed LED indication and function setting method A1SD70 QD73A1 QD75P1N 1 External wiring Connector and wiring are changed when an open collector is 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program signals and buffer memory assignment are changed A1SD75P1 connected The entire program is reviewed according to the S3 QD75D1N specifications change 4 Performance specifications Not changed when a differential driver is 5 Function specifications Partly changed connected Example Manual pulse generator 1 axis 1 module QD75P2N 1 1 External wiring Connector and wiring are changed when an open collector is 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program signals and buffer memory assignment are changed A1SD75P2 connected
107. value CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value RW CH3 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH3 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH4 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH4 Industrial shipment settings gain value 2 9 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD Address CH1 User range settings offset value 211 CH1 User range settings gain value 212 CH2 User range settings offset value 213 CH2 User range settings gain value 214 CH3 User range settings offset value 215 CH3 User range settings gain value 216 CH4 User range settings offset value CH4 User range settings gain value Read write R W 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 3 A1S68AD Replacing with the Q68ADV or Q68ADI 2 3 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S68AD Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input Current 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 Digital output 16 bit signed binary I O characteristics Analog input Digital output 0 to 10V 0 to 4000 10V to 10V 2000 to 2000 OV to 5V or 0 to 20mA 0 to 4000 1 to 5V or 4 to 20mA 0 to 4000 I O characteristics maximum resolution Maximum resolution Analog input Digital output 0 to 10V 2 5mV 10V to 10V 5mV OV to 5V 1 25m
108. value R 23 Scaling value 51 CH2 Scaling value 24 CH5 Scaling value R 52 CH3 Scaling value 25 CH6 Scaling value 53 Scaling value 26 CH7 Scaling value 54 to 61 System area Use prohibited 27 CH8 Scaling value 62 CH1 Scaling range lower limit value 28 A D conversion completion flag 63 CH1 Scaling range upper limit value 29 System area Use prohibited 64 CH2 Scaling range lower limit value 30 CH1 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 65 CH2 Scaling range upper limit value RW 31 CH1 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 66 CH3 Scaling range lower limit value 32 CH2 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 67 CH3 Scaling range upper limit value 33 CH2 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 68 CH4 Scaling range lower limit value 34 CH3 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 69 CH4 Scaling range upper limit value 35 CH3 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 70 to 77 System area Use prohibited 36 CH4 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 37 CH4 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit RIW 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value 38 CH5 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 80 CH2 Scaling width lower limit value 39 CH5 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 81 CH2 Scaling width upper limit value 40 CH6 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 82 CH3 Scaling width lower limit value 41 CH6 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 83 CH3 Scaling width upper limit value RW 42 CH7 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 84 CH4 Scaling width lower limit value 43 CH7 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 85
109. write Read write 0 Conversion enable disable specification Conversion enable disable setting 7 CH1 Time count moving average time 1 Averaging processing specification i constant setting R W CH2 Time count moving average time 2 CH1 Averaging time count constant setting R W 7 CH3 Time count moving average time 3 CH2 Averaging time count i constant setting CH4 Time count moving average time constant setting 5 6 System area Use prohibited 7 System area Use prohibited 8 9 Averaging processing setting R W 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit R Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperature value 16bit CH1 Measured temperature value 16bit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value 16bit R 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 16bit 14 n CH4 Measured temperature value 16bit 5 System area Use prohibited 16 xa 17 System area Use prohibited 18 CH1 Detected temperature value L 19 32bit H R Error code R 20 CH2 Detected temperature value L Setting range 21 32bit H 22 23 24 25 26 27 m 28 System area Use prohibited 29 30 31 32 xa 5 System area Use prohibited 34 Write data error code R W 35 Conversion completed flag R 5 49 Type specification of platinum RTD 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD Address decimal Read write i 45 46
110. 0 C 2 0 25 of measured 6 75 C of measured temperature temperature 900 to 1000 C 9 3 3 210 to 40 C 9 3 3 at o1 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 value of 0 or 0 J 40 to 750 C 0 25 of measured i 5 625 of measured temperature temperature 750 to 1200 C 9 3 3 270 to 200 C 3 3 3 x Larger value of 0 5 C 0 5 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 1 n 200 to 0 C 2 6 0 C of measured temperature of measured temperature VAGE Larger value of 0 06 or 0 02 value of 0 or 0 0 to 350 C 0 25 of measured 2 625 C of measured temperature temperature 350 to 400 C 9 3 5 270 to 200 C 9 3 3 x Larger value of 0 5 C 0 5 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 2 7 200 to 0 C 2 11 0 of measured temperature of measured temperature M cud eic Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 value of 0 or 0 0 to 1250 C 2 0 25 of measured 9 375 C of measured temperature temperature 1250 to 1300 C 9 3 3 4 If a value entered from the thermocouple is outside the measured temperature range given in the table it is handled as the maximum minimum value of the measured temperature range 2 The accuracy only in the temperature ranges of Class 1 to 3 shaded areas in JIS C1602 1995 apply 3 Temperature can be measured but accuracy is not guaranteed 5 6 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEM
111. 0 1A OFF gt ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less O O OO O O JO O Max 1012 times number of read write from to a non volatile memory 4 Calculate the accuracy in the following method only when it is not affected by noise Accuracy C full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy Example Accuracy at the input range of 38 200 0 to 400 0 C the operating ambient temperature of 35 C and the temperature process value PV of 300 C Full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy 400 0 200 0 C x 0 007 1 0 C 5 2 C 6 5 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Item Insulation method Specifications A1S64TCTRT A1S64TCTRTBW Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more Current sensor Heater disconnection detection specifications U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 6 P H Input accuracy Full scale x 1 0 Number o
112. 0 to 55 C within 0 3 60 2 80us channel 21 8 channels module 3 19 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A1S68DAI Number of writes to EPROM Output short protection Available Isolation method Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block M3 5 x 7 screws Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 85A 5VDC Voltage External Current power surely consumption Inrush current Weight 0 22kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAIN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Max 100 000 times Available Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels no isolation Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply SOOVAC for 1 minute Between external power supply and analog output 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O termina
113. 09 30109 30209 30309 Maker setting 30110 30210 30310 Maker setting 30111 30211 30311 Pr 112 Load inertia ratio 112 262 412 30112 30212 30312 Pr 113 Position loop gain 1 113 263 413 30113 30213 30313 Pr 114 Speed loop gain 1 114 264 414 30114 30214 30314 Pr 115 Position loop gain 2 115 265 415 30115 30215 30315 Pr 116 Speed loop gain 2 116 266 416 30116 30216 30316 Pr 117 Speed integral compensation 117 267 417 30117 30217 30317 118 Notch filter selection 118 268 418 30118 30218 30318 Pr 119 Feed forward gain 119 269 419 30119 30219 30319 Pr 120 In position range 120 270 420 30120 30220 30320 121 Electromagnetic brake sequence 121 274 421 30121 30221 30321 output Pr 122 Monitor output mode selection 122 272 422 30122 30222 30322 Pr 123 Optional function 1 123 273 423 30123 30223 30323 Pr 124 Optional function 2 124 274 424 30124 30224 30324 enn suppression 125 275 425 30125 30225 30325 Maker setting 30126 30226 30326 Pr 127 Monitor output 1 offset 127 277 427 30127 30227 30327 Pr 128 Monitor output 2 offset 128 278 428 30128 30228 30328 Pr 129 Pre alarm data selection 129 279 429 30129 30229 30329 Pr 130 Zero speed 130 280 430 30130 30230 30330 Pr 131 Error excessive alarm level 131 281 431 30131 30231 30331 Pr 132 Optional function 5 132 282 432 30132 30232 30332 Pr 133 Optional function 6 133 283 433 30133 30233 30333 rae PI PID control switch over position 134 284 434 30134 30234 30334 Maker setti
114. 0V 1000 5V 0 ov 1000 5V 2000 10V Maximum resolution of analog value Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog output value 1 0 100mV Conversion speed Within 4ms 8 channels If the frequency of access from the programmable controller CPU using the FROM TO instructions is high the speed may be increased for about 6ms Absolute maximum output Analog output points 8 channels module Number of writes to EPPROM Output short protection Available Isolation method Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance 26 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible If the resolution differs between AnS series and Q 16 bit signed bina g series modules it needs to be Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 A matched using a sequence High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 program or user range settings Refer to Appendix 3 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kO to 1M Normal resolution mode High resolution mode If the resolution differs Analog output range Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum between AnS series and Q value resolution value resolution 0 to 5V 125mV 0
115. 1 a A2 B2 t A1S62RD4N b1 a2 SLD b2 a3 Lay wiring so that the following condition is met 1 2 3 4 lt 70 Q indicates the direction of current Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 39A Weight 0 27kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conductor resistance value must meet the condition of 1 2 lt 2kQ or less When a 3 wire type Pt100 is connected the difference between 1 and 2 in the conductor resistance value must be 100 or less Q64RD Wire 2 Y A1 Pt100 B1 b1 1 O Wire Q64RD Pt100 Recalculation of internal current 0 60A A consumption 5VDC is required 0 17kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 6 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Item Description A1S62RD4N Q64RD Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enables disables a detection of Sd specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Check the specifications selection specified method referring to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual Detected
116. 10 to 10VDC Input impedance 1MQ or more 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Input Analog input range Digital output Maximum Digital output Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 61512000 0 416 If the resolution differs Voltage lt EM between AnS series and Q Expanded mode 1000 to 4500 1 0mV 3000 to 13500 0 333mV series modules it needs to be 10 to 10V rmn 2 5mV 16000to16000 0 625mV matched using a sequence Users range setting 0 375m V 12000 to 12000 0 333mV program or user range 0 to 20mA 5uA 1 66 settings Refer to Appendix 3 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4 1 33pA current hori 1000 to 4500 4 3000 to 13500 1 33pA Users range setting 4000 to 4000 1 37 12000 12000 1 33pA Reference accuracy 0 1 Normal resolution mode 4 digits High resolution mode 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 16 digits High resolution mode Other than the above ranges 12 digits 9 71 4ppm C 0 00714 C The conversion speed of 10ms channel Q68AD G to A1S68AD has become slow If fast conversion speed is required 20ms I for control the Q64AD is recommended Voltage 15
117. 100 000 times When QD75MLI carries out the flash write 26 times from the sequence program an error occurs The error reset enables to perform the flash write Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points 32 points I O assignment intelligent 32 points Number of module occupied slots 1 1 Weight 0 35kg 0 15kg 0 15kg 0 16kg When using both the speed position Switching control and the external START Not available start input the Available I O signal for signal integrated into CHG signal external start signal external to the interrupt devices module and start using the direct output External command signal External CHG signal Speed position switching signal start or speed position switching selectable with parameters Connection via programmable Connection controller CPU Q corresponding serial with KD The connection Direct connection communication module Q peripheral type differs corresponding MELSECNET H remote devices Peripheral I O module devices AD75TU cannot be data setting used AD75TU Connectable Not connectable etc Use GX Configurator QP GX Available GX GX Configurator AP GX Configurator QP Configurator Configurator differs i 8 23 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 No 1 to 100 data items axis of positioning data be set using the buffer me
118. 12 S56 10 I CTL 6 P H o Full scale x 1 0 3 to 255 32 points 2 slots 16 points slot i The number of occupied I O seg ae default I O assignment A I O assignment intelligent 16 points points and slots are different Vacancy for 16 points intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block Two 18 point terminal blocks 22 to 18 AWG x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Recalculation of internal 0 29A 0 33A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 17kg 0 28kg 27 4 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 55 2 W x 98 H x 112 D mm From the previous page Thermocouple type Temperature Temperature measurement range measurement range s 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 1 B 400 to 1800 1 800 to 3000 1 0 to 400 1 0 to 1800 1 E 0 to 1000 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 N 0 to 1300 1 0 to 2300 1 0 to 400 0 to 700 U 200 to 200 1 300 to 400 0 0 to 600 0 0 1 0 to 400 0 to 800 0 to 900 1 0 to 1600 z 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 900 0 d I I PLII 0 to 1200 1 0 to 2300 1 W5Re W26Re 0 to 2300 1 0 to 3000 1 6 23 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 2 6 A1S62TCRT BW S2 Item Control output Specifications A1S62TCRT S2 A1S62TCRTBW S2 Transistor output Number of temperature input points 2 channels module Applicable temperature sensor Refer to Section 6 2 6 1 Indication accuracy Ambient temperature 25 5 Full scale x 0 3 1
119. 1602 1995 Refer to Section 5 3 1 2 Use the thermocouple that can be used on the Q68TD G H02 H01 referring to Section 5 3 1 2 Refer to Section 5 3 1 2 As they depend on the applicable thermocouple and measured temperature range refer to all the channels are independent 2 Section 5 3 1 2 to check the specifications 640ms 8 channels 320ms 8 channels Isolated area Isolation method _ electo Insulation withstand voltage resistance Between thermocouple input and Transformer 500VACrms programmable controller power supply isolation for 1 minute 500VDC Transformer 1000VACrms 10MQ or more Between thermocouple input channels isolation for 1 minute Between cold junction compensation input Pt100 and Not isolated programmable controller power supply Available The Q68TD G H01 supports the Not available disconnection monitor function 8 channels 1 channel for Pt100 module 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied I O points has changed to 16 points 40 pin connector A6CON4 0 3mm 22 AWG or less Wiring change is required 0 65A 0 49A Recalculation of internal current consumption 5VDC is required 0 22kg 0 18kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 Restrictions on mountable slot position apply to the Q68TD G H01 For details refer to the user
120. 1712 disable selection Deceleration start flag valid 1905 Stop command processing for deceleration P 1907 stop selection Servo OFF command 1551 1651 1751 Torque output setting value 1552 1652 1752 Servo amplifier data read 1553 1653 1753 8 38 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of A1SD75MO A1SD75MLI QD75MLI Da 1 Operation pattern Da 2 Control system 1300 2300 3300 2000 8000 14000 Da 3 Acceleration time No Da 4 Deceleration time No Da 9 M code condition data 1301 2301 3301 2001 8001 14001 Da 8 Dwell time JUMP destination positioning data No 1 1302 2302 3302 2002 8002 14002 No Oo s Not used 1303 2303 3303 2003 8003 14003 1304 2304 3304 2004 8004 14004 Command peed 1305 2305 3305 2005 8005 14005 2 Da 5 Positioning address 1306 2306 3306 2006 8006 14006 movement amount 1307 2307 3307 2007 8007 14007 1308 2308 3308 2008 8008 14008 Da 6 Arc address 1309 2309 3309 2009 8009 14009 14010 to No 2 1310 to 1319 2310 to 2319 3310 to 3319 2010 to 2019 8010 to 8019 14019 14020 to No 3 1320 to 1329 2320 to 2329 3320 to 3329 2020 to 2029 8020 to 8029 14029 to to to to to to to 14990 to No 100 2290 to
121. 2299 3290 to 3299 4290 to 4299 2990 to 2999 8990 to 8999 14999 Da 10 Shape Da 11 Start data No isi N S 8 Da 12 Special start point 4300 4350 4550 4600 4800 4850 27000 27050 28000 28050 instruction 9 Da 13 Parameter 8 2nd point 4301 4351 4551 4601 4801 4851 26001 26051 27001 27051 28001 28051 3rd point 4302 4352 4552 4602 4802 4852 26002 26052 27002 27052 28002 28052 to to to to to to to S 50th point 4349 4399 4599 4649 4849 4899 26049 26099 27049 27099 28049 28099 Da 14 Condition target o t Da 15 Condition 4400 4650 4900 26100 27100 28100 S operator o gt TE 4402 4652 4902 26102 27102 28102 5 Ll ie 4403 4653 4903 26103 27103 28103 a 4404 4654 4904 26104 27104 28104 lpa 47 Parameter 1 4405 4655 4905 26105 27105 28105 5 4406 4656 4906 26106 27106 28106 Dale Parameter 2 4407 4657 4907 26107 27107 28107 8 26110 to 27110 to 28110 to No 2 4410 to 4419 4660 to 4669 4910 to 4919 26119 27119 28119 26120 to 27120 to 28120 to No 3 4420 to 4429 4670 to 4679 4920 to 4929 26129 27129 28129 to to to to to to to 26190 to 27190 to 28190 to No 10 4490 to 4499 4740 to 4749 4990 to 4999 26199 27199 28199 1 With the 75 the positioning data buffer memory addresses are No 1 to 600 2 With the QD75MLI it is called block start data 39 With the 75 the block start dat
122. 230 380 after near point dog ON 81 231 381 81 231 381 Pr 53 OPR acceleration time selection 82 232 382 82 232 382 Pr 54 OPR deceleration time selection 83 233 383 83 233 383 OBS 84 234 384 84 234 384 aE st amount 85 235 385 85 235 385 Pr 56 OPR torque limit value 86 236 386 86 236 386 8 30 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address of ATSDTSMD Pr 57 Speed designation during OP shift 88 238 388 88 238 388 Pr 58 Dwell time during OPR retry 89 239 389 89 239 389 Pr 59 Absolute position restoration 91 241 391 selection 100 Servo series 100 250 400 30100 30200 30300 Pr 101 Amplifier setting 101 251 401 30101 30201 30301 Pr 102 Regenerative brake resistor 102 252 402 30102 30202 30302 Pr 103 Motor type 103 253 403 30103 30203 30303 Pr 104 Motor capacity 104 254 404 30104 30204 30304 Pr 105 Motor speed 105 255 405 30105 30205 30305 Pr 106 Feedback pulse 106 256 406 30106 30206 30306 107 Rotation direction 107 257 407 30107 30207 30307 Pr 108 Auto tuning 108 258 408 30108 30208 30308 Pr 109 Servo response setting 109 259 4
123. 3 1023 Md 44 Movement amount after near point 824 924 1024 824 924 1024 dog ON 825 925 1025 825 925 1025 Md 45 Torque limit stored value 826 926 1026 826 926 1026 Md 46 Special start data instruction code 827 927 1027 827 927 1027 setting value Md 47 Special start data instruction 328 928 1028 828 928 1028 parameter setting value 48 Start positioning data No setting 829 929 1029 829 929 1029 value Md 49 In speed control flag 830 930 1030 830 930 1030 Md 50 In speed change processing flag 831 931 1031 831 931 1031 Md 51 Start data pointer being executed 832 932 1032 834 934 1034 Md 52 Last executed positioning data No 833 933 1033 837 937 1037 Md 53 Repeat counter QD75MLI Md 41 Special start repetition 834 934 1034 832 932 1032 counter Md 54 Positioning data No being 835 935 1035 835 935 1035 executed Md 55 Block No being executed 836 936 1036 836 936 1036 Md 56 Positioning data being executed 838 to 847 938 to 947 1038 to 1047 838 to 847 938 to 947 1038 to 1047 848 948 1048 848 948 1048 Md 100 OPR re travel value 849 949 1049 849 949 4049 850 950 1050 850 950 1050 Md 101 Real current value 851 951 1051 851 951 1051 8 35 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of A1SD75MO A1SD75MLI QD75MLI
124. 32 bit signed binary 200000 to 850000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 16 bit signed binary Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 IEC751 1983 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 Ni100 DIN 43760 1987 As the compliance standards for the applicable RTD differ A change the RTD to the one that can be used with the Q64RD G 200 to 850 C 180 to 600 C 60 to 180 C 1 0 025 C 40ms channel 4 channels module 1mA O O O O Isolated area Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Between temperature measuring resistor input and programmable controller power supply Photocoupler I 10MQ or more using isolation 500VDC insulation resistance tester 1780VACrms 3 cycles Altitude 2000m Between temperature measuring Transformer resistor input channels isolation Detected per channel 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied I O A points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used 1 Accuracy accuracy relative to the maximum value in the selection range of the Q64RD G is as follows Accuracy Reference accuracy Specifications Within 0 04 Pt100 JPt100 20 to 120 C 70ppm C 0 0070 P
125. 3A1 Positioning Module User s Manual 5 Items indicated with the LEDs be checked with I O signals of the QD73A1 If necessary install lamps corresponding to the LED indications externally and indicate the on off status of the I O signals using a program 6 The position where a module is mounted is changed because the dimensions of a base unit of the QD73A1 differ In addition the connector direction is reverse shown as below QD73A1 A1SD70 Check whether the wiring is enough even after the replacement because the connector position is changed though the existing connectors can be used without the wiring change 8 54 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 Slide switch When the A1SD70 being used in the setting that the positive voltage is output when the positioning address increases slide switch 1 rotation direction setting on is replaced with the QD73A1 the cables between the A1SD70 and an encoder can be used When the A1SD70 being used in the setting that the negative voltage is output when the positioning address increases slide switch 1 rotation direction setting off is replaced with the QD73A1 the wiring change between the A1SD70 and an encoder is required When the A1SD70 is replaced with the QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15042 or later the c
126. 3mV scaling function mode 4500 13500 Oto 20mA Oto 5 0 to 1 66 410 20 4000 4pA 12000 1 33yA 4to 20mA 1000 3000 O extended to 4pA to 1 mode 4500 13500 Resolution Analog input Normal resolution High resolution range mode mode Ambient 0 to 0 to 25 5 C 25 5 temperature 55 55 0 to 10V 0 4 0 1 10 to 10V aer wd k 2 digits digits Overall accuracy o accuracy at Within 1 40 5 maximum analog ees 5 1 5 o output value 1to5V 0 4 0 1 extended 16 4 40 4 0 1 mode digits digits TOA 48 12 digits digits 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA extended mode Maximum z 400us or less 4 channels conversion Sampling cycle 80us channel 500us channe speed Pling cycle oUp Absolute Voltage 15V Voltage 15V maximum input Current 30mA Current 30mA 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible ti f A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA Compatibility recautions for replacement Number of anal et 2 channels module 2 channels module output points Normal resolution mode 96 to 4095 4096 to 4095 Diartal input 12 bit binary value 1096 to 4595 9 0 to 4000 High resolution mode
127. 4 0 1 P 64 16 digits digits Overall re 015 5V wanay 1 S 65V maximum analog Voltage 100mV Current 200 gt 1to5V 0 4 0 1 output value extended 16 4 0 4 T mode digits digits aoe 48 12 digits digits z 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA extended mode 240 less 2 ch Conversion speed 500us channel Sampling cycle 80 5 Absolute maximum Voltage 12V Voltage 12V output Current 28mA Current 21mA tput short output sho Available Available protection Between I O terminal and programmable controller Between input terminal and programmable controller bowar subplv photoco blar power supply photocoupler isolation Isolation method E p Between I O channels not isolated Between external power supply and analog I O Between channels not isolated channel not isolated Dielectric withstand Between input terminal and programmable Between I O terminal and programmable controller voltage controller power supply 500VAC 1 minute power supply 500VACrms 1 minute Between input terminal and programmable Betw l odeminal nd bl troll etween erminal and programmable controller Insulation resistance troll ly 500VDC 5MQ Es ELS Messe Sia peus E power supply 500VDC 20MQ or higher 4 20 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Compa
128. 4 1264 1526 1626 1726 movement amount change register 1165 1215 1265 1527 1627 1727 Cd 22 Manual pulse generator enable 1167 1217 1267 1524 1624 1724 flag Cd 23 Manual pulse generator 1 pulse 1168 1218 1268 1522 1622 1722 input magnification 1169 1219 1269 1523 1623 1723 Cd 24 OPR return request flag OFF request 1170 1220 1270 1521 1621 1721 Cd 25 External start valid QD75MLI Cd 8 External command 1171 1221 1271 1505 1605 1705 valid 26 Step valid flag 1172 1222 1272 1545 1645 1745 Cd 27 Step mode 1173 1223 1273 1544 1644 1744 Cd 28 Step start information 1174 1224 1274 1546 1646 1746 Cd 29 Skip command 1175 1225 1275 1547 1647 1747 Cd 30 New torque value 1176 1226 1276 1525 1625 1725 Cd 31 Positioning starting point No 1178 1228 1278 1501 1601 1701 Cd 100 Servo OFF command 1179 1229 1279 1551 1651 1751 101 Torque output setting value 1180 1230 1280 1552 1652 1752 8 37 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of 18075 Cd 321 Interrupt request during 1181 1231 1281 1520 1620 1720 continuous operation n 1184 1234 1284 1508 1608 1708 Cd 33 New acceleration time value 1185 1235 1285 1509 1609 1709 1186 1236 1286 1510 1610 1710 34 New deceleration time value 4187 1237 1287 1511 1611 1711 35 Acceleration deceleration time change during speed change enable 1188 1238 1288 1512 1612
129. 41 1216 to 1291 Md 12 Start history pointer 542 1292 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 13 Start axis 5 543 to 618 Md 14 Operation type 544 619 Md 15 Start time Hour minute gt 545 to 620 gt Md 16 Start time Second 100ms 546 to 621 Md 17 Error judgment 2 547 to 622 Md 18 Start history pointer at error 623 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 19 Axis in which the error occurred 624 to 684 1293 to 1353 Md 20 Axis error No 625 to 685 1294 to 1354 21 Axis error occurrence time Hour minute gt S 626 to 686 1295 to 1355 QD75MLI Md 11 Axis error occurrence Hour 2 Md 22 Axis error occurrence time Second 5 ui 100ms 627 to 687 1296 to 1356 QD75MLI Md 12 Axis error occurrence Minute second Md 23 Error history pointer 688 1357 8 33 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Pointer number Item of A1SD75MO Md 24 Axis in which the warning occurred Md 25 Axis warning No Md 26 minute Axis warning occurrence time Hour QD75LI 16 Axis warning occurrence Hour Md 27 100ms Axis warning occurrence time Second QD75MLI Md 17 Axis warning occurrence Minute second Md 28 Warning history pointer Warning history Buffer memory address A1SD75MLI QD75MLI Common for axis 1 2 3 0 to 15 Common for axis
130. 416mV series modules it needs to be 1 to 5V 9463000 1 0mV 01012000 0 333mV matched using a sequence Voltage 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV program or user range 4000 to 4000 settings Refer to Appendix 3 pray 0 75mV 42000to42000 0 333mV gs Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 10mV Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 30mV 9 80us channel 12V 8 channels module 100 000 times Available Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels not isolated Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between external power supply and analog output 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between external power supply and analog output 500VDC 20MQ or more 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A1S68DAV 32 points Number of occupied I O points AA I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block M3 5 x 7 screws Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 65A 5VDC Voltage
131. 42 17727 inch 0 to 359 99999 degree 0 to 359 99999 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 134217728 to 134217727 pulse Incremental system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 13421772 8 to 13421772 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 1342 17728 to 1342 17727 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree 1342 17728 to 1342 17727 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse 134217728 to 134217727 pulse In speed position switching control 0 to 214748364 7 0 to 13421772 7 um 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 1342 17727 inch 0 to 21474 83647 degree 0 to 1342 17727 degree 0 to 2147483647 pulse 0 to 134217727 pulse Absolute system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 359 99999 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse Incremental system 214748364 8 to 214748364 7 um 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 inch 21474 83648 to 21474 83647 degree 2147483648 to 2147483647 pulse In speed position switching control INC mode position speed switching control gt 0 to 214748364 7 um 0 to 21474 83647 inch 0 to 21474 83647 degree 0 to 2147483647 pulse In speed position switching control ABS mode 0 to 359 99999 degree 0 01 to 6000000 00 mm min 10 01 to 375000 00 mm min 0 001 to 600000 000 inch min 0 001 to 37500 000 inch min 0 01 to 20000000 00 mm min 0 001 to 2000000 000 inch min
132. 5 MEL X15 2 tuning status Y15 lt 0 tuning command instruction X16 Y16 X16 Y16 ae Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited X17 Y17 X17 Y17 FeRAM back 2 i 2 X18 Y18 e ackup X18 E PROM write Y18 E PROM backup command completion flag instruction Default setting Default value write Default setting X19 Y19 X19 Y19 registration command completion flag registration instruction CH1 Forced PID control 2 ite fai X1A Y1A o MU PROM write failure ELM Use prohibited 6 32 stop command flag 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN A1S64TCTRT BW Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Device Device Device I Device 7 Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No CH2 Forced PID control Setting change Setting change X1B Y1B X1B Y1B stop command completion flag instruction CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 PID control forced X1C Y1C X1C fl Y1C stop instruction Use prohibited 9 a CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 PID control forced X1D Y1D Use prohibited X1D Y1D flag stop instruction ZIE XIE U hibited TIE U hibited XIE se prohibite se prohibite 21 For the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN XO to XF and YO to YF are applied For the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN X10 to X1F and Y10 to Y1F are applied Depending on the use of the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRT
133. 5kg 0 28kg External dimensions 34 5 W x 130 H x 93 6 D mm 1 List of thermocouple type temperature measurement range and resolution Thermocouple type Temperature Temperature pP peraan Resolution parae Resolution measurement range measurement range R 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 1 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 1 0 to 2400 0 to 1300 K 200 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 500 0 0 0 to 800 0 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 0 to 1600 1 J 0 to 1200 0 to 2100 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 500 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 800 0 200 to 400 200 to 200 4 0 to 700 4 7 0 to 200 300 to 400 0 to 400 200 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 0 0 to 400 0 6 22 To the next page 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible WOIIQUU UI IuIIII Specifications Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 20MQ or more o U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL
134. 6 CH4 Conversion setting value for L 157 disconnection detection H 158 ae Mode switching setting 159 160 3 wire type CH1 Factory default offset L 161 value H 162 3 wire type CH1 Factory default gain L 163 value H 164 3 wire type CH1 User range settings L 165 offset value H 166 3 wire type CH1 User range settings L 167 gain value H 168 3 wire type CH1 User range settings L 169 offset resistance value H RW 170 3 wire type CH1 User range settings L 171 gain resistance value H 172 4 wire type CH1 Factory default offset L 173 value H 174 4 wire type CH1 Factory default gain L 175 value H 176 4 wire type CH1 User range settings L 177 offset value H 178 4 wire type CH1 User range settings L 179 gain value H 180 4 wire type CH1 User range settings L 181 offset resistance value H 182 4 wire type CH1 User range settings L 183 gain resistance value H to 254 4 wire type CH4 User range settings L 255 gain resistance value H 5 41 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 6 A1S62RD4N Replacing with the Q64RD 5 6 1 Performance specifications comparison Item Measuring method A1S62RD4N 4 wire type Temperature conversion tput RU value 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000
135. 6 bit signed binary 0 to 2000 Thermocouple compliance standards JIS C1602 1981 Applicable thermocouple Refer to Section 5 2 1 2 Measured temperature range accuracy Refer to Section 5 2 1 2 Overall accuracy Maximum conversion speed 400ms 8 channels Isolation method Dielectric withstand Insulation resistance voltage Isolated area Isolation method Between thermocouple input and programmable controller power supply 5MQ or more using Transformer isolation 500VAC for 1 minute 500VDC insulation Between thermocouple input channels resistance tester Between cold junction compensation input Pt100 and programmable controller power supply Not isolated Disconnection detection Available Number of temperature sensor input points 8 channels 1 channel for Pt100 module Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 32A Weight 5 3 0 28kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64TD 270 to 1820 C O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compatibility Precautions for replacement The measured temperature range diffe
136. 900 1 JPt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 6 26 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible WOIIQUU UI IuIIII Specifications Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 20MQ or more o U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 I CTL 6 P H o Full scale x 1 0 3 to 255 32 points 2 slots 16 points slot The number of occupied I O ED default I O assignment A i I O assignment intelligent 16 points points and slots are different Vacancy for 16 points intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block Two 18 point terminal blocks 22 to 18 AWG x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Recalculation of internal 0 29A 0 33A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 17kg 0 28kg 27 4 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 55 2 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 6 27 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 3 Functional Comparison Description Auto tuning functio
137. 905 26105 27105 28105 E 4406 4656 4906 26106 27106 28106 4407 4657 4907 26107 27107 28107 L 261101 27110 t 28110 t 8 No 2 4410 to 4419 4660 to 4669 491010 4919 2811000 26119 27119 28119 26120 to 27120 to 28120 to No 3 4420 to 4429 4670 to 4679 4920 to 4929 26129 27129 28129 to to to to to to to 26190 to 27190 to 28190 to No 10 4490 to 4499 4740 to 4749 4990 to 4999 26199 27199 28199 1 With the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the positioning data buffer memory addresses are No 1 to 600 2 With the QD75PON QD75DDN it is called block start data 3 With the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the block start data and condition data in L are called start block 0 There are five start blocks 0 to 4 8 18 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of A1SD75PO S3 15075 0 53 QD75PON QD75DON T Start No 8001 4750 Positioning P Indirect Start No 8002 4501 4751 5001 designation to to to to to to to information Start No 8050 4549 4799 5049 ON 5050 30000 Programmable controller Condition judgment target to CPU memory area data of the condition data 5099 30099 Target axis 5100 Head positioning block No 5101 No of read write data items 5102 Read write request 5103 Read write block 8 19 5110 to 6109 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 2 5 External interface specifications comp
138. A common Max inrush current Transistor output 0 4A 10ms Leakage current at OFF 0 1mA or less Max voltage drop at ON 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A Response time OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less Number of writes to EPROM 6 4 Max 101 times number of FeRAM read write 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Compatibility Precautions for replacement Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Transistor output Standard control 4 channels module Heating cooling control 2 channels module Refer to Section 6 2 1 1 Ambient temperature 25 5 C Full scale x 0 396 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Full scale x 0 796 JO Within 1 0 C Within 2 0 C Within 3 0 C 1 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used 1 to 100s 1MO 0 to 100s 50 00 to 50 00 Upscale processing O O O PID ON OFF pulse or two position control Standard control Can be set by auto tuning or self tuning Heating cooling control Can be set by auto tuning 0 0 to 1000 0 0 to 3600s 0 to 3600s Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used ON OFF pulse 10 to 30VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common 0 4A 10ms 0 1mA or less 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at
139. A conversion scaling lower limit value R W 812 1012 D A conversion scaling upper limit value R W 813 1013 Shifting amount to input value R W 814 1014 to to System area 899 1099 900 1100 Set value check code R 901 1101 System area 902 1102 Real conversion digital value R 903 1103 to to System area 911 1111 912 1112 Setting range R 913 1113 HOLD CLEAR function setting R 914 1114 to to System area 989 1189 990 1190 Latest error code R First two Last two 991 1191 digits of the digits of the R year year 992 1192 Error time Month Day R 993 1193 Hour Minute R 994 1194 Second R week 995 1195 to to System area 999 1199 4 12 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name Read write 1200 to System area 1599 1600 Level data 0 R W 1601 Level data 1 R W 1602 Level data 2 R W 1603 Level data 3 R W 1604 Level data 4 R W 1605 Level data 5 R W 1606 Level data 6 R W 1607 Level data 7 R W 1608 Level data 8 R W 1609 Level data 9 R W 1610 to System area 1699 1700 CH1 Digital output value R 1701 CH2 Digital output value R 1702 CH3 Digital output value R 1703 CH4 Digital output value R 1704 to System area 1709 1710 CH1 Scaling value R 1711 CH2 Scaling value R 1712 CH3 Scaling value R 1713 4 Scaling value R 1714 to System area
140. ATSD75MLI 1 to 32767000 e QD75MLI 1 to 2147483647 Positioning start No 7004 to 7010 block start designation and 8000 to 8049 indirect designation are deleted Block start data With QD75MLI the number of blocks has been change to 5 7000 to 7004 With the ATSD75MLI this data is called Positioning start information Start history The configuration of start information and start No is changed so that the start No can be directly checked A1SD75MO QD75MLI Detailed parameters 0 Software stroke limit invalidfor Software stroke limit valid for IPr 15 Software stroke limit valid Factory setting manual operation manual operation invalid setting 1 Software stroke limit valid for manual operation Software stroke limit invalid for manual operation 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 3 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Type QD75M Positioning Module User s Manual Signal name A1SD75MO QD75MO Signal name A1SD75MO QD75MLI A1SD75 QD75 READY X00 Axis 1 Positioning start Y10 Y10 Axis 1 Start complete X01 X10 Axis 2 Positioning start Y11 Y11 Axis 2 Start complete X02 X11 Axis 3 Positioning start Y12 Y12 Axis 3 Start complete X03 X12 Axis 4 Positioning start Y13 Ax
141. Ambient temperature 255 C Full scale x 0 3 1 digit mbient temperature 0 to ull scale x 0 7 1 digit Ambi 0 to 55 C Full 0 7 1 digi Temperature Cold junction process value PV Within 1 0 temperature 100 C or more Accuracy compensation Temperature accuracy process value PV Within 2 0 C ambient 150 to 100 C temperature 0 Temperature to 55 C process value PV Within 3 0 C 200 to 150 C Sampling cycle 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used Control output cycle 1 to 100s Input impedance 1MO Input filter 0 to 100s Sensor correction value setting 50 00 to 50 00 Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing Temperature control method PID ON OFF pulse or two position control PID constants Can be set by auto tuning setting Proportional band PID constants range P 0 0 to 1000 0 Integral time 1 1 to 3600s Derivative time D 0 to 3600s Set value SV setting range Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used Output signal ON OFF pulse Rated load voltage 10 2 to 30VDC Max load current 0 1A point 0 4A common Transistor output Max inrush current 0 4A 10ms Leakage current at OFF 0 1mA or less Max voltage drop at ON 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A Response time OFF ON 2ms o
142. B 66565 13JE64 A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71T32 S3 User s Manual 24 AS i Master module type A1SJ71AS92 User s Manual SH 080085 13JR15 25 A1SD59J S2 MIF Memory Card Interface Module User s Manual SH 080056 13JR05 App Appendix 2 3 Q series App 4 No Manual name Manual number Model code 1 Platform Programmable Controllers MELSEC Q Series QnU L 08101E _ Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual 2 SH 080055 13JR03 Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI GX Configurator AD SW2D5C QADU E Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated High Resolution Analog Digital Converter Module With 3 Ja ie SH 080277 13JR51 Signal Conditioning Function User s Manual Q64AD GH Q62AD DGH GX Configurator AD SW2D5C QADU E Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module Channel Isolated Analog Digital Converter Module With Signal Conditioning Function 4 SH 080647ENG 13JR96 User s Manual Q68AD G Q66AD DG GX Configurator AD SW2D5C QADU E Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual 5 Q62DAN Q64DAN Q68DAVN Q68DAIN Q62DA Q64DA Q68DAV SH 080054 13JR02 Q68DAI GX Configurator DA SW2D5C QDAU E Channel Isolated Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual 6 SH 080281E 13JR52 Q62DA FG GX Configurator DA SW2D5C QDAU E Channel Isolated Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual 7 SH 080648ENG 13JR97 Q66DA G GX Configurator DA SW2D5C QDAU E Analog Input Output M
143. BWN some of the I O signal listed in the table are prohibited to use For details refer to the user s manual for the module used 6 33 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 4 3 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 and Q series modules A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 Signal name Signal name CTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Signal name Signal name Watchdog timer error fl YO Module READY flag YO Use prohibited ag 1 Temperature control YA 1 Setting operation mode 1 Setting operation mode module READY flag status instruction X2 Write error flag Y2 X2 Write error flag Y2 Error reset instruction X3 error flag X3 Hardware error flag Y3 Use prohibited CH1 Auto tuning X4 CH1 tuning status flag 4 X4 1 Auto tuning status Y4 instruction CH2 Auto tuning X5 CH2tuning status flag Y5 X5 CH2 Auto tuning status ONE instruction CH3 Auto tuning X6 CH3 Auto tuning status Y6 X6 CH3 Auto tuning status Y6 instruction Auto tuning CHA4 Auto tuning status YT CH4 Auto tuning status Yr instruction 2 2 i 2 x8 E PROM write Y8 i X8 E PROM write Y8 E PROM backup completion flag Use prohibited completion flag instruction Default value write Default value write Default setting X9 Y9 X9 Y9 RA
144. Between input channels Transformer insulation o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 20MQ or more o U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 I CTL 6 P H o Full scale x 1 0 3 to 255 32 points 2 slots 16 points slot The number of occupied I O ED default I O assignment A i I O assignment intelligent 16 points points and slots are different Vacancy for 16 points intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block Two 18 point terminal blocks 22 to 18 AWG x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Recalculation of internal 0 29A 0 33A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 17kg 0 28kg 27 4 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 55 2 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 6 11 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 2 3 A1S64TCTT BW S1 Control output A1S64TCTT S1 A1S64TCTTBW S1 Transistor output Specifications Number of temperature input points 4 channels module Applicable temperature sensor Refer to Section 6 2 3 1 Ambient temperature 25 5 Full scale x 0 3 1 digit Indication accuracy Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Full scale x 40 7 1 digit Temperature Cold junction process value PV Within 1 0 temperature
145. CH1 Detected temperature value 32bit 19 H R Error code 20 10 Setting range 1 R CH2 Detected temperature value 32bit 21 Setting range 2 22 23 24 25 26 27 m 28 System area Use prohibited 29 30 System area Use prohibited 31 32 33 34 Write data error code R W 35 Conversion completed flag R 5 59 Type specification of platinum RTD 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G Address E Read write decimal 39 40 41 42 43 System area Use prohibited 44 45 46 47 Warning output enable disable setting R W 48 Warning output flag 49 Disconnection detection flag 50 to 53 CH1 to CH4 Scaling value 54 CH1 Measured temperature value L R 55 32bit H to 60 CH4 Measured temperature value L 61 32bit H 62 L CH1 Scaling range lower limit value 63 H 64 L CH1 Scaling range upper limit value 65 H to 76 s L CH4 Scaling range upper limit value 77 H 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value to 85 CH4 Scaling width upper limit value 86 CH1 Warning output lower lower limit L 87 value H 88 CH1 Warning output lower upper limit L 89 H value H RW 90 CH1 Warning output upper lower limit L 91 value H 92 CH1 Warning output upper upper limit L
146. CH4 Scaling width upper limit value 44 CH8 Lower limit value 0 1 C unit 86 CH1 Warning output lower lower limit value 45 CH8 Upper limit value 0 1 C unit 87 CH1 Warning output lower upper limit value 46 System area Use prohibited I 88 CH1 Waring output upper lower limit value 47 89 CH1 Warning output upper upper limit value 5 9 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT A1S68TD Q64TD Read write Read write decimal decimal 48 as EM 90 CH2 Warning output lower lower limit value System area Use prohibited 49 91 CH2 Warning output lower upper limit value 92 CH2 Warning output upper lower limit value 93 CH2 Warning output upper upper limit value 94 CH3 Warning output lower lower limit value 95 CH3 Warning output lower upper limit value RW 96 CH3 Warning output upper lower limit value 97 CH3 Warning output upper upper limit value 98 CH4 Warning output lower lower limit value 99 CH4 Warning output lower upper limit value 100 CH4 Warning output upper lower limit value 101 CH4 Warning output upper upper limit value 102 to 117 System area Use prohibited 118 CH1 Offset temperature set value 119 CH1 Gain temperature set value 120 CH2 Offset temperature set value 121 CH2 Gain temperature set value RIW 122 CH3 Offset temperature set value 123 CH3 Gain temperature set value 124 CHA Offset temperature set value 125 CH4 Gain temperature set
147. Conversion accuracy At operating ambient Temperature characteristics Per operating ambient Max temperature error at ambient temperature range or temperature 25 5 temperature variation of 1 C 55 C 0 to 600 C 3 3 I9 600 to 800 C 3 0 13 0 800 to 1700 C 2 5 ae 12 5 1700 to 1820 C 279 59 8 50 to 0 C 3 3 3 0 to 300 C 2 2 5 0 4 12 5 300 to 1600 C 2 2 0 0 3 9 5 1600 to 1760 C 3 3 50 to 0 C 3 3 3 u 0 to 300 C 2 2 5 0 4 12 5 300 to 1600 C 2 2 0 C 0 3 C 9 5 C 1600 to 1760 C 29 9 8 270 to 200 C 3 3 3 9 Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 5 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 2 200 to 0 C 11 0 C of measured temperature of measured temperature K Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 0 to 1200 C 2 0 25 of measured 9 0 C of measured temperature temperature 1200 to 1370 C 9 3 9 270 to 200 C 3 3 3 55 Larger value of 0 5 C 0 5 Larger value of 0 06 or 0 15 200 to 0 C 8 5 C of measured temperature of measured temperature E Larger value of 0 5 C or 4 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 0 to 900 C 2 0 25 of measured 6 75 C of measured temperature temperature 900 to 1000 C 3 3 9 210 to 40 C
148. D complete flag completion flag registration instruction FeRAM write 2 ite fai XA bip YA EN E PROM write failure YA Use prohibited incomplete flag flag NS Setting change Setting change XB Use prohibited YB XB completion flag instruction CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 PID control forced XC YC XC YC flag flag stop instruction CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 PID control forced XD YD XD YD flag flag stop instruction CH3 Alert occurrence CH3 Alert occurrence CH3 PID control forced XE flag flag stop instruction CHA Alert occurrence CHA Alert occurrence PID control forced XF YF XF YF flag flag stop instruction X10 Y10 X10 Module READY flag Y10 Use prohibited Setting operation mode Setting operation mode Setting operation mode X11 Y11 X11 DM 2 command status instruction X12 Y12 reset command X12 Write error flag Y12 Error reset instruction X13 Y13 Use prohibited X13 Hardware error flag Y13 Use prohibited CH1 Auto tuning CH1 Auto tuning X14 Y14 X14 CH1 Auto tuning status Y14 instruction CH2 Auto tuning CH2 Auto tuning X15 Y15 X15 CH2 Auto tuning status Y15 command instruction ibi CH3 Auto tunin CH3 Auto tunin x16 Use prohibited EM X16 CH3 Auto tuning status Y46 Auto tuning instruction instruction Auto tuning Auto tuning X17 Wir X17 4 Auto tuning status YI N instructi
149. Disconnection detection RTD or cable Specification of RTD type Specifies a RTD type used O O Range switching function Switches the measured temperature temperature range Outputs a warning when the temperature Warning output function O exceeds the set temperature range Converts a measured temperature value Scaling function O into a percent value in set width The Process CPU and A module can be replaced without the Online module replacement O Redundant CPU support this system being stopped function 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 5 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A1S62RD3N Q64RD G Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO WDT error flag YO X1 READY flag Y1 X2 Write data error flag Y CH1 Disconnection X3 detected flag CH2 Disconnection 4 Y4 detected flag X5 5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 Use prohibited 8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE YE Use prohibited YF X10 Y10 x11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Use prohibited X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F
150. ENT 5 2 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Temperature conversion function Temperature conversion value storage Description Imports temperature data Stores imported temperature data in the buffer memory A1S68TD Q64TD Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable function Sets whether to enable disable a conversion per channel Disconnection detection function Detects a disconnection of the connected thermocouple of each channel A channel set to be conversion enabled automatically detects disconnection Input type selection function Sets an input type for each channel For the Q64TD input type is set with the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer Warning output function Outputs a warning when the temperature exceeds the set temperature range Temperature conversion system Processes the detected temperature by specified method Averaging processing is added for the Q64TD Scaling function Converts and stores a measured temperature value within the scaling range into the value between 0 to 2000 The concept of scaling value differs To use the scaling values program needs to be reviewed Pt100 cold junction compensation enable disable setting function Sets whether the cold junction compensation using the Pt100 attached to the terminal is performed or not Offset gain setting function Pe
151. ETECTION MODULE REPLACEMENT 9 1 Position Detection Module Replacement 1 2 3 The A1S62LS position detection module should be considered to be replaced with the absocoder type position sensing module VS Q62 manufactured by NSD Corporation partner company s product The absocoder type position sensing module VS Q62 can be directly mounted on a Q series base unit Finding a replacement module model from the position detection module and abso coder model being used The existing absocoder can be continuously used by selecting the VS Q62 for replacement as shown below according to the position detection module and absocoder model being used Q series position detection module for Absocoder model replacement Existing A series position detection module V6 Q62B A62LS B5 A1S62LS VRE P062SAC Tm O VRE P028SAC I MRE 32SP062SAC MRE GLISP062FAC VS Q62B M2PG VS Q62B M2PG L1 64 128 160 256 320 VLS 256PWB VLS 512PWB VLS 1024PW VLS 512PYB VLS 1024PYB VLS 2048PY VS Q62 L VS Q62B L O O O O O O VS Q62 Varilimit type scaling positioning switch output VS Q62B Converter type position detection function Connection cables The existing cables can be used continuously No new wiring is required Remote setting module Select the following remote setting module targeted for the VS
152. Error display 17 segment LED Error LED diagnostics use GX Developer The start history at History data storage Start Provided Provided error is integrated error warning 4 types 16 items module 3 types 16 items axis into the start history Data storage destination Flash ROM battery less backup Flash ROM battery less backup 8 22 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for A1SD75M1 A1SD75M2 A1SD75M3 QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 ibility replacement Connection connector 10136 3000VE Soldering type supplied A6CON1 A6CONA Soldering type sold separately 10136 6000EL A6CON2 IDC type sold separately Crimping type sold separately A6CON3 IDC type sold separately Applicable wire size 10136 3000VE 24 to 30 AWG approx 0 05 to 0 2mm A6CON1 AGCON4 0 3mm 10136 6000EL 28 AWG approx 0 08mm 2 24 to 28 AWG A6CONS 28 AWG twisted wire 30 AWG single wire As the connectors differ wiring change is required The connectors of QD75MLI is sold Separately SSCNET connection type Refer to Section 8 3 5 2 Maximum extension distance of SSCNET 30m Shape of a bus connector differs Internal current consumption A BDVC 0 7A or less 0 40A Flash ROM write count Max 100 000 times Max
153. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller Transition from MELSEC AnS QnAS Small Type Series to Q Series Handbook Intelligent Function Modules MERENG mun _ _ LITT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and A CAUTION WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under A CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect out
154. MLI Number of connections 1 generator axis 1 generator module Allowed Not allowed 1 x mode 2 x mode 4 x mode PLS SIGN mode Mode change Parameter 2 With the QD75MLI the external start signal and speed position switching signal are combined into the external command signal switching signal 8 41 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Supported servo amplifier a For continuous use of a servo amplifier connected with the existing A1SD75M AD75M The following table shows whether or not the existing servo amplifier can be continuously used with positioning modules replaced A1SD75MQD AD75MO QD75MLI R emarks Supported amplifier model Availability MR JLI B Available Needs to change the SSCNET cables refer to b in the next page MR HLI B Available Discontinued model MR J20 B Available Needs to change the SSCNET cables refer to the next page MR J2SLI B Available Model to be discontinued at the end of September 2015 Point 1 Selecting suitable products to replace the existing servo amplifier When replacing the existing servo amplifier select a positioning module in the following combinations Additionally the servo motor needs to be replaced Positioning module QD77MSO servo amplifier MR J3L1 B Positioning module QD77MSO servo amplifier MR J4L1 B 2 Selecting suitable products to replace the existing servo amplifier withou
155. Mss Output valie 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Scaling value Pt100 JIS 1604 1997 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 Applicable RTD JPt100 JIS 1604 1981 180 to 600 C Pt100 Measured 27 10 to 313 71Q 180 to 600 C temperature JPt100 80 to 600 range 25 80 to 317 280 Ni100 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Analog input points 2 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1 Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between platinum RTD input and channel not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Batch detected at all channels Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal 53 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible 3 4 wire type Q64RD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 Value up to the first decimal place x 10
156. Not allowed nalog output tes owe allowed ot allowe The resolution be switched according to the application Resolution mode The resolution mode is batch set for all channels i The Process CPU and Online module A module be replaced without the system being stopped Redundant CPU support this replacement funcion 1 For the A1S68DAV the mode is fixed at 1 4000 2000 to 2000 For the Q68DAVN the mode is fixed at 1 4000 in normal resolution mode In high resolution mode the mode is fixed at 1 16000 when the input voltage range is 10 to 10V and the mode is fixed at 1 12000 when the input voltage range is other than 10 to 10V 3 30 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 5 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A1S68DAV Q68DAVN Signal name WDT error flag YO A1S68DAV detection X1 D A conversion READY Y1 X2 Error flag Y2 X3 4 Y4 X5 5 X6 Y6 XT Y7 Use prohibited X8 Y8 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC Use prohibited XD YD XE YE XF YF X10 Y10 x11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 D A conversion value X14 Y14 output enable flag X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 Error reset flag X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C Use prohibited X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F
157. O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed standard control 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 slots are required I O assignment A1S64TCTTBW S1 16 empty points for the first half 16 intelligent points for the second half Thermocouple Q64TCTTBWN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals standard control and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 A1S64TCRT S1 1 External wiring Cable size is changed Platinum 2 besos of slots 24 Bac eee ee resistance Q64TCRTN Program The number of occupie points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed thermometer 4 Performance specifications Not changed standard control 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 1 External wiring Cable size is changed A1S64TCRTBW S1 2 Number of slots Changed 2 slots are required I O assignment Platinum 16 empty points for the first half 16 intelligent points for the second half resistance Q641CRTBWN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals thermometer and buffer memory addresses are changed standard control 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 1 External wi
158. OG aiit val 48 198 348 48 198 348 49 199 349 49 199 349 Pr 33 JOG operation acceleration time 50 200 350 50 200 350 selection Pr 34 JOG operation deceleration time 51 201 351 51 201 351 selection Pr 35 Acceleration deceleration process 52 202 352 52 202 352 selection Pr 36 S pattern proportion 53 203 353 53 203 353 54 204 354 54 204 354 Pr 37 Sudden stop deceleration time 55 205 355 55 205 355 Pr 38 Stop group 1 sudden stop selection 56 206 356 56 206 356 Pr 39 Stop group 2 sudden stop selection 57 207 357 57 207 357 Pr 40 Stop group sudden stop selection 58 208 358 58 208 358 Pr 41 Positioning complete signal output 59 209 359 59 209 359 time Pr 42 Allowable circular interpolation 60 210 360 60 210 360 error width 61 211 361 61 211 361 Pr 43 External start function selection QD75MLI Pr 42 External command 62 212 362 62 212 362 function selection Pr 150 Setting for the restart allowable 64 214 364 64 214 364 range when servo OFF to ON 65 215 365 65 215 365 44 Near pass mode selection for path 66 216 366 _ _ control Pr 45 OPR method 70 220 370 70 220 370 Pr 46 OPR direction 71 221 371 71 221 371 72 222 372 72 222 372 BEAR address 73 223 373 73 223 373 74 224 374 74 224 374 spad 75 225 375 75 225 375 76 226 376 76 226 376 P649 Creep speed 77 227 377 77 227 377 Pr 50 OPR retry 78 228 378 78 228 378 OPR dwell time 79 229 379 Pr 52 Setting for the movement amount 80 230 380 80
159. ON Pr 30 Deceleration time 2 45 495 345 45 195 545 Pr 31 Deceleration time 3 4n 196 346 46 196 346 91 eceeraton time 47 197 347 47 197 347 Sea Speed iimitvai 48 198 348 48 198 348 PER 49 199 349 49 199 349 Pr 33 JOG operation acceleration time selection 50 200 350 50 200 350 Pr 34 JOG operation deceleration time selection 51 201 351 51 201 351 35 Acceleration deceleration process selection 52 202 352 52 202 352 Pr 36 S curve ratio 53 203 353 53 203 353 54 204 354 54 204 354 r udden stop deceleration time 55 508 465 ae Pr 38 Stop group 1 sudden stop selection 56 206 356 56 206 356 Pr 38 Stop group 2 sudden stop selection 57 207 357 57 207 357 Pr 40 Stop group sudden stop selection 58 208 358 58 208 358 Pr 41 Positioning complete signal output time 59 209 359 59 209 359 PLAZ AII Tm lati m 60 210 360 60 210 360 r 42 Allowable circular interpolation error wi 61 211 384 561 Pr 43 start function selection QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Pr 42 External command function 62 212 362 62 212 362 selection Pr 44 Near pass mode selection for path control 66 216 366 Pr 45 OPR method 70 220 370 70 220 370 Pr 46 OPR direction 71 221 371 71 221 371 Pr3710P add 72 222 372 72 222 372 r acus 73 223 373 73 223 373 PAS OPR d 74 224 374 74 224 374 r 75 225 375 75 225 375 B F491C d 76 226 376 76 226 376 43 reep spee 77 227 377 77 227 377 Pr 50 OPR retry 78 228 378 78 228 378 Pr 51 OPR dwe
160. OP status programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status The resolution be switched according to Resolution mode O the application The Process CPU and A module can be replaced without the Online module replacement Redundant CPU support this system being stopped unction 1 For the A1S62AD any mode 1 4000 1 8000 or 1 12000 be selected for both voltage and current input For the Q64DAN the mode is fixed at 1 4000 for both voltage and current input in normal resolution mode In high resolution mode the mode is fixed at 1 16000 when the input voltage range is 10 to 10V and the mode is fixed at 1 12000 when the input voltage range is other than 10 to 10V or current is input 3 14 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differs For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A1S62DA Q64DAN Device Device Signal name Signal name No No WDT error flag YO A1S62DA detection X1 D A conversion READY Y1 X2 Error flag Y2 X3 4 Y4 X5 5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 Use prohibited x8 Y8 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE Use prohibited YE XF YF CH1 D A conver
161. P2 S3 P3 S3 When the following functions are used with the A1SD75PL1 S3 change the program Deleted function Precautions for replacement Stepping motor mode The setting is not required when using stepping motor due to it s performance gain Fast machine OPR With the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN there is no possible function for replacement Special start stop Execute it separately for the start two times In the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN the start block area on the buffer memory is expanded to five blocks 0 Indirect designation to 4 Each start block can be directly designated with positioning start No 7000 to 7004 Block transfer With the ATSD75PLI SS this interface is used to set positioning data No 101 to 600 that do not exist on the buffer memory Positioning data I F Since all positioning data can be set in the buffer memory with the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN this function is deleted The contents are the same as the start history Therefore the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN stores only the start history These data were deleted because they can be displayed in system monitor Module s detailed information of GX Developer Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Start history during errors System monitor data Module name OS type OS version 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Functions changed from the A1SD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 When the following functions are used with the ATSD75PLI S3 make sure that there i
162. PR request flag OFF request 1170 1220 1270 1521 1621 1721 Cd 25 External start valid 1171 1221 1271 1505 1605 1705 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN 8 External command valid Cd 26 Step valid flag 1172 1222 1272 1545 1645 1745 Cd 27 Step mode 1173 1223 1273 1544 1644 1744 Cd 28 Step start information 1174 1224 1274 1546 1646 1746 Cd 29 Skip command 1175 1225 1275 1547 1647 1747 Cd 30 New torque value 1176 1226 1276 1525 1625 1725 Cd 31 Positioning starting point No 1178 1228 1278 1501 1601 1701 Cd 32 nterrupt request during continuous operation 1181 1231 1281 1520 1620 1720 TE 1184 1234 1284 1508 1608 1708 Cd 33 New acceleration time value 4185 1235 1285 1509 1609 1709 1186 1236 1286 1510 1610 1710 Cd 34 New deceleration time value 1187 1237 1287 1511 1611 1711 Cd 35 Acceleration deceleration time change during speed 1188 1238 1288 1512 1612 1712 change enable disable selection 8 17 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of 15075 0 53 15075 0 53 QD75PLIN QD75DEIN Da 1 Operation pattern Da 2 Control system 1300 2300 3300 2000 8000 14000 Da 3 Acceleration time No Da 4 Deceleration time No Da 9 M code condition data 1301 2301 3301 2001 8001 14001 No Da
163. QD62 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 Program needs to be reviewed 5 Program The number of occupied l O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 6 Performance specifications Not changed 7 Function specifications Not changed HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT AnS QnAS series Product Transition to Q series High speed counter module 1 External wiring 2 Number of slots 3 Counting speed 4 Counting range Terminal block wiring Connector wiring Remarks Restrictions Cable size is changed Not changed Can be switched 200KPPS 100KPPS or 10KPPS 24 bit binary 0 to 16777215 gt A1SD62E QD62E 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 Program needs to be reviewed 5 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 6 Performance specifications Not changed 7 Function specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Terminal block wiring Connector wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Counting speed Can be switched 500KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS or 10KPPS A1SD62D QD62D 4 Counting range 24 bit binary 0 to 16777215 gt A1SD62D S1 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 5 Program Program needs to be reviewed The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are
164. REPLACEMENT ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 1 List of Analog I O Module Alternative Models for Replacement AnS QnAS series Transition to Q series Product Model Model Remark Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA changed 4 Performance specifications External power supply 24VDC is required 5 Functional specifications Simple loop control Analog I O module Function expressions becomes unavailable 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Not changed E Point The existing wiring for the AnS QnAS series modules can be connected directly to the Q series modules using the upgrade tool conversion adaptor manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd MELSEC AnS QnAS MELSEC Q Product Conversion adaptor series module series module Analog I O module A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA ERNT ASQT63ADA 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Point The Q64AD2DA of the replacement modules is not equipped with the simple loop control Function expressions function Continuo
165. S both DC input and input AM26LS31 or equivalent A Differential line driver may be n differential input Function start 5 12 24 VDC 2 to 5mA connected Coincidence Transistor sink type output x inci 12 24VDC 0 5A point 2A common output output 1 point channel 2 points channel Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 25A 0 38A Recalculation of internal current consumption 5VDC is required Weight 0 25kg 0 12kg T 22 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 3 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available A1SD62 Description QD62 E D Precautions for replacement E D D S Changes the counter present value to a Preset function specified value Disable function Terminates counting O O For the QD62 E D values are Repeatedly executes counting between set with the intelligent function Ring counter function O user s setting values module switch setting of GX Developer If the count exceeds the range this function Linear counter function detects an overflow No 1 and No 2 coincidence a Outputs signal when the counter present I Coincidence output function O O output points can be set for each value matches the preset value h Generates an interrupt signal to the programmable controller CPU when O coincidence is detected Latches the present value a
166. S1 A1S62TCTT S2 A1S62TCRT S2 Q64TCTTBWN A1S64TCTRTBW A1S64TCTTBW S1 A1S64TCRTBW S1 A1S62TCTTBW S2 A1S62TCRTBW S2 Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN O x O O O O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O BW only O O 5 5 O O O O E X n 1 x O O 5 1 Online module change is possible only with the and QnPRH CPU types 6 29 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 4 I O Signal Comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the user s manual for each module 6 4 1 A1S64TCTRT BW Q series modules standard control Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN A1S64TCTRT BW eM Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name Watchdog timer error m fl YO Module READY flag YO Use prohibited ag 1 Temperature control v1 1 Setting operation mode v1 Setting operation mode module READY flag status instruction X2 Write error flag Y2 X2 Write error flag Y2 Error reset instruction X3 Hardware error flag
167. System area Use prohibited 47 Warning output enable disable setting R W 48 Warning output flag 49 Disconnection detection flag 50 CH1 Scaling value 51 CH2 Scaling value 52 CH3 Scaling value 53 CH4 Scaling value 54 CH1 Measured temperature value L R 55 32bit H 56 CH2 Measured temperature value L 57 32bit H 58 CH3 Measured temperature value L 59 32bit H 60 CH4 Measured temperature value L 61 32bit H 62 L CH1 Scaling range lower limit value 63 H 64 L CH1 Scaling range upper limit value 65 H 66 L CH2 Scaling range lower limit value 67 H 68 L CH2 Scaling range upper limit value 69 H 70 L CH3 Scaling range lower limit value 71 H 72 L CH3 Scaling range upper limit value 73 H 74 L Scaling range lower limit value 75 H 76 L Scaling range upper limit value 77 H 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value 80 CH2 Scaling width lower limit value 81 CH2 Scaling width upper limit value R W 82 CH3 Scaling width lower limit value 83 CH3 Scaling width upper limit value 84 CH4 Scaling width lower limit value 85 CH4 Scaling width upper limit value 86 CH1 Warning output lower lower limit L 87 value H 88 CH1 Warning output
168. T 2 3 2 Functional comparison Item A D conversion enable disable Description Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion for each channel By disabling the conversion for the channels that are not used the sampling time can be shortened A1S68AD Q68ADV I O Available Not available Precautions for replacement Sampling processing The A D conversion for analog input values is performed successively for each channel and the digital output value is output upon each conversion The sampling processing time changes depending on the number of channels used number of channels set to A D conversion enable and whether with or without the temperature drift compensation function a Without temperature drift compensation function processing time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel b With temperature drift compensation function processing time number of channels used x 80 us 1 channel 160 Averaging processing For each channel A D conversion values are averaged for the set number of times or set amount of time and the average value is output as a digital value The setting range of average time and count differ Check the specifications referring to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual Maximum and minimum values hold function The maximum and minimum values of the digital output values are retained in the module Temperatu
169. The entire program is reviewed according to the S3 QD75D2N specifications change 4 Performance specifications Not changed Whena diferential driver is 5 Function specifications Partly changed Positioning connected Example Manual pulse generator 1 axis gt 1 module module 3 QD75P4N 1 External wiring Connector and wiring are changed when an open collector is 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program signals and buffer memory assignment are changed A1SD75P3 connected The entire program is reviewed according to the S3 QD75DAN 1 specifications change 4 Performance specifications Not changed differentia dovere 5 Function specifications Partly changed connected Example Manual pulse generator 1 axis 1 module 1 External wiring Connector and wiring are changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program I O signals and buffer memory assignment are changed The entire program is reviewed according to the specifications change 4 Performance specifications Upward compatible 5 Function specifications Partly changed Example Manual pulse generator 1 axis gt 1 module A1SD75M1 QD75M1 1 External wiring Connector and wiring are changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program I O signals and buffer memory assignment are changed A1SD75M2 QD75M2 The entire program is reviewed according to the specifications change 4 Performance specifications Upward com
170. U QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU This handbook mainly explains about the Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU Q04UDHCPU and QO6UDHCPU which can replace the AnS QnAS series The specifications and functions of the Q1QUDEHCPU to Q100UDEHCPU are the same as those of the modules described above although the program and memory capacities increase mCPU module model ACPU Generic term for MELSEC A series programmable controller CPUs AnSCPU Generic term for MELSEC AnS series programmable controller CPUs Generic term for the AINCPU ATNCPUP21 R21 AINCPUP21 S3 A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 AnNCPU A2NCPUP21 R21 A2NCPUP21 R21 S1 A2NCPUP21 S3 S4 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 R21 and A3NCPUP21 S3 AnACP Generic term for the A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 A3ACPU A2ACPUP21 R21 A2ACPUP21 R21 51 ASACPUP21 R21 P Generic term for the A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 and A2USHCPU S1 AnUS H CPU Generic term for the A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A AnSCPU Generic term for MELSEC A series and MELSEC AnS series programmable controller CPUs AnN AnACPU Generic term for the ANNCPU and AnACPU AnN AnA AnSCPU Generic term for the ANNCPU AnACPU and AnSCPU QnACPU Generic term for MELSEC QnA series programmable controlle
171. U PROM write failure ELM Use prohibited 6 36 stop command flag 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN A1S62TCTT BW S2 A1S62TCRT BW S2 Device Device Device I Device 7 Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No No CH2 Forced PID control Setting change Setting change X1B Y1B X1B Y1B stop command completion flag instruction CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 PID control forced X1C Y1C X1C fl Y1C stop instruction Use prohibited 9 CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 PID control forced X1D Y1D Use prohibited X1D Y1D flag stop instruction ZIE U hibited IE U hibited XIE se prohibite se prohibite 21 For the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN XO to XF and YO to YF are applied For the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN X10 to X1F and Y10 to Y1F are applied Depending on the use of the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRTBWN some of the I O signal listed in the table are prohibited to use For details refer to the user s manual for the module used 6 37 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 5 Buffer Memory Address Comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the user s manual for each module 6 5 1 A1S64TCTRT BW and Q series modules
172. V current 30 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A1S68AD Analog input points 8 channels module Maximum number of writes for E2PROM Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels not isolated Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance 32 points Number of occupied I O points E pd pai I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 4A 5VDC Weight 0 27kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68AD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 8 channels module Up to 50 000 times Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply transformer isolation Between channels transformer isolation Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VACrms for 1 minute Between channels 1000VACrms for 1 minute Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more O Between channels 500VDC 10MQ or more The number of occupied I O A oints has changed to 16 i I O assignment intelligent 16 points P I 9 points
173. V 1 to 5V 1mV 0 to 20mA 5yA 4 to 20mA 4 Within 1 at full scale Overall accurac Digital output value 40 2 11 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68ADV Q68ADI 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ I 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 250Q Compatibility Precautions for replacement The voltage current cannot be mixed for one module 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog input i Digital output Maximum Digital output Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 0 416mV 0 to 12000 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV Voltage 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV 4000 to 4000 Tee 0 375mV 12000 to 12000 0 333mV settings 0 to 20mA 5 1 66 0 to 4000 0 to 12000 4 to 20mA 4 1 33pA Current T S bs 4000 to 4000 1 37pA 12000 to 12000 1 33pA settings If the resolution differs between AnS series and Q series modules it needs to be matched using a sequence program or user range settings Refer to Appendix 3 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Ambient temperatur
174. V 10V 1 7UA 20mA Overall accurac 1 accuracy at maximum analog output value voltage 100mV current 200pA Maximum conversion speed Within 25ms 2 channels same time for one channel Absolute maximum output Voltage 12V Current 28mA Analog output points 2 channels module Number of writes to E7PROM Output short protection Available 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q62DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement If the resolution differs Ake between AnS series and Q 16 bit signed binary series modules it needs to be Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 I matched using a sequence High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 program or user range settings Refer to Appendix 3 Voltage 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kQ to 1MQ Current 0 to 20mADC 9 External load resistance value 0 to 6000 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog output IDA 7 ETE range Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 613500 0 416mV 0 333mV If the resolution MIT Voltage 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625 between AnS series and Q z series modules it needs to be User rage
175. V A07 1D Function start 5V B07 D EQU coincidence output point No 1 A05 1F EQU coincidence output point No 2 B05 F i B02 S TERM sid a 2 A01 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 2 A1SD61 7 2 1 Performance specifications comparison 1 Comparison between A1SD61 and QD62 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for Item A1SD61 QD62 pee ibility replacement 32 points 16 points Number of occupied I O points I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelligent 16 A in points points Number of channels 1 channel 2 channels O Set the counting speed of e TUR 19K the QD62 with the intelligent e wi e intelligen Counting speed switch settings 50K 10K 100K to 10Kto 10KPPS O 3 function module switch 200KPPS 100KPPS or less setting of GX Developer Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input O Count input 5VDC nal leve signal g 12VDC 2to5mA 24VDC 1 phase 50KPPS 10KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS Counting input speed Max 2 phase input 50KPPS 7KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS inpu Counting nn anne 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 O Type UP DOWN preset counter ring counter function O Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 L5 200KPPS JUI 2525 Unit us Minimum phase difference Counter in 2 phase input 1 25us
176. X12 Y12 Error reset command X12 Write error flag Y12 Error reset instruction X13 Y13 Use prohibited X13 Hardware error flag Y13 Use prohibited CH1 Auto tuning CH1 Auto tuning X14 AM Y14 X14 CH1 Auto tuning status Y14 Use prohibited command instruction CH2 Auto tuning CH2 Auto tuning X15 Y15 X15 CH2 Auto tuning status Y15 instruction CH3 Auto tuning CH3 Auto tuning X16 Y16 X16 CH3 Auto tuning status Y16 command instruction CH4 Auto tuning Auto tuning X17 Y17 X17 CH4 Auto tuning status way instruction 6 30 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Device No X19 X1A X1B X1C X1D X1E A1S64TCTRT BW Device Signal name Use prohibited No Signal name Device No Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Signal name Device No Signal name 1 For the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN XO to and YO to YF are applied For the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN X10 to X1F and Y10 to Y1F are applied FeRAM backup E PROM write E2PROM backup command completion flag instruction Default setting Default value write Default setting Y19 X19 I Y19 I 29 registration command completion flag registration instruction CH1 Forced PID control 2 i i Y1A EXE PROM write failure Use prohibited stop command flag CH2 Forced PID control Setting chang
177. Y2A Upper limit signal X1E X1E Speed position switching enable Y2C Y2C Lower limit signal X1F X1F PLC READY Y2D Y2D OPR start complete X20 Y10 Y10 to to Absolute positioning start complete X21 YAF Y19 Forward start complete Y2B Y1D for the incremental positioning and the X22 to speed position control switching Use prohibited WEE AE Y1F Reverse start complete for the incremental positioning and the X23 Y2E Y2F speed position control switching Synchronization flag X24 Zero gain adjustment data writing complete _ X2A flag Zero gain adjustment change complete flag X2B Set value change complete flag X2C Operating status of the speed position _ control switch mode X20 X25 to X29 Use prohibited to yor 2 X2F 4 A Use prohibited area is reserved for the system use and cannot be used by a user If it is turned on off through a sequence program the normal operation of the module cannot be guaranteed 8 50 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required because the assignment of buffer memory differs between the modules For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the MELSEC Q QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual area shows the differences between the A1SD70 and the QD73A1 Buffer memory address Item
178. a and condition data in L are called start block 0 There are five start blocks 0 to 4 8 39 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of 15075 0 A1SD75MLI QD75MLI mun Start No 8001 4500 4750 5000 Positioning stil Indirect Start No 8002 4501 4751 5001 designation to to to to to to to information Start No 8050 4549 4799 5049 T 5050 30000 Programmable controller Condition judgment target m CPU memory area data of the condition data 5099 30099 Target axis 5100 Head positioning block No 5101 No of read write data items 5102 Read write request 5103 Read write block 5110 to 6109 8 40 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 3 5 External interface specifications comparison The following table lists the differences of the external interface specifications between the A1SD75MO and QD75MLI 1 Electrical specifications comparison Difference O Compatible A Partial change required compati bility Precautions for replacement nU OFF current 1 5mA 1 0mA Check whether the OFF current value met Upper lower limit signal A ae Input resistance 4 7kKQ gt 6 8kQ satisfied values OFF current 1 5mA 1 0mA Check whether the OFF current value met Stop signal A Input resistance 4 7k0 6 8kCO satisfied values OFF current 1 5mA 1 0mA 7 Check whether
179. able wire size External power supply 24VDC FG connection Refer to x Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59Necm be changed conversion part D A conversion part R1 25 3 Applicable solderless 1 25 3 1 25 YS3A 2 3 5 2 YS3A Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be terminal V1 25 M3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A used External power supply 24VDC FG connection None Wem 24VDC 15 x are Ripple spike 500mVp_p or less The 24VDC External t external power power i 0 19A x P consumption supply is supply Inrush required 2 5A 150us or less x current Internal current 0 8A 0 17A consumption 5VDC Weight 0 3kg 0 23kg 4 Applicable wire size Item Specifications 3 3mm AWG12 Rated multi wire connection size Solid wire 0 2 to 0 8mm x 2 wires Stranded wire 0 2 to 0 8mm x 2 wires Screw tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6Nem The following table shows the specifications of the applicable wire to the external power supply connector 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 2 2 Functional comparison 1 Functions of A D conversion Item A D conversion enable disable Description Allows specifying whether to enable or disable A D conversion O Available Not available A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA Precautions for replacement enmeiter for each channel Disabling the conversion on unused channels reduces the s
180. ables between the A1SD70 and the encoder can be used by changing the intelligent function module switch setting Replacement with the QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15041 or earlier Change the wiring between the A1SD70 and the encoder so that each phase A and B is reversed the A1SD70 rotation direction setting OFF 8 8 55 1 of Rotation direction of the motor and Wiring between the A1SD70 and encoder Wiring when the A1SD70 is replaced to the QD73A1 encoder Phase Phase Phase Phase HA TUM Same direction Phase Phase Phase Phase B B A1SD70 Encoder QD73A1 Encoder Phase Phase Phase Phase mw Aa e Reverse direction Phase Phase Phase Phase 1 B A1SD70 Encoder QD73A1 Encoder Replacement with the QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15042 or later Set b0 switch 3 of the intelligent function module switch to 1 The operation for the QD73A1 while the signal is off was changed from the operation for the A1SD70 due to the safety consideration of when Servo READY signal is turned on The QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15042 or later operates the same as the A1SD70 by setting b4 switch 3 of the intelligent function module switch to 1 POSITION DETECTION MODULE REPLACEMENT POSITION D
181. acement AnS QnAS series Transition to Q series Product Model Model Remarks Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q62DAN memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed External power supply 24VDC is required 5 Functional specifications Not changed A1S62DA 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q64DAN memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed 4CH module External power supply 24VDC is required 5 Functional specifications Not changed Analog output module ar 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer A1S68DAI Q68DAIN memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed External power supply 24VDC is required 5 Functional specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer A1S68DAV Q68DAVN memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed External power supply 24VDC is required 5 Functional specifications Not changed Point The existing wiring for
182. ag 4 X4 1 Auto tuning status Y4 instruction CH2 Auto tuning X5 CH2tuning status flag M5 X5 CH2 Auto tuning status ONE instruction 22 U hibited 15 ze U hibited U hibited x7 se prohibite x7 se prohibite se prohibite xs FeRAM write complete RC E PROM write vi E2PROM backup flag Use prohibited completion flag instruction Default value write Default value write Default setting X9 Y9 X9 Y9 AR complete flag completion flag registration instruction FeRAM write 2 ite fai XA id YA EN E PROM write failure YA Use prohibited incomplete flag flag as Setting change Setting change XB Use prohibited YB XB YB N completion flag instruction CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 PID control forced XC YC XC YC flag flag stop instruction CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 PID control forced XD YD XD YD flag flag stop instruction XE YE XE m YE T 4 Use prohibited Use prohibited XF YF XF YF X10 Y10 X10 READY flag Y10 Use prohibited Setting operation mode Setting operation mode Setting operation mode X11 Y11 X11 Y11 command status instruction X12 Y12 Error reset command X12 Write error flag Y12 reset instruction X13 Y13 Use prohibited X13 Hardware error flag Y13 Use prohibited CH1 Auto tuning CH1 Auto tuning X14 Y14 X14 CH1 Auto tuning status Y14 instruction ibi CH2 Auto tunin CH2 Auto tunin x45 Use prohibited Y1
183. al name No No X20 20 X21 21 22 Y22 X23 Y23 X24 Y24 X25 25 CH5 digital output value X26 Y26 X27 Y27 X28 Y28 X29 Y29 X2A Y2A X2B Y2B X2C Y2C X2D Y2D ___ _ Usage disable X2E Y2E X2F Y2F Usage disable X30 Y30 X31 Y31 X32 Y32 X33 Y33 X34 Y34 X35 22 5 _ CHE6 digital output value X36 Y36 X37 Y37 X38 Y38 X39 Y39 X3A Y3A X3B Y3B X3C Y3C X3D Y3D Usage disable 4 26 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison The A1S66ADA sends and receives data to and from the CPU module through I O signals while the Q64AD2DA sends and receives data to and from the CPU module through buffer memory Accordingly the sequence program for sending and receiving data needs to be changed For details on the buffer memory and the sequence program refer to Analog Input Output Module User s Manual Q64AD2DA Q64AD2DA ress decimal Readiwrite 200 400 600 A D conversion enable disable setting R W 201 401 601 Averaging process method setting R W 202 402 602 Averaging process time number of times RW setting 203 403 603 to to to System area 209 409 609 210 410 610 c
184. alue to a Q series module review the program For details refer to the user s manual for the Q series module used 6 52 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Address hexadecimal Name Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Read write 3E 5E E PROM s PID constants read instruction RW EIS 5F Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants AO 1 zs A2 System area Use prohibited A3 A4 Alert dead band setting A5 Number of alert delay AG Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count AT Temperature rise completion range setting RAN A8 Temperature rise completion soak time setting A9 PID continuation flag AA Heater disconnection correction function selection AB AC System area Use prohibited AF Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting BO CT monitor method switching oe B1 B2 Manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another R analog module B5 Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another I analog module B6 Cold junction temperature compensation selection R W B7 Control switching monitor R B8 B9 Auto tuning mode selection R W BC to BF System area Use prohibited CO DO Alert 1 mode setting C1 D1 Alert 2 mode setting RIW C2 D2 Alert 3 mode setting C3 D3 Alert 4 mode setting to 100 to 107 Heat
185. ampling time Sequentially performs A D conversion on analog input values 9 for each channel outputting the digital output value each time o Performs averaging processing A D conversion in units of The setting range varies Time average time for each channel and performs digital output of its average between the time average and value count average Performs averaging processing on A D conversion in units of Refer to MELSEC Q Analog I O Averaging Count average counts for each channel and performs digital output of its Module User s Manual to check processing average value the specifications Performs averaging processing on A D conversion in units of p counts for each channel with the range moving in response to Moving average XR each sampling processing and performs digital output of its average value Range switching function Allows selection of the input range to be used O Maximum and minimum values Holds the maximum value and the minimum value of digital hold function values into the module Input signal error detection h g Detects an analog input value that is out of the setting range function Setting the same scaling upper limit val d ling Performs scale conversion on digital output values within a AE do NE limit value as those of 8 specified range between a scaling upper limit value and a Scaling function ue resolution mode of the scaling
186. annels not isolated Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply SOOVAC for 1 minute Between external power supply and analog output 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between external power supply and analog output 500VDC 20MQ or more 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied I O points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used Wiring change is required 0 33A 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less 0 15A 2 5A 250us or less External power supply 24VDC is required 0 19kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 2 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Description A1S62DA Q62DAN Precautions for replacement Determines the status of analog output Analog output HOLD CLEAR values hold or clear when the function programmable controller CPU stops or an error occurs D A conversion enable disable Specifies whether to enable or disable the function D A conversion D A output enable disable Specifies whether to output the D A functi
187. ansition from MELSEC I OLINK to CC Link LT Handbook L 08062bENG Transition from MELSEC I OLINK to AnyWire DB A20 Handbook L08263ENG Transition of CPUs MELSEC Redundant System Handbook 8 m L 08117ENG Transition from Q4ARCPU to QnPRHCPU 3 Transition Examples Manual name MELSEC A QnA Large AnS QnAS Small Transition Manual number A large AnS small Examples 4 Others 1 App 2 No Manual name technical bulletin L NA 08121E x Manual number A large AnS small Procedures for Replacing Positioning Module AD71 with QD75 FA A 0060 Oo Appendix 2 2 AnS series No Manual name Manual number Model code 1 A D Converter Module Type A1S64AD User s Manual 1B 66336 139676 2 Analog Digital Converter Module Type A1S68AD User s Manual IB 66576 13J757 3 D A Converter Module Type A1S62DA User s Manual 1B 66335 139673 4 Digital Analog Converter Module Type A1S68DAV DAI User s Manual 1B 66587 139810 5 Thermocouple Input Module Type A1S68TD User s Manual 1B 66571 13J781 6 Type AG8RD3N AN A1S62RD3N AN Pt100 Input Module User s Manual SH 080193 13JR46 A1S62TCTT S2 Heating Cooling Temperature Control Module 7 A1S62TCTTBW S2 Heating Cooling Temperature Control Module with Wire SH 3643 13JL35 Breakage Detection Function User s Manual A1S62TCRT S2 Heating Cooling Te
188. arison The following table lists the differences of the external interface specifications between the ATSD75PLI S3 and QD75PLIN QD75DLIN O Compatible A Partial change required M Compat Difference 3 Precautions for replacement ibility Drive unit READY Upper lower limit signal Stop signal lt When the machine OPR for the near point watchdog signal method is used gt The input response time for the QD75PLI DLI is shorter than the Near point dog signal Input resistance 4 7kQ 4 3kQ Response time 4ms gt 1ms If a sensor which the chattering time when the near point watchdog signal Input is turned on is long is used an error may occurs due to the false detection of the ON OFF status 4 Check specifications for the sensor Input resistance 4 7kO 4 3kQ External command signal CHG A Response time 4ms gt 1ms Input resistance 3 5kQ 4 7kQ at input of 24V Zero signal 0 5kQ 0 62kQ at input of 5V A Response time 0 8ms gt 1ms 3 ON voltage 2 5V 2 0V at input of 5V Including the response time differences reconfirming is required Manual pulse generator ON current 3 5mA gt 2mA Output Deviation counter clear 1 For the external start and in position signal of which QD75PLIN QD75DLIN does not have they are not described 2 The column of interface specifications differences is des
189. atinum 2 Number of slots Not changed Q64TCRTN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed thermometer 4 Performance specifications Not changed standard control 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 lad cad 1 External wiring Cable size is changed Platinum 2 Number of slots Not changed resistance 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals Q64TCRTN thermometer and buffer memory addresses are changed heating cooling 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 control 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 slots are required I O assignment A1S64TCTRTBW 16 empty points for the first half 16 intelligent oints for the second half Thermocouple Q64TCTTBWN 3 Program The number of occupied points I O signals standard control and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 slots are required I O assignment A1S64TCTRTBW 16 empty points for the first half 16 intelligent Thermocouple Q64TCTTBWN points for the second half heating cooling control 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 P
190. ation instruction FeRAM write 2 ite fai XA id YA EN E PROM write failure YA Use prohibited incomplete flag flag as Setting change Setting change XB Use prohibited YB XB YB N completion flag instruction CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 PID control forced XC YC XC YC flag flag stop instruction CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 PID control forced XD YD XD YD flag flag stop instruction XE YE XE m YE T 4 Use prohibited Use prohibited XF YF XF YF X10 Y10 X10 READY flag Y10 Use prohibited Setting operation mode Setting operation mode Setting operation mode X11 Y11 X11 Y11 command status instruction X12 Y12 Error reset command X12 Write error flag Y12 reset instruction X13 Y13 Use prohibited X13 Hardware error flag Y13 Use prohibited CH1 Auto tuning CH1 Auto tuning X14 Y14 X14 CH1 Auto tuning status Y14 instruction ibi CH2 Auto tunin CH2 Auto tunin x15 Use prohibited Y15 ROM X15 CH2 Auto tuning status Y45 lt 9 tuning command instruction X16 Y16 X16 Y16 ae Use prohibited Use prohibited Use prohibited X17 Y17 X17 Y17 FeRAM back 2 i 2 X18 Y18 e ackup X18 E PROM write Y18 E PROM backup command completion flag instruction Default setting Default value write Default setting X19 Y19 X19 Y19 registration command completion flag registration instruction CH1 Forced PID control 2 ite fai X1A Y1A o M
191. ations Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute o Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 20MQ or more o U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 12 S36 10 CTL 12 S56 10 I CTL 6 P H o Full scale x 1 0 3 to 255 32 points 2 slots 16 points slot The number of occupied I O ED default I O assignment A i I O assignment intelligent 16 points points and slots are different Vacancy for 16 points intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block Two 18 point terminal blocks 22 to 18 AWG x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Recalculation of internal 0 29A 0 33A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 17kg 0 28kg 27 4 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 55 2 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 6 19 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 2 5 A1S62TCTT BW S2 Control output Specifications A1S62TCTT S2 A1S62TCTTBW S2 Transistor output Number of temperature input points 2 channels module Applicable temperature sensor Refer to Section 6 2 5 1 Indication accuracy
192. average time 1 Averaging processing selection i constant setting R W CH2 Time count moving average time 2 CH1 Averaging time count constant setting R W 7 CH3 Time count moving average time 3 CH2 Averaging time count i constant setting CH4 Time count moving average time constant setting 5 6 System area Use prohibited 7 System area Use prohibited 8 9 Averaging processing specification R W 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit R Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperature value 16bit CH1 Measured temperature value 16bit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value 16bit R 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 16bit 14 n CH4 Measured temperature value 16bit 5 System area Use prohibited 16 ER 17 System area Use prohibited 18 CH1 Detected temperature value L 19 32bit H Error code 20 CH2 Detected temperature value L Setting range 1 R 21 32bit H Setting range 2 22 23 24 25 26 27 m 28 System area Use prohibited 29 30 31 32 33 System area Use prohibited 34 Write data error code R W 35 Conversion completed flag R 5 39 Type specification of platinum RTD 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G Address I Read write decimal 45 T 46 System area Use prohibited 47 Warning output enab
193. c or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The handbook number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Handbook Number Revision Mar 2013 L NA 08220ENG B QD73A1 Model change QD75PO QD75PON QD75D0 gt QD75DON Section 7 4 Partial correction Section 7 1 7 2 Jun 2013 L NA 08220ENG C Partial correction Section 5 5 4 7 1 7 3 4 7 4 4 7 4 6 Sep 2014 L NA 08220ENG D Model addition Q64AD2DA Chapter 4 Partial correction Section 2 1 3 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 8 3 5 9 1 10 1 Appendix 2 1 2 3 Japanese Handbook Version L 08208 D This handbook confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this handbook 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
194. c withstand voltage Insulation resistance Between thermocouple input and programmable controller power supply Between thermocouple input channels Transformer isolation 500VAC for 1 minute 5MQ or more using 500VDC insulation resistance tester Between cold junction compensation input Pt100 and Not isolated programmable controller power supply Disconnection detection Available Number of temperature sensor input points 8 channels 1 channel for Pt100 module Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 20 point terminal block External device connector sold separately Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 32A Weight 5 13 0 28kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q series Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 270 to 1820 C Compatibility Precautions for replacement The measured temperature range differs depending on the thermocouple used 16 bit signed binary 2700 to 18200 value up to the first decimal place x 10 16 bit signed binary 0 to 100 0 to 100 The concept of scaling value differs To use the scaling values program needs to be reviewed JIS C
195. cation The resolution mode is batch set for all channels Online module replacement A module can be replaced without the system being stopped 1 For the A1S68DAI the mode is fixed at 1 4000 For the Q68DAIN the mode is fixed at 1 4000 in normal resolution mode In high resolution mode the mode is fixed at 1 12000 3 22 The Process CPU Redundant CPU support this function 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 4 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A1S68DAI Q68DAIN Signal name WDT error flag YO A1S68DAI detection X1 D A conversion READY Y1 X2 Error flag Y2 X3 4 Y4 X5 5 X6 Y6 XT Y7 Use prohibited X8 Y8 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC Use prohibited XD YD XE YE XF YF X10 Y10 x11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 D A conversion value X14 Y14 output enable flag X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 Error reset flag X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C Use prohibited X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F Signal name Signal name Signal name Module ready YO Use prohibited Y1 CH1 Output enable disable flag CH2 Output enable Y2 disable flag CH3 Output enable disable flag ET CH4 Output enable
196. ch settin 4 I O assignment Switch setting LED Items indicated with the LEDs differ between the A1SD70 and the QD73A1 5 External wiring The existing connectors can be used 6 7 The 15070 counts the feedback pulse Operation of when Servo I The QD73A1 clears the deviation counter and outputs the voltage proportional to the 8 READY signal is off to 0 and outputs 0V deviation counter 1 The module occupying 2 slots cannot be mounted on the Q series large type base unit Because the same base unit of the existing module is used for the QD73A1 when mounting the QD73A1 on the Q series large type base unit use 2 base units by adding an extension base unit 2 When the first half slot for the existing A1SD70 is set to empty 0 points configure the I O assignment setting of parameters in either of following ways so that addresses of the QD73A1 remain the same as the A1SD70 even after the replacement 1 Set Empty 0 point to the first half slot 2 Set the same address of the A1SD70 to the second half slot of the QD73A1 in the start XY setting 3 Changes or corrections of the programs are required For details refer to the MELSEC Q QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual 4 The method of mode setting which is required for the positioning is changed from a hardware switch to the switch setting in I O assignment of PLC parameter Configure the same setting as the A1SD70 by referring to the MELSEC Q QD7
197. cribed as the form Specifications of ATSD75PLI S3 gt Specifications of QD75PLIN QD75DLIN 3 The response time difference 0 2 ms of ATSD75PLI S3 and QD75PLIN QD75DLIN is the time difference of 1pls part for creep speed of 5000pps When the accuracy is required it is required for the creep speed to be low enough value 4 If the chattering time is long when the near point watchdog signal is turned on the OFF status may be detected shortly after the ON status of the signal is detected under changing into the creep speed In this case the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN outputs an error and stops the OPR control 8 20 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 3 A1SD75M1 M2 M3 8 3 1 Performance specifications comparison Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for A1SD75M1 A1SD75M2 A1SD75M3 QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 ibilit replacement Item Y i Number of control axes 1 2 3 1 2 4 Number of positioning data 600 axis 600 axis items 2 axis linear Not Not Position Available Available Available Available interpolation available available control 2 axis interpolation Not Not circular Available Available Available Available functions available available interpolation Position Available Available control Speed Available Available control Speed Positioning position
198. d Control output cycle 1 to 100s Input impedance 1MO Input filter 0 to 100s Sensor correction value setting 50 00 to 50 00 Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing Temperature control method PID ON OFF pulse or two position control PID constants setting Can be set by auto tuning Proportional band P 0 0 to 1000 0 PID constants range Integral time 1 1 to 3600s Derivative time D 0 to 3600s Set value SV setting range Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used Output signal Rated load voltage ON OFF pulse 10 2 to 30VDC Max load current 0 1A point 0 4A common Max inrush current Transistor output Leakage current at OFF Max voltage drop at ON 0 4A 10ms 0 1mA or less 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A Response time OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less Number of writes to EPPROM 6 16 Max 100 000 times 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible NENNEN Specifications Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Transistor output 4 channels module Refer to Section 6 2 4 1 Ambient temperature 25 5 C Full scale 0 3 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Full scale 0 7 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of
199. d pulse output signal pulse output differs Near point The input response watchdog Available Available A time differs Refer signal to Section 8 2 5 Connection via programmable Connection i controller CPU Q corresponding serial with DM The connection Direct connection communication module Q O peripheral type differs corresponding MELSECNET H remote I devices Peripheral module devices AD75TU cannot be data setting used AD75TU Connectable Not connectable x etc Use GX Configurator QP GX Available GX GX Configurator AP GX Configurator QP A Configurator Configurator differs 1 With A1SD75PLI S3 Nos 1 to 100 data items axis of positioning data can be set using the buffer memory and Nos 1 to 600 data axis can be set with QD75PLIN QD75DLIN The positioning data in the buffer memory is not backed up 2 Indicates the standard mode stepping motor mode about A1SD75PLI S3 3 The near pass function is valid only during the continuous path control A1S8D75PLI S3 Selected with parameters QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Standard function QD75PLIN QD75DLIN does not have address pass mode When being asked for passing the positioning address continue with continuous running However it will stop once 4 This is the internal current consumption when the A1SD75P3 S3 is connected to a differential driver 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 2 2 Functional comparison 1 Functions deleted from the A1SD75P1 S3
200. d speed and speed control operation is continued until Stop signal is input OPR control A workpiece is returned to an original point following an OPR start command from a CPU module and the current value is corrected to an OP address after the completion of OPR Multiplication setting This function multiplies the feedback pulse frequency from the pulse generator by 4 2 1 or 1 2 Electronic gear function This function controls moving distance and speed by multiplying command pulse output Deviation counter clear function This function clears the accumulated pulses in the deviation counter When the servomotor power is turned off due to an emergency stop during positioning clearing the accumulated pulses in the deviation counter prevents servomotor rotation at power recovery Speed change function This function forces to change speed from a program during positioning control or JOG operation Refer to Section 8 4 6 Current value change function This function changes the current feed value to a specified value from a sequence program on the condition other than while BUSY Refer to Section 8 4 6 In position function This function turns on In position signal while the accumulated pulse amount in the deviation counter is within the specified in position range In position signal can be used as the signal right before positioning completion Zero gain adjustment This function a
201. d write 1860 Error code First two Last two 1861 digits of digits of the year the year 1862 story Error Month Day time 1863 Hour Minute Day of 1864 S d the week 1865 to System area 1869 1870 Error code First two Last two 1871 digits of digits of the year the year 1872 istory 7 Eror Month time 1873 Hour Minute 1874 Second D9Y of the week 1875 to System area 1879 1880 Error code First two Last two 1881 digits of digits of ee the year the year 1882 istory8 Error Day time 1883 Hour Minute 1884 Second the week 1885 to System area 1889 1890 Error code First two Last two 1891 digits of digits of the year the year 1892 story 9 time 1893 Hour Minute 1894 Second Day of the week 1895 to System area 1899 1900 Error code First two Last two 1901 digits of digits of History the year the year Error R 1902 10 I Month Day time 1903 Hour Minute Day of 1904 S d 9 pen the week 1905 to System area 1909 1910 Error code First two Last two 1911 digits of digits of History the year the year 1912 11 Error Month time 1913 Hour Minute 1914 Second Day of the week 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA
202. data were deleted because they can be displayed in system monitor Module s detailed information of GX Developer Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual With the QD75MLI there is no the error code of the left column Indirect designation Positioning data I F Start history during errors System monitor data Module name OS type OS version 8 25 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Functions changed from the A1SD75M1 A1SD75M2 A1SD75M3 When the following functions are used with the ATSD75MLI make sure that there is no operation problem after the module is replaced with the QD75MLI Changed function Software stroke limit function Description 1 The software stroke limit check of arc address is carried out only when a sub point is designated It is not carried out when a center point is designated 2 The software stroke limit check during speed control is carried out in the following cases Pr 14 and the current feed When the software stroke limit is applied to the current feed value with Pr 21 When the software stroke limit is applied to the machine feed value 3 If an attempt is made to change the current value but the designated address is out of the software stroke limit range the attempt is considered as an error and the current value is not changed 4 Error code change A1SD75MLI There are 3 types of errors for each software stroke upper limit and
203. digit mbient temperature 0 to ull scale x 0 7 1 digit Ambi 0 to 55 C Full 0 7 1 digi Sampling cycle 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used Control output cycle 1 to 100s Input impedance 1MO Input filter 0 to 100s Sensor correction value setting 50 00 to 50 00 Operation at sensor input disconnection Upscale processing Temperature control method PID ON OFF pulse or two position control PID constants setting Can be set by auto tuning Proportional band P 0 0 to 1000 0 PID constants range Integral time I 1 to 3600s Derivative time D 0 to 3600s Set value SV setting range Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used Output signal ON OFF pulse Rated load voltage 10 2 to 30VDC Max load current 0 1A point 0 4A common Max inrush current 0 4A 10ms Transistor output Leakage current at OFF 0 1mA or less Max voltage drop at ON 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A Response time OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less Number of writes to EPPROM 6 24 Max 100 000 times 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Transistor output 4 chan
204. ding to Resolution mode the application The resolution mode setting is applicable to all channels A module can be replaced without the system The Process CPU and Redundant Online module change being stopped CPU support this function 1 For the A1S64AD the resolution for both voltage and current be selected from 1 4000 1 8000 or 1 12000 For the Q64AD the resolution for both voltage and current is 1 4000 in normal resolution mode In high resolution mode the resolution for the voltage range 10 to 0 to 10V is 1 16000 and the resolution for the voltage in other ranges and current is 1 12000 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 2 3 signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A1S64AD Q64AD Signal name Watchdog timer error Signal name Signal name Module READY Temperature drift Signal name X1 conversion READY Y1 X1 Y1 compensation flag X2 Error flag 2 X3 Y3 Y3 4 Y4 Y4 JU hibited Use prohibited TES X5 5 5 X6 Y6 Y6 X7 Y7 Y7 High resolution mode x8 Y8 Y8 status flag Operating conditi
205. djusts analog voltage contained in accumulated pulses Refer to Section 8 4 6 8 46 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Remarks PAPA ia Positioning execution time BUSY signal X14 ON to Positioning complete signal X15 ON of the QD73A1 and A1SD70 may differ because their internal processing methods are different As a result the timing when In position signal X16 turns on may also vary Adjust positioning execution time using the following methods if the difference of the positioning execution time or the timing when In position signal X16 turns on affects the system 8 47 Adjusting the QD73A1 s positioning parameter time Pr 6 Acceleration time Pr 7 Deceleration Increasing gain by changing the accumulated pulse amount setting through the QD73A1 s zero gain adjustment 0906000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000090 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Changed function from the A1SD70 Though the functions of the A1SD70 and the QD73A1 are same the setting methods and buffer memory addresses for the functions are partly changed To use following functions changes or corrections of the programs or setting methods are required For details refer to the user s manual for the QD73A1 Changed function Major positioning control Change description Program corrections of the QD73A1 are required because buffer memory addr
206. ds the maximum value the minimum value of digital hold function values into the module Input signal error detection h g Detects an analog input value that is out of the setting range function Setting the same scaling upper limit val d ling Performs scale conversion on digital output values within a u G e limit value as those of 8 specified range between a scaling upper limit value and a Scaling function resolution mode of the scaling lower limit value This function reduces the time and A1S66ADA allows use of the effort to create a program of the scale conversion same digital output values as in the A1S66ADA Logs records digital output values or scaling values digital Logging function operation values 10000 points of data can be logged for each 4 22 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Functions of D A conversion O Available Not available Item Description A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA Precautions for replacement Allows specifying whether to enable or disable D A conversion D A conversion enable disable for each channel function In the Q64AD2DA disabling the D A conversion on unused channels reduces the conversion cycle Allows specifying whether to output D A conversion values or OV OmA for each channel The conversion speed remains D A output enable disable constant irrespective of the output enabled d
207. e H 180 4 wire type CH1 User range settings L 181 offset resistance value H 182 4 wire type CH1 User range settings L 183 gain resistance value H to 254 4 wire type CH4 User range settings L 255 gain resistance value H 5 61 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 1 List of Heating cooling Temperature Control Control Module Alternative Models for Replacement AnS QnAS series Product Heating cooling temperature control module Temperature control module A1S64TCTRT Transition to Q series Remark Restrictions Cable size is changed Not changed 1 External wiring 2 Number of slots Thermocouple Q64TCTTN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed standard control 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 1 External wiring Cable size is changed A1S64TCTRT 2 Number of slots Not changed Thermocouple 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals N Q64TCTTN heating cooling and buffer memory addresses are changed control 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 A1S64TCTRT 1 External wiring Cable size is changed Pl
208. e 0 3FH 63 CH1 Scaling upper limit value 0 BAN 404 64 CH2 Scaling lower limit value 0 41H 65 CH2 Scaling upper limit value 0 1 For details of the scaling function refer to the user s manual for the module used App 7 Memo App s WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use
209. e Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 to 55 C Analog input Ambient Ambient With Without With Without range i i i t temperature I t t temperature empera ure empera ure 545 C empera ure empera ure 545 C drift drift drift drift compensation compensation compensation compensation 0 to 10V 101 0 3 0 4 0 1 509 48 digits 64 digits 16 digits 10V Voltage pie 1 to 5V user bu 10 396 10 496 10 196 SS 9 412 digits 16 digits 4 digits 0 to 0 3 0 4 0 1 20 36 digits 48 digits 12 digits 4to Current 20mA user range settings 2 12 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Maximum conversion speed A1S68AD 0 5ms channel The speed is 1ms channel on all channels if averaging processing is set even for one channel Absolute maximum input Voltage 35V Current 30mA Analog input points 8 channels module Maximum number of writes for EPROM Isolation method Between the input terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Inte
210. e Setting change Y1B X1B Y1B stop command completion flag instruction CH3 Forced PID control CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 PID control forced 1 X1C 1 stop command flag stop instruction CHA Forced PID control CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 PID control forced Y1D X1D Y1D stop command flag stop instruction CH3 Alert occurrence CH3 PID control forced Y1E X1E Y1E I 2 flag stop instruction Use prohibited CHA Alert occurrence PID control forced flag stop instruction Depending on the use of the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRTBWN some of the I O signals listed in the table are prohibited to use For details refer to the user s manual for the module used 6 31 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 4 2 A1S64TCTRT BW and Q series modules heating cooling control A1S64TCTRT BW Signal name Signal name CTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Signal name Signal name Watchdog timer error fl YO Module READY flag YO Use prohibited ag 1 Temperature control YA 1 Setting operation mode 1 Setting operation mode module READY flag status instruction X2 Write error flag Y2 X2 Write error flag Y2 Error reset instruction X3 error flag X3 Hardware error flag Y3 Use prohibited CH1 Auto tuning X4 CH1 tuning status fl
211. e and CPU module in case of a communication failure NCAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise When a device such as a lamp heater or solenoid valve is controlled through an output module a large current approximately ten times greater than normal may flow when the output is turned from off to on Take measures such as replacing the module with one having a sufficient current rating After the CPU module is powered on or is reset the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration parameter settings and or program size Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the modu
212. e prohibited S Out of measurement range flag 10 Conversion completion flag 4 11 to 18 CH1 to CH8 Measured temperature value 5 19 Error code R CH1 to CH8 Setting range 1 2 6 20 to 21 Th let ermocouple type System area Use prohibited ple type 7 22 Setting range 3 Offset gain setting 8 23 System area Use prohibited 9 24 to 25 CH1 CH8 Averaging processing selection Offset gain setting mode Offset 10 CH1 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 26 E specification Offset gain setting mode Gain 11 CH2 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 27 ee R W specification 12 CH3 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 28 CH1 Offset temperature setting value 13 CHA Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit R 29 CH1 Gain temperature setting value 14 CH5 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit to 15 CH6 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 43 CH8 Gain temperature setting value 16 CH7 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit 44 System area Use prohibited Q68TD G H02 Cold junction compensation 17 CH8 Converted temperature value 0 1 C unit R 45 setting status 18 Q68TD G H01 System area Use System area Use prohibited prohibited 19 46 Warning output enable disable setting R W 20 CH1 Scaling value 47 Warning output flag Process alarm 21 CH2 Scaling value 48 Warning output flag Rate alarm Q68TD G H02 Disconnection detection 22 CH3 Scaling value 49 flag R Q68TD G H01 Disconnection status 23
213. e settings thermal EMF offset value L 181 CH3 User range settings thermal EMF offset value H 182 CH3 User range settings thermal EMF gain value L 183 CH3 User range settings thermal EMF gain value H R W 184 CH4 Factory default offset value 185 CH4 Factory default gain value 186 CH4 User range settings offset value 187 CH4 User range settings gain value 188 CH4 User range settings thermal EMF offset value L 189 CH4 User range settings thermal EMF offset value H 190 CH4 User range settings thermal EMF gain value L 191 CH4 User range settings thermal EMF gain value H 192 m System area Use prohibited 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 3 A1S68TD Replacing with the Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 5 3 1 Performance specifications comparison 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S68TD Temperature sensor input 0 to 1700 C Detected temperature value 16 bit signed binary 0 to 17000 value up to the first decimal place x 10 Output Scaling value 16 bit signed binary 0 to 2000 Thermocouple compliance standards JIS C1602 1981 Applicable thermocouple Refer to Section 5 3 1 2 Measured temperature range accuracy Refer to Section 5 3 1 2 Overall accuracy 2 Maximum conversion speed 400ms 8 channels Isolation method Isolated area Isolation method Dielectri
214. e use of the Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTN and Q64TCRTBWN some of the I O signal listed in the table are prohibited to use For details refer to the user s manual for the module used 6 35 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 4 4 A1S62TCTT BW S2 A1S62TCRT BW S2 and Q series modules A1S62TCTT BW S2 A1S62TCRT BW S2 Signal name Signal name CTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Signal name Signal name Watchdog timer error fl YO Module READY flag YO Use prohibited ag 1 Temperature control YA 1 Setting operation mode 1 Setting operation mode module READY flag status instruction X2 Write error flag Y2 X2 Write error flag Y2 Error reset instruction X3 error flag X3 Hardware error flag Y3 Use prohibited CH1 Auto tuning X4 CH1 tuning status flag 4 X4 1 Auto tuning status Y4 instruction CH2 Auto tuning X5 CH2tuning status flag M5 X5 CH2 Auto tuning status ONE instruction 22 U hibited 15 ze U hibited U hibited x7 se prohibite x7 se prohibite se prohibite 2 i 2 i 2 x8 E PROM write Y8 8 E PROM write Y8 E PROM backup completion flag Use prohibited completion flag instruction Default value write Default value write Default setting Y9 X9 Y9 BP complete flag completion flag registr
215. ection 10 Available 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64DAN Compatibility Precautions for replacement If the resolution differs ASE between AnS series and Q 16 bit signed binary series modules it needs to be Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 matched using a sequence High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 program or user range settings Refer to Appendix 3 Voltage 10 to 10VDC External load resistance value 1kQ to 1MQ Current 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0 to 6000 Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog output a 7 ES Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 5V 1 25mV Siedanae 0 416mV itth 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV Mie resolution e Voltage 10to 10V 2 5mV 16000t016000 0 625mV between AnS series and Q 4000 to 4000 series modules it needs to be me rane 0 75mV 12000 to 12000 0 333mV A I settings matched using a sequence 0 to 20mA 0 to 4000 5yA 0 to 12000 1 66 program or user range Current to 20mA 4 1 3 settings Refer to Appendix 3 ne fee 4000 to 4000 1 5uA 12000 to 12000 0 83uA settings Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 voltage 10mV current 20pA Ambient
216. ence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Type QD75M Positioning Module User s Manual area shows the differences between 15075 0 and QD75MLI Buffer memory address A1SD75MLI QD75MLI Item of A1SD75MO Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Pr 1 Unit setting 0 150 300 0 150 300 No of pul ion AP 1 151 301 EA N Pr 2 No of pulses per rotation AP 3 153 303 2 152 302 4 154 304 Movement amount per rotation AL 5 155 305 Pr 4 Unit magnification AM 3 153 303 1 151 301 6 156 306 10 160 310 7 Speed limit value 7 157 307 11 161 311 PEN 8 158 308 12 162 312 Pr 8 Acceleration time 0 9 159 309 13 163 313 S 10 160 310 14 164 314 Pr 9 Deceleration time 0 11 161 311 15 165 315 12 162 312 6 156 306 Pr 10 Bias speed at start 13 163 313 7 157 307 Pr 12 Backlash compensation amount 15 165 315 17 167 317 13 Software stroke limit upper limit 16 166 316 18 168 318 value 17 167 317 19 169 319 Pr 14 Software stroke limit lower limit 18 168 318 20 170 320 value 19 169 319 21 171 321 Pr 15 Software stroke limit selection 20 170 320 22 172 322 Pr 16 Software stroke limit val
217. enerator operation The number of connectable manual pulse generators is changed from 1 generator axis to 1 generator module Axis operation status Step stopped is changed to Stopped and Step error occurring is changed to Error occurring Continuous path control e 15075 0 If the reference axis operates in reverse direction the control is internally changed into the continuous positioning control restart after deceleration stop QD75MLI Even if the reference axis operates in reverse direction with interpolation the control remains as the continuous path control In single axis operation the operation is the same as that of the ATSD75MLI Near pass For the continuous path control only the near pass function is available Path of positioning address pass is not conducted 2 axis interpolation 2 axis linear interpolation 2 axis fixed feed Circular interpolation The interpolation target axis can be randomly set with a positioning identifier Step function 1 Step stopped is changed to Stopped and Step error occurring is changed to Error occurring in the axis operations status parameters 2 The restart command for step start information 02H is deleted 3 The step operation is restarted with the restart command 8 26 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Changed function Command in position function Description The command in position width is expanded e
218. ensation accuracy Example Accuracy at the input range of 38 200 0 to 400 0 C the operating ambient temperature of 35 C and the temperature process value PV of 300 C Full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy 400 0 C 200 0 x 40 007 1 0 5 2 6 21 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Item Insulation output Specifications A1S62TCTT S2 A1S62TCTTBW S2 Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more Current sensor Heater disconnection detection specifications U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 6 P H Input accuracy Full scale x 1 0 Number of alert delay 3 to 255 Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connection terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 19A 0 28A Weight 0 2
219. ent feed value 101 101 102 102 Actual current value 103 103 Error code ERR 1 104 104 Error code ERR 2 105 105 106 116 Deviation counter value 107 1171 Monit 106 area Deviation counter value address 107 108 108 Movement amount after near point dog ON 109 109 Speed position switching command 110 110 Control mode 111 111 Zero gain execution status 112 Zero gain adjustment status 113 114 Feedrate 115 Record 0 Error code 120 Record 0 Error occurrence Year Month 121 f Record 0 Error occurrence Day Hour 122 Error history Record 0 Error occurrence Minute Second 123 Record 1 to 15 124 to 183 Error history pointer 184 4 A value of the same specification as A1SD70 is stored The buffer memory address name of the QD73A1 changes Deviation counter value pulse Deviation counter value pulse supports the QD73A1 whose serial number first five digits is 15042 or later 2 When electronic gear setting is 1 1 the value will be the same as Deviation counter value pulse 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 4 5 Interface specifications comparison with external devices For the external interface specifications the following shows the differences between the A1SD70 and the QD73A1 O Compatible A Partial change required Precautions for A1SD70 QD73A1 replacement An external power supply terminal block is not available Ex
220. ent value of FROMP HO Kt1 DO po Channel 1 from the buffer memory P DO K2 D100 Divide the 1 16000 data by two K1 MOVP D100 DO Transfer the divided data to the device App 6 3 Using the scaling function for example in the Q68AD G to change a resolution If the module after replacement for example the Q68AD G supports the scaling function a resolution can be changed using this function Condition a Resolution of an AnS series analog I O module 1 8000 Only one channel is used b Q series analog I O module Q68AD G Example of sequence program to set the function and read the scaling value Setting request condition B TOP HO K53 K1 K1 i HO K62 KO K1 HO K8000 K1 FROMP Enable the scaling function of Channel 1 Set the scaling lower limit value to 0 Set the scaling upper limit value to 8000 Present value read condition Read the scaling value of E34 Channel 1 from the buffer memory DO Buffer memory areas of the Q68AD G M Description Default Read Write 35H 53 Scaling enable disable setting OOFFy R W 364 54 CH1 Scaling value 0 37H 55 CH2 Scaling value 0 38H 56 CH3 Scaling value 0 39H 57 CH4 Scaling value 0 58 5 Scaling value 0 3By 59 CH6 Scaling value 0 3Cy 60 CH7 Scaling value 0 3Dy 61 CH8 Scaling value 0 3Ey 62 CH1 Scaling lower limit valu
221. er 38 58 78 98 Lower setting limiter 39 59 79 99 CT selection 3A 5A 9 Heater disconnection alert setting 3B 5B 7B 9B Loop disconnection detection judgment time 3C 5C 7 9C Loop disconnection detection dead band 3D 5D 7D 9D Unused channel setting 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE s Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Name Read write CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 0 Write data error code 1 2 3 4 Decimal point position 6 7 8 Alert definition 9 A B Temperature process value PV D E F 10 Manipulated value MV R 11 12 13 14 Temperature rise judgment flag 15 16 17 18 Transistor output flag 19 1A 1B 1 Set value SV monitor 1D Cold junction temperature process value 1E MAN mode shift completion flag 1F System area Use prohibited 20 40 60 80 Input range 21 41 61 81 Stop mode setting 22 42 62 82 Set value SV setting 23 43 63 83 Proportional band P setting 24 44 64 84 Integral time 1 setting 25 45 65 85 Derivative time D setting 26 46 66 86 Alert set value 1 27 47 67 87 Alert set value 2 28 48 68 88 Alert set value 3 29 49 69 89 Alert set value 4 2A 4A 6A 8A Upper limit output limiter 2B 4B 6B 8B Lower limit output limiter 2C 4 6 8 Output variation limiter setting R W 2D 4D 6D 8D Sensor correction value setting 2E 4E 6E 8E Adjustment sensitivity dead
222. er current process value R 108 to 10F CT input channel assignment setting 110 to 117 CT selection R W 118 to 11F Reference heater current value to 2B8 2B9 Temperature conversion setting R W to 2C0 2C1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc R to Manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another 2C4 2C5 R analog module to 2C8 2C9 Cooling transistor output flag R to 2CF Cooling method setting 2D0 2 0 Cooling proportional band Pc setting 2D1 2E1 Cooling upper limit output limiter R W 2D2 2E2 Cooling control output cycle setting 2D3 2E3 Overlap dead band setting HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 1 List of High Speed Counter Module Alternative Models for Replacement AnS QnAS series Transition to Q series Product Model Model Remarks Restrictions 1 External wiring Terminal block wiring Connector wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Counting speed Can be switched 200KPPS 100KPPS or 10KPPS 4 Counting range 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 QD62 Program does not need to be reviewed 5 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed 6 Performance specifications Not changed 7 Function specifications Limit switch output function Coincidence output function Two coincidence detection output points can be set 1 External wiring
223. er memory address Item of A1SD75MO A1SD75MO QD75MLI Cd 1 Clock data setting hour 1100 E Cd 2 Clock data setting minute 1101 second Cd 3 Clock data writing 1102 Cd 4 Target axis 1103 Cd 5 Positioning data No 1104 Cd 6 Write pattern 1105 Cd 7 Read write request 1106 Cd 8 Read write positioning data I F 1108 to 1137 p Cd 9 Flash ROM write request 1138 1900 Cd 10 Parameter initialization request 1139 1901 Cd 11 Positioning start No 1150 1200 1250 1500 1600 1700 12 Axis error reset 1151 1201 1251 1502 1602 1702 Cd 13 Restart command 1152 1202 1252 1503 1603 1703 14 M code OFF request 1153 1203 1253 1504 1604 1704 N 1154 1204 1254 1506 1606 1706 New current value 1155 1205 1255 1507 1607 1707 N 1156 1206 1256 1514 1614 1714 GEIB New speedivalue 1157 1207 1257 1515 1615 1715 Cd 17 Speed change request 1158 1208 1258 1516 1616 1716 Cd 18 Positioning operation speed override 1159 1209 1259 1513 1613 1713 m 1160 1210 1260 1518 1618 1718 1161 1211 1261 1519 1619 1719 20 Speed position switching enable 1163 1213 1263 1528 1628 1728 flag Cd 21 Speed position switching control 1164 121
224. er to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A1S62RD4N Q64RD G Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO WDT error flag YO X1 READY flag Y1 X2 Write data error flag Y X disconnection detected X3 Y3 flag CH1 and CH2 4 Y4 X5 5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 Use prohibited 8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE YE Use prohibited XF YF X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Use prohibited X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F gt Device Signal name Signal name No Module ready YO Use prohibited CH1 Offset gain setting Y1 CH1 Offset setting status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset gain setting Y3 CH2 Offset setting status signal request CHA Offset gain setting Y4 CH2 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset setting Y5 request U hibited Y6 CH3 Gain setting request se prohibite Pa CH4 Offset setting Y7 request Y8 CH4 Gain setting request Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion signal setting request Offset gain setting mode YA Userrange write request status flag Use prohibited YB Disconnection detection signal
225. eration speed control 1 An error occurs when the command frequency value calculated from the speed limit value exceeds the maximum command frequency of the positioning module being used 2 Only two word type 1 to 8388608ms can be used as the setting value for the acceleration deceleration time Stop process and restart after stop positioning operation stop 1 Peripheral side emergency stop is deleted from the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop selection Test mode fault in the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection is changed to be in the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop selection 2 Stop QD75 peripheral is added to the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection 3 Error code 100 Peripheral device stop during operation is deleted 4 Programmable controller CPU error occurrence is added to the stop causes of Stop group 2 Sudden Stop selection READY signal A1SDT75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN OFF Normal READY Not READY WDT error ON Not READY WDT error Normal READY Manual pulse generator operation The number of connectable manual pulse generators is changed from 1 generator axis to 1 generator module Axis operation status Step stopped is changed to Stopped and Step error occurring is changed to Error occurring Continuous path control ATSD75PLI S3 If the reference axis operates in reverse direction the control is
226. erformance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE AnS QnAS series Product Heating cooling temperature control module Temperature control module Transition to Q series Model Remark Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed A1S64TCTRTBW 2 Number of slots Changed 2 slots are required I O assignment Platinum 16 empty points for the first half 16 intelligent points for the second half resistance AGATE R TENNIN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals thermometer and buffer memory addresses are changed standard control 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 1 External wiring Cable size is changed oe 2 Number of slots Changed 2 slots are required I O assignment Platinum 16 empty points for the first half 16 intelligent resistance points for the second half thermometer Q4 TCRTBWN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals heating cooling E and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Not changed iiis 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 1 External wiring Cable size is changed A1S64TCTT S1 2 Number of slots Not changed Thermocouple Q64TCTTN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I
227. ersion enable disable 1 CH1 digital value R W 1 CH1 Digital value 2 CH2 digital value 2 CH2 Digital value R W 3 3 CH3 Digital value 4 4 CH4 Digital value 5 m 5 6 System area Use prohibited 6 7 7 8 8 System area Use prohibited 9 Resolution of digital value 9 10 CH1 set value check code R W 11 CH2 set value check code 11 CH1 Set value check code 12 12 CH2 Set value check code R 13 13 CH3 Set value check code 14 5 14 Set value check code 15 System area Use prohibited 16 17 System area Use prohibited Error code R Setting range CH1 to CH4 System area Prohibited Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Offset gain setting mode Gain specification R W Offset gain adjustment value specification System area Use prohibited Mode switching setting R W System area Use prohibited Pass data classification setting R W System area Use prohibited CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value Industrial shipment settings offset value Industrial shipment settings gain value CH1 User range settings offset value CH1 User range settings gain value R W CH4 User range settings offset value User range settings gain value 3 16 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 4 A1S68DAI 3 4 1 Performance specificati
228. esses for the positioning address positioning speed and positioning pattern differ from those of the A1SD70 Speed position control switch mode speed control operation ATSD70 For Velocity position axis travel distance change area the value is reflected during speed control Setting value 0 to 2147483647 valid within the stroke range QD73A1 For New speed position movement amount the value is cleared to 0 when the next operation starts and reflected when Speed position switching command signal is turned on Setting value 1 to 2147483647 valid within the stroke range Speed change function A1SD70 The speed change is requested by writing a new speed value in Velocity change area of the buffer memory QD73A1 The speed change is requested by writing a new speed value in the buffer memory and writing 1 to Speed change request buffer memory address 91 To use the speed change function an additional program is required 1 Current value change function A1SD70 The current value is changed by writing a new address in Present value change area of the buffer memory QD73A1 The current value is changed by writing a new address in New current value of the buffer memory and writing 1 to Current value change request buffer memory address 90 Zero gain adjustment A1SD70 The adjustment is performed using the volumes for zero gain adjustment QD73A1 The adjustment is performed by either of follo
229. et for the temperature sensor to be used ON OFF pulse 10 to 30VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common 0 4A 10ms O 0 1mA or less O 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less O Max 101 times number of read write from to a non volatile memory 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method only when it is not affected by noise Accuracy C full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy Example Accuracy at the input range of 38 200 0 to 400 0 C the operating ambient temperature of 35 C and the temperature process value PV of 300 C Full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy 400 0 200 0 C x 0 007 1 0 5 2 C 6 9 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Item Insulation method Specifications A1S64TCTRT A1S64TCTRTBW Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation Between input channels Transformer insulation Dielectric withstand voltage Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more Current sensor Heater disconnection detection specification
230. evice Signal name No No No No X0 Y0 X0 Module ready Y0 Use prohibited X1 Y1 x1 CH1 Logging hold flag Y1 CH1 Logging hold request x2 Y2 2 CH2 Logging hold flag Y2 CH2 Logging hold request X3 Y3 CH3 Logging hold flag Y3 CH3 Logging hold request X4 Y4 X4 CH4 Logging hold flag Y4 CH4 Logging hold request X5 Y5 x5 Use prohibited EM CHS Output enable disable flag xo CH3 digital output value nm CH1 digital value setting 5 External power ott mem x v7 x Input signal error detection signal High resolution mode i pronipNEG X8 Y8 X8 Y8 status flag X9 Y9 x9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion flag setting request XA YA XA YA xB YB XB Use prohibited YB Use prohibited XC YC XC YC Maximum And minimum Maximum and minimum XD YD XD values reset completion YD Usage disable flag values reset request pega disable A D conversion completed XE Use prohibited flag XF DIA conversion value XF Error flag Error clear request output enable flag X10 Y10 vM 22 12 Y12 XE VE EE cm Y14 X15 A Y15 34 CHA digital output value CH2 digital value setting X16 Y16 17 Xt8 Y18 Xt9 Y19 XA Y1B X1C Y1C XD Y1D Usage disable XE Usage disable Y1E X1F CH2 D A conversion value output enable flag 4 25 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT A1S66ADA Device Device Signal name Sign
231. f alert delay 3 to 255 Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connection terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 33A 0 19A 2 0 39A 0 25A 2 Weight 0 26kg 0 28kg External dimensions 34 5 W x 130 H x 93 6 D mm 2 Current value when the temperature conversion function is not used in an unused channel under heating cooling control 1 List of thermocouple type temperature measurement range and resolution Thermocouple type Temperature Temperature Resolution Resolution measurement range measurement range R 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 1 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 1 0 to 2400 0 to 1300 K 200 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 500 0 0 0 to 800 0 0 to 500 0 to 1000 0 to 800 1 0 to 1600 1 J 0 to 1200 0 to 2100 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 500 0 0 1 0 0 to 1000 0 0 1 0 0 to 800 0 200 to 400 200 to 200 1 0 to 700 1 T 0 to 200 300 to 400 0 to 400 200 0 to 400 0 0 1 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 0 0 to 400 0 To the next page 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible WOIIQUU UI IuIIII Specifications Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement
232. fication 1 CH1 Average time average number of times 2 CH1 Average time count RIW 2 CH2 Average time average number of times R W 9 CH2 Average time count 3 CH3 Average time average number of times 4 CH3 Average time count 4 CH4 Average time average number of times 5 CHA Average time count 5 System area Use prohibited 8 System area Use prohibited 8 9 9 Averaging processing setting R W 10 CH1 Digital output value 10 A D conversion completed flag 11 CH2 Digital output value R 11 CH1 Digital output value 12 CH3 Digital output value 12 CH2 Digital output value R 13 CHA Digital output value 13 CH3 Digital output value 14 CH4 Digital output value System area Use prohibited 17 System area Use prohibited 18 Write data error code R 19 A D conversion completed flag 19 Error code R 20 Resolution setting 20 Setting range CH1 to CH4 21 System area Use prohibited 22 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification RAW 23 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 24 to 29 System area Use prohibited 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 CH1 Minimum value 32 CH2 Maximum value 33 CH2 Minimum value R 34 CH3 Maximum value 35 CH3 Minimum value 36 CH4 Maximum value 3 CH4 Minimum value 38 to 157 System area Use prohibited 158 m Mode switching setting R W System area Use prohibited Pass data classification setting R W System area Use prohibited CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain
233. g B0 CT monitor method switching B1 B2 B3 B4 Control output monitor R B5 System area Use prohibited B6 Cold junction temperature compensation selection R W B7 Control switching monitor R Point Default values for A series modules and Q series modules may be different To apply an A series program using a default value to a Q series module review the program For details refer to the user s manual for the Q series module used 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Address hexadecimal wri 3E 5 9 E PROM s PID constants read instruction RW 3F 5F 7F 9F Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants A0 1 m A2 System area Use prohibited 4 Alert dead band setting A5 Number of alert delay AG Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count AT Temperature rise completion range setting RAN A8 Temperature rise completion soak time setting A9 PID continuation flag AA Heater disconnection correction function selection AB AC AD AE System area Use prohibited AF Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting RIW BO CT monitor method switching B1 B2 B3 B4 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module R Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another B5
234. ge Output signal Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used ON OFF pulse Rated load voltage 10 2 to 30VDC peak voltage 30 0V Max load current 0 1A point 0 4A common Max inrush current 0 4A 10ms Transistor output Leakage current at OFF 0 1mA or less Max voltage drop at ON 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A Response time OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less Number of writes to E7PROM 6 8 Max 1012 times number of FeRAM read write 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Transistor output Standard control 4 channels module Heating cooling control 2 channels module Refer to Section 6 2 2 1 Ambient temperature 25 5 Full scale x 0 3 u Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Full scale x 0 7 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used 1 to 100s O 1MQ 0 to 100s O 50 00 to 50 00 O Upscale processing O PID ON OFF pulse or two position control O Standard control Can be set by auto tuning or self tuning Heating cooling control Can be set by auto tuning 0 0 to 1000 0 0 to 3600s 0 to 3600s O Within the temperature range s
235. ge Resolution After Analog I O Module is Replaced This section describes how to change the resolution of an analog I O module after the module is replaced from AnS series to Q series 1 Resolution of AnS series and Q series analog I O modules Each AnS series analog I O module have different resolutions Please check the resolution of the module in this handbook or user s manual If the resolution differs between AnS series and Q series modules it needs to be matched by a user by creating a sequence program or changing user range settings O Measure required by user A Measure not required by user Resolution of Q series analog module Resolution of AnS series Normal resolution High resolution mode User range Voltage 1 12000 analog I O module 1 4000 _ _ _ 1 8000 A A AC 1 12000 _ A 1 Change the resolution in a sequence program Refer to Appendix 3 2 2 Set a user range in high resolution mode 2 Example of sequence program to change a resolution Condition a Resolution of an AnS series analog I O module 1 8000 b Device that stores a present value read from the analog I O module DO c Device that is used for resolution change operation D100 D101 Two four word data is used the four arithmetic operations instruction Use unused device areas so that existing device data are not affected by this operation Present value read condition Read the pres
236. here is not a sufficient space The following figure shows the wiring method for using the connector terminal block converter module Terminal Terminal number on symbol on Signal name N connector terminal side block side A phase pulse input 24V A phase pulse input 12V B20 0 A phase pulse input 5V 19 11 r3 z ruse ABCOM B19 1 phase pulse input 24V 18 12 phase pulse input 12 B18 2 B phase pulse input 5V 17 13 CH1 Preset input 24V B17 3 Preset input 12V A16 14 Preset input 5V B16 4 CTRRCOM gt Af 157 Funcionstat2 tV B5 5 Function start 12V a4 16 FuncionsatSV B4 6 Cable EQU coincidence output point No A06 1E pezo ACOSTB aumurnamPNea DO ROGET ACAOTB EQU coincidence output point No 2 B06 E AC20TB A phase pulse input 24V A13 17 A phase pulse input 12V B13 7 AC50TB A phase pulseinput5V a2 48 AC80TB B2 8 AC100TB ee n B phase pulse input 24V A11 19 B phase pulse input 12V Bf 9 Connector terminal block converter module AGTBXY36 B phase pulse input 5V A10 1A g CH2 Preset input 24V B10 A Preset input 12V A09 1B Preset input 5V B09 B CTRLCOM 1 Function start 24V B08 C Function start 12
237. ht 0 25kg 0 11kg HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Comparison between A1SD62E and QD62E O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for Item A1SD62E QD62E ibility replacement 32 points 16 points The number of occupied I O Number of occupied I O points I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelligent 16 A points has changed to 16 points points points Number of channels 2 channels O Set the counting speed of 200K 100K 10K the QD62E with the Counting speed switch settings 100K 10K 100K to 10K to 10KPPS O intelligent function module 200KPPS 100KPPS or less switch setting of GX Developer Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input O Count input 5VDC Signal level signal 12VDC 2to5mA 9B 24VDC 1 phase x 100KPPS 10KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS Counting input speed Max 2 phase input 100KPPS 7KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS inpu Since the QD62E uses 32 Counting 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary bit signed binary values range 0 to 16 777 215 2147483648 to 2147483647 Sequence program needs to be changed Type UP DOWN preset counter ring counter function O Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 200KPPS 2505 Unit ws Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 1 25us Counter 10 100KPPS
238. ications Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Transistor output O 4 channels module Refer to Section 6 2 3 1 Ambient temperature 25 5 Full scale x 0 3 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Full scale x 0 7 Within 1 0 C 1 Within 2 0 C 1 Within 3 0 C 1 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used 1 to 100s 1MO 0 to 100s 50 00 to 50 00 Upscale processing PID ON OFF pulse or two position control OO O O O OO Can be set by auto tuning or self tuning 0 0 to 1000 0 0 to 3600s 0 to 3600s Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used ON OFF pulse 10 to 30VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common 0 4A 10ms O 0 1mA or less 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less Max 1012 times number of read write from to a non volatile memory 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method only when it is not affected by noise Accuracy C full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy Example Accuracy at the input range of 38 200 0 to 400 0 C the operating ambient temperature of 35 C and the temperature process value PV of 300 C Full scale x indication accuracy
239. id invalid 21 171 321 23 173 323 setting 7 22 172 322 24 174 324 17 Command in position width 23 173 323 25 175 325 18 Torque limit setting value 24 174 324 26 176 326 Pr 19 M code ON signal output timing 25 175 325 27 177 327 Pr 20 Speed switching mode 26 176 326 28 178 328 Pr 21 Interpolation speed designation 27 177 327 29 179 329 method 22 Current feed value during speed 28 178 328 30 180 330 control Pr 23 Manual pulse generator selection 29 179 329 33 Pr 25 Size selection for acceleration 31 181 331 _ deceleration time Speed position function selection 34 184 334 TM 36 186 336 36 186 336 Pr 26 Acceleration time 1 37 187 337 37 487 337 NOE 38 188 338 38 188 338 Pr 27 Acceleration time 2 39 189 339 39 489 339 uc imnes 40 190 340 40 190 340 Pr 28 Acceleration time 41 191 341 41 191 341 8 29 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of A1SD75MO A1SD75MO QD75MO nese ae 1 42 192 342 42 192 342 Pr 29 Deceleration time 43 193 343 43 193 343 nm 44 194 344 44 194 344 Pr 30 Deceleration time 45 195 345 45 195 345 NE 46 196 346 46 196 346 Pr 31 Deceleration time AT 197 347 47 197 347 J
240. ill be updated after Synchronous output request YD is set to ON and the time specified as programmable controller CPU processing time 120us has elapsed However the analog output will be fixed to CH1 and other channels CH2 to CH8 cannot be used When the module is mounted on a remote I O station the analog output will not be synchronized because of a link scan delay if the synchronous output function is specified 1 On Q68DAIN the setting of HOLD CLEAR is carried out for each channel 2 For the Q68DAIN the status is set with the intelligent Holds an analog value that was output when the function module switch Analog output HOLD x programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status setting of GX Developer CLEAR function error occurs 3 Check the execution status of output referring to the Analog output status combination list in the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual Analog output test while the programmable Enable Disable isi Settin controller CPU is in the m CHO Output STOP status enable disable Enable Disable Enable Disable flag Not Analog output test Allowed Not allowed allowed Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status Resolution mode The resolution can be switched according to the appli
241. imiter R W 2D2 2E2 Cooling control output cycle setting 2D3 2E3 Overlap dead band setting 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 5 3 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 and Q series modules m a Name Read write CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 0 Write data error code R W 1 2 3 4 Decimal point position 5 6 7 8 Alert details 9 A B Temperature process value PV D E F 10 Manipulation value MV 11 12 13 14 Increased temperature determination flag R 15 16 17 18 Transistor output flag 19 1A 1B 1C Heater current process value 1D Cooling contact temperature process value 1E Switch to manual mode completion flag 1F System area Use prohibited 20 40 60 80 Input range 21 41 61 81 Stop mode setting 22 42 62 82 Set value SV setting 23 43 63 83 Proportional band P setting 24 44 64 84 Integral time I setting 25 45 65 85 Derivative time D setting 26 46 66 86 Alert alarm 1 set value 27 47 67 87 Alert alarm 2 set value 28 48 68 88 Alert alarm 3 set value 29 49 69 89 Alert alarm 4 set value 2A 4A 6A 8A Upper output limiter 2B 4B 6B 8B Lower output limiter 2C 4 6 8 Output variation limiter 2D 4D 6D 8D Sensor compensation value setting 2E 4E 6E 8E Adjustment sensitivity blind section setting RIW 2F 4F 6F 8F Control output period setting 30 50 70 90 First order delay digital filter
242. ing in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the publi
243. ing to the CC Link LT or AnyWire DB A20 system Shifting to the CC Link LT system MELSEC I O Link remote I O system A1SJ51T64 Refer to the Transition from MELSEC I OLINK to CC Link master module LT Handbook L 08062ENG Shifting to the AnyWire DB A20 system Refer to the Transition from MELSEC I OLINK to AnyWire DB A20 Handbook L 08263ENG AS i master module A1SJ71AS92 Replace the module with the AS i master module QJ71AS92 Create a file register in a memory card or the standard RAM and use it as a substitute Replace the module with the QG60 and set I O assignment in parameter Memory card interface module A1SD59J S2 Dummy module A1SG62 1 REPLACEMENT OF OTHER MODULES Memo 10 2 1 1 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 1 1 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS 11 1External Dimensions For external dimensions of modules described in this handbook refer to the user s manual for each module For external dimensions of base units refer to the following Transition target Handbook Manual number Transition from MELSEC A QnA Large Type Series to Q Series Handbook Fundamentals L 08043ENG Transition from MELSEC AnS QnAS Small Type Series to Q Series L 08219ENG x Handbook Fundamentals 11 4 1 1 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS Memo 11 2 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Spare Parts Storage 1 The general specifications of programmable controllers are as follows Please do not
244. ints has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 2 x Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used Recalculation of internal current 0 50A A consumption 5VDC is required 0 25kg 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method Accuracy 7 Conversion accuracy Temperature characteristics x Operating ambient temperature variation Cold junction compensation accuracy An operating ambient temperature variation indicates a deviation of the operating ambient temperature from the 25 5 C range 5 4 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Applicable thermocouple and measured temperature range accuracy A1S68TD Measured Par JIS Conversion accuracy at 25 0 5 C Temperature characteristics temperature range B 800 to 1700 C 2 5 0 4 R 300 to 1600 C 2 C 0 3 s 300 to 1600 C 2 C 0 3 Larger value of 0 5 or 0 25 of Larger value of 0 07 C or 0 02 of K 0 to 1200 C measured temperature measured temperature 0 to 800 C Larger value of 0 5 or 0 25 of Larger value of 0 07 C or 0 02 of measured temperature measured temperature J 0 to 750 C Larger value of 0 5 or 0 25 of Larger value of 0 07 C or 0 02 of measured temperature measured temperature Larger value of 0 5 or 0 25 of Larger value of 0 07 C or 0 02 of 0 to 350 C
245. ion delay count R W A7 Temperature rise completion range setting A8 Temperature rise completion soak time setting A9 PID continuation flag AA Heater voltage compensation setting AB AC Heater current reference value AF Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting BO CT monitor method switching B1 B2 Heating control output monitor R to B6 Cold junction temperature compensation selection R W B7 Control switching monitor R B8 B9 Temperature conversion setting R W to co C1 Manipulated value for cooling MV C2 C3 Cooling control output monitor R C4 C5 Cooling transistor output flag to CF Cooling type setting DO EO Cooling proportional band Pc setting D1 E1 Cooling upper output limiter R W D2 E2 Cooling control output period setting D3 E3 Overlap dead band Point Default values for A series modules and Q series modules may be different To apply an A series program using a default value to a Q series module review the program For details refer to the user s manual for the Q series module used 6 44 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Address hexadecimal NE Readiwrite wri 3E 5E E PROM s PID constants read instruction RW 3F 5F Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants AO 1 oe A2 System area Use prohib
246. ion internal current i 0 25A 0 38A A E 5VDC consumption 5VDC is required Weight 0 25kg 0 12kg HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 Comparison between A1SD62D S1 and QD62D A1SD62D S1 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for replacement The number of 32 points Number of occupied I O 16 points occupied I O points S pd I O assignment special 32 P n po points oints I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 i points Number of channels 2 channels Set the counting d of the QD62D 500K 200K 100K 10K Counting speed switch with the intelligent 200K 10K 200K to 100K to 10K to 10KPPS settings function module 500KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS or less switch setting of GX Developer Count Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input input Signal level EIA Standard RS 422 A Differential line driver level signal oA B AM26LS31 manufactured by Texas Instruments or equivalent 1 phase 200KPPS 10KPPS Counting input d M rpm 500KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS speed Max 2 phase bbs 7KPPS input Since the QD62D 32 bit signed Counting 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary Mii binary values range 0 to 16 777 215 2147483648 to 2147483647 sequence program needs to be changed Type UP DOWN preset co
247. ions In an output module when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as a fuse Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply If the external power supply is turned on first an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to relevant manuals for each network Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction When changing data of the running programmable controller from a peripheral connected to the CPU module or from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module or special function module configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For program modification and operating status change read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the sequence program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external devic
248. is 1 BUSY X04 Axis 2 Stop Y14 Y05 Axis 2 BUSY X05 X0D Axis 3 Stop Y1C Y06 Axis 3 BUSY X06 X0E Axis 4 Stop Y07 Axis 4 BUSY X0F Axis 1 Forward run JOG start Y16 Y08 Axis 1 Positioning complete X07 X14 Axis 1 Reverse run JOG start Y17 Y09 Axis 2 Positioning complete X08 X15 Axis 2 Forward run JOG start Y18 Y0A Axis 3 Positioning complete X09 X16 Axis 2 Reverse run JOG start Y19 Y0B Axis 4 Positioning complete X17 Axis 3 Forward run JOG start 1 YOC Axis 1 Error detection X0A X08 Axis 3 Reverse run JOG start Y1B YOD Axis 2 Error detection X0B X09 Axis 4 Forward run JOG start YOE Axis 3 Error detection X0C Axis 4 Reverse run JOG start YOF Axis 4 Error detection X0B Programmable controller READY Y1D YOO Axis 1 M code ON 4 Axis 1 Execution prohibition flag Y14 Axis 2 M code ON X05 Axis 2 Execution prohibition flag Y15 Axis 3 M code ON XOF X06 Axis 3 Execution prohibition flag Y16 Axis 4 M code ON X07 Axis 4 Execution prohibition flag Y17 Synchronization flag X01 X02 Use prohibited Use prohibited X10 to X1F Y1E to Y1F Y18 to Y1F X18 to X1F The ON OFF status for READY is different between the QD75PLIN QD75DLIN and A1SD75PLI S3 NotREADY WDTerror QD75PLIN OFF ON QD75DLIN A1SDT75PLI S3 ON OFF 8 1 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer mem
249. is 4 Start complete X13 Axis 1 Stop Y13 Y04 Axis 1 BUSY X04 Axis 2 Stop Y14 YO5 Axis 2 BUSY X05 Axis 3 Stop Y1C Y06 Axis 3 BUSY X06 X0E Axis 4 Stop Y07 Axis 4 BUSY X0F All axes servo ON Y15 Y01 Axis 1 Positioning complete X07 X14 Axis 1 Forward run JOG start Y16 Y08 Axis 2 Positioning complete X08 X15 Axis 1 Reverse run JOG start Y17 Y09 Axis 3 Positioning complete X09 X16 Axis 2 Forward run JOG start Y18 Y0A Axis 4 Positioning complete X17 Axis 2 Reverse run JOG start Y19 Y0B Axis 1 Error detection X0A X08 Axis 3 Forward run JOG start Y1A YOC Axis 2 Error detection X0B X09 Axis 3 Reverse run JOG start Y1B YOD Axis 3 Error detection X0C X0A Axis 4 Forward run JOG start YOE Axis 4 Error detection X0B Axis 4 Reverse run JOG start YOF Axis 1 M code ON X0D X04 Programmable controller READY Y1D YOO Axis 2 M code ON X05 Axis 1 Execution prohibition flag Y14 Axis 3 M code ON XOF X06 Axis 2 Execution prohibition flag Y15 Axis 4 M code ON X07 Axis 3 Execution prohibition flag Y16 Synchronization flag X01 Axis 4 Execution prohibition flag Y17 X02 X03 ae to YOF Y02 Y03 Use prohibited X10 to X1F Use prohibited X18 to X1F Y1E to Y1F Y18 to Y1F The ON OFF status for READY is different between the QD75MLI and A1SD75MLI Not READY WDT error READY QD75MH OFF ON 15075 0 ON OFF 8 28 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequ
250. isabled state The output with D A output function Allows specifying whether to output D A conversion values or disabled differs each other offset values for each channel The conversion speed remains constant irrespective of the output enabled disabled state Range switching function Allows selection of the range to be used Analog output HOLD CLEAR Allows setting whether to hold HOLD or clear CLEAR analog EM output values depending on the CPU module operating status RUN STOP or a stop error Outputs the analog value converted from a digital value when lvo CPU CHO Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the CPU module is in the STOP status Setting the same scaling upper Performs scale conversion on digital input values within a limit value and scaling lower specified range between a D A conversion scaling upper limit limit value as those of Scaling function value and a D A conversion scaling lower limit value This resolution mode of the function reduces the time and effort to create a program of the A1S66ADA allows use of the scale conversion same digital output values as in the A1S66ADA Outputs a warning when a digital output value is out of the _ preset range MOV Takes in the waveform data prepared beforehand digital input _ o value and performs analog output at the set conversion cycle 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Common functions Avai
251. isconnection 148 R W detection 149 System area Use prohibited 150 CH1 Conversion setting value for L 151 disconnection detection H to CH4 Conversion setting value for L 157 disconnection detection H Mode switching setting L R W 161 3 wire type CH1 Factory default offset value L 4 wire type 4 User range settings gain resistance value 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 5 32 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 5 A1S62RD3N Replacing with the Q64RD G 5 5 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S62RD3N Measuring method 3 wire type 16 bit signed binary 1800 to 6000 Value up to the first decimal place 10 conversion Output Valle 32 bit signed binary 180000 to 600000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 Scaling value Pt100 gt JIS C1604 1997 IEC 751 am2 JIS C1604 1989 DIN 43760 1980 Applicable RTD JPt100 JIS C1604 1981 180 to 600 C Pt100 Measured 27 10 to 313 71Q t t 180 to 600 C emperature JPt100 25 80 to 317 28Q Ni100 1 Accuracy accuracy at full scale Resolution 0 025 C Conversion speed 40ms channel Analog input points 2 channels module Output current for temperature detection 1 Isolation method Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply photocoupler is
252. it signed binary O As the compliance standards for the applicable platinum A RTD differ change the platinum RTD to the one that can be used with the Q64RD Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 IEC751 1983 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 200 to 850 C O 180 to 600 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 25 accuracy relative to maximum value Ambient temperature 25 5 0 08 accuracy relative to maximum value 0 025 C O 40ms channel O 4 channels module O 1mA O Isolated area Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Betwi lati RTD input E Photocoupler 1780VACrms 3 cycles iono pog isolation Altitude 2000m Poore using power supply 500VDC insulation Between platinum RTD input Not isolated resistance tester channels Detected per channel The number of occupied I O 16 points h A points has changed to 16 I O assignment intelligent 16 points points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm x Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used 5 44 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Cable between module and platinum RTD A1S62RD4N Set the total resistance value of a conductor where the current runs to 70Q or less Example Pt100 is connected to CH1 and CH2 CH1 Pt100 CH2 Pt100 Wire 1 4D a1 A1 B
253. ited A4 Alert dead band setting A5 Number of alert delay o Heater disconnection output off time current error detection delay count R W AT Temperature rise completion range setting A8 Temperature rise completion soak time setting A9 PID continuation flag AA Heater disconnection correction function selection AB AC System area Use prohibited AF Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting RIW BO CT monitor method switching B1 B2 Manipulated value of heating MVh for output with another R analog module B5 Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module R W B6 Cold junction temperature compensation selection B7 Control switching monitor R B8 B9 Auto tuning mode selection R W BC to BF System area Use prohibited co DO Alert 1 mode setting C1 D1 Alert 2 mode setting RW C2 D2 Alert 3 mode setting C3 D3 Alert 4 mode setting C4 to CF D4 to DF System area Use prohibited 100 to 107 Heater current process value R 108 to 10F CT input channel assignment setting 110 to 117 CT selection R W 118 to 11F Reference heater current value to 2B8 2B9 Temperature conversion setting R W to System area Use prohibited 2C0 2C1 Manipulated value for cooling MVc R to Manipulated value of cooling MVc for output with another 2C4 2C5 R analog module to 2C8 2C9 Cooling transistor output flag R to 2CF Cooling method setting 2D0 2E0 Cooling proportional band Pc setting 2D1 2E1 Cooling upper limit output l
254. ive time D setting 26 46 66 86 Alert set value 1 27 47 67 87 Alert set value 2 28 48 68 88 Alert set value 3 29 49 69 89 Alert set value 4 2A 4A 6A 8A Upper limit output limiter 2B 4B 6B 8B Lower limit output limiter 2C 4 6 8 Output variation limiter setting R W 2D 4D 6D 8D Sensor correction value setting 2E 4E 6E 8E Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 2F 4F 6F 8F Control output cycle setting 30 50 70 90 Primary delay digital filter setting 31 51 71 91 Control response parameter 32 52 72 92 AUTO MAN mode shift 33 53 73 93 MAN output setting 34 54 74 94 Setting change rate limiter 35 55 75 95 AT bias 36 56 76 96 Forward reverse action setting 37 57 77 97 Upper limit setting limiter 38 58 78 98 Lower limit setting limiter 39 59 79 99 System area Use prohibited 3A 5A 9 Heater disconnection alert setting 3B 5B 7B 9B Loop disconnection detection judgment time RW 3C 5C 7C 9C Loop disconnection detection dead band 3D 5D 7D 9D Unused channel setting 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 48 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 Address hexadecimal CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Name Read write 3E 5E 9 m System area Use prohibited 3F 5F TF 9F AO Alert alarm 1 mode setting A1 Alert alarm 2 mode setting A2 Alert alarm 3 mode setting A3 Alert alarm 4 mode setting A4 Alert blind section setting A5 Number of alert de
255. l Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal 5 23 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A 2 53 V2 YS3A 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD Compatibility Precautions for replacement 3 4 wire type O 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 200000 to 850000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 16 bit signed binary O As the compliance standards Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 IEC 751 1983 for the applicable platinum JPt100 A RTD differ change the platinum RTD to the one that JIS C 1604 1981 can be used with the Q64RD 200 to 850 C 180 to 600 C Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 25 accuracy relative to maximum value Ambient temperature 25 5 0 08 accuracy relative to maximum value 0 025 C O 40ms channel O 4 channels module O 1 O Isolated area Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Bet lati RTD input SISET P ANUN p Photocoupler 1780VACrms 3 cycles and programmable 10MQ or more using isolation Altitude 2000m h controller power supply 500VDC insulation Betwee
256. l and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20 or more Between external power supply and analog output 500VDC 20MQ or more The number of occupied I O 16 points A points has changed to 16 I O assignment intelligent 16 points points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm x FG terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Wiring change is required Terminals other than FG R1 25 3 x Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used 0 38A 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less External power supply 0 27A 24VDC is required 2 5A 230us or less 0 20kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 4 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available 1568 Q68 Item Description DAI DAIN Precautions for replacement On Q68DAIN by disabling the D A conversion enable disable function Specifies whether to enable or disable the D A conversion for each channel D A conversion for the channels that are not used the conversion speed can be shortened D A output enable disable function Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or the offset value for each channel The conversion speed stays constant regardless of whether D A output is enabled or disabled Synchronous output function Obtains analog output synchronized with the programmable controller CPU The analog output w
257. lable Not available Item Description A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA Precautions for replacement poser uy READY Turns on when the external power supply 24VDC is supplied If fla external power supply READY flag X7 is off A D conversion and D A conversion are not performed Records to the 16 errors and alarms that have occurred the Q64AD2DA storing them into the buffer memory Collects errors and alarms that have occurred the Q64AD2DA E into the CPU module o A Allows error clear through the system monitor at the occurrence Can be used by using GX Error clear function z of an error Works2 Saving restoring offset gain Makes it possible to save and restore the offset gain values of values the user range setting o Corrects errors in analog output values and digital output values Online module change Allows module replacement without stopping the system 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 3 3 signal comparison Because the I O signals differ between the modules the sequence program needs to be changed For details on the I O signals and the sequence program refer to Analog Input Output Module User s Manual Q64AD2DA A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA Device Signal name Device Signal name Device Signal name D
258. lays A6 Number of delays for heater disconnection current error detection when output is turned off R W AT Temperature increase complete range setting A8 Temperature increase complete soak time setting A9 PID continue flag AA Heater voltage compensation function setting AB AC AD AE Standard heater current value AF Transistor output monitor on delay time setting B0 CT monitor method switch B1 B2 B3 B4 Manipulation value MV 0 to 4000 R B5 System area Use prohibited Cold junction temperature compensation selection B6 This area can be used with the software version F or R W later 1 For the A1S64TCRT BW S1 this area is prohibited to use 3 Point Default values for A series modules and Q series modules may be different To apply an A series program using a default value to a Q series module review the program For details refer to the user s manual for the Q series module used 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTIN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Address hexadecimal Name Read write CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 3E 5E 9 E PROM s PID constants read instruction RW 3F 5F 7F 9F Automatic backup setting after auto tuning of PID constants AO 1 A2 System area Use prohibited A3 A4 Alert dead band setting A5 Number of alert delay AG Heater disconnection o
259. le When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction When using an extension cable connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely Check the connection for looseness Poor contact may cause incorrect input or output When using a memory card fully insert it into the memory card slot Check that it is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product A module can be replaced online while power is on on MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant sections in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection and in the manual for the corresponding module Do not directly touch any conductive part of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions NWARNING
260. le between module and RTD Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight 0 27kg 0 49A 5 35 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conductor resistance value must meet the condition of 1 2 lt 2kO or less When a 3 wire type Pt100 is connected the difference between 1 and 2 in the conductor resistance value must be 100 or less Q64RD G Wire 2 N A1 Pt100 a B1 b1 1 SLD Wire Q64RD G a1 2 Al Pt100 lt B1 b1 SLD Recalculation of internal current 0 62A consumption 5VDC is required 0 20kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 5 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Item Description A1S62RD3N Q64RD G Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enables disables a detection of Sd specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Check the specifications selection specified method referring to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual Detected temperature value Stores temperature data in the buffer storage memory 5 Detects disconnection of the connected
261. le disable setting R W 48 Warning output flag 49 Disconnection detection flag 50 to 53 CH1 to CH4 Scaling value 54 CH1 Measured temperature value L R 55 32bit H to 60 CH4 Measured temperature value L 61 32bit H 62 L CH1 Scaling range lower limit value 63 H 64 L CH1 Scaling range upper limit value 65 H to 76 m L Scaling range upper limit value 77 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value to 85 CH4 Scaling width upper limit value 86 CH1 Warning output lower lower limit L 87 value H 88 CH1 Warning output lower upper limit L 89 H value u H RIW 90 CH1 Warning output upper lower limit L 91 value H 92 CH1 Warning output upper upper limit L 93 value H to 116 CH4 Warning output upper upper limit L 117 value H 118 L CH1 Offset temperature set valuer 119 H 120 L CH1 Gain temperature set value 121 H to 132 L CH4 Gain temperature set value 133 H 134 Extended averaging processing specification 135 to n System area Use prohibited 147 Conversion setting for disconnection 148 R W detection 149 System area Use prohibited 5 40 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD G Address decimal Read write i 150 CH1 Conversion setting value for L 151 disconnection detection H to 15
262. leration time and deceleration time Acceleration time and deceleration time u altema can be set independently can be set independently Acceleration 4 patterns each 4 patterns each deceleration Settin Switching is possible i a M POSSI 1 to 8388608ms time range 1 to 65535ms or 1 to 8388608ms Sudden stop Changeover between 1 to 65535ms 1 to 8388608ms deceleration 1 to 8388608ms possible Electronic gears backlash Electronic gears backlash Compensation Refer to 3 compensation near pass compensation near pass To check details of Error display 17 segment LED Error LED x diagnostics use GX Developer The start history at History data storage Start Provided Provided error is integrated error warning 4 types 16 items module 3 types 16 items axis into the start history ae Flash ROM Flash ROM Data storage destination battery less backup battery less backup 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible A1SD75P1 A1SD75P2 A1S8D75P3 QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat Precautions for replacement QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility Connection connector 10136 3000VE Soldering type supplied A6CON1 Soldering type straight out type sold separately 10136 6000EL IDC type sold separately A6CON2 Crimping type straight out type sold separately A6CON4 Soldering type straight out diagonal
263. ll time 79 229 379 79 229 379 52 Setting for the movement amount after near point dog 80 230 380 80 230 380 ON 81 231 381 81 231 381 53 acceleration time selection 82 232 382 82 232 382 Pr 54 OPR deceleration time selection 83 233 383 83 233 383 Pr55 OP shift t 84 234 384 84 234 384 E TAE 85 235 385 85 235 385 Pr 56 OPR torque limit value 86 236 386 86 236 386 Pr 57 Speed designation during OP shift 88 238 388 88 238 388 Pr 58 Dwell time during OPR retry 89 239 389 89 239 389 8 13 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of A1SD75PO S3 Md 1 In test mode flag 450 1200 Md 2 Module name 451 ost 452 453 ed UE 454 455 OS 456 Md 4 version 457 Md 5 Clock data Hour minute 460 Md 6 Clock data Second 100ms 461 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 7 Start axis 462 to 537 1212 to 1287 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 3 Start information Md 8 Operation type 463 to 538 1213 to 1288 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 4 Start No gt Md 9 Start time Hour minute 2 E 464 to 539 1214 to 1289 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 5 Start Hour 8 Md 10 Start time Second 100ms 465 to 540 1215 t
264. lower limit error code 509 to 512 QD75MD Errors for the software stroke upper limit are integrated into one error code 507 Errors for the software stroke lower limit are integrated into one error code 508 Error codes 509 to 512 are deleted value is updated with Current value changing M code function 1 An error occurs when the designated new current value is out of the software stroke limit range 2 The M code setting value is valid during the positioning data current value changing instruction Acceleration deceleration speed control Only two word type 1 to 8388608ms can be used as the setting value for the acceleration deceleration time Stop process and restart after stop positioning operation stop 1 Peripheral side emergency stop is deleted from the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop selection Test mode fault in the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection is changed to be in the stop causes of Stop group 2 sudden stop selection 2 Stop QD75 peripheral is added to the stop causes of Stop group 3 sudden stop selection 3 Error code 100 Peripheral device stop during operation is deleted 4 Programmable controller CPU error occurrence is added to the stop causes of Stop group 2 Sudden stop selection A1SD75MLI QD75MLI READY signal X0 OFF Normal READY Not READY WDT error ON Not READY WDT error Normal READY Manual pulse g
265. lure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Mitsubishi programmable controllers must be installed in control panels Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock For wiring methods refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Startup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit or solder the battery or throw it into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ignite resulting in injury and fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock Undertightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction NCAUTION Bef
266. matic trapezoidal acceleration deceleration Automatic trapezoidal acceleration deceleration Automatic acceleration deceleration Acceleration time 2 to 9999 ms Deceleration time 2 to 9999 ms Acceleration time 2 to 9999 ms Deceleration time 2 to 9999 ms The specification has Er 1 to 2047 pulse 1 to 20479 pulse improved Upward compatibility Backlash E x compensation Error correction x x function to 10VDC 0 to 10VDC Speed command output Adjustable to set in the range of 5 to Adjustable to set in the range of 5 to 10VDC 10VDC Pulse Open collector 100kpulse s Open collector 200kpulse s The specification has frequency EHE TORK PIES ES HE 200 improved u Positioning Differential output 100kpulse s Differential output 1Mpulse s Upward compatibility feedback Connectable Open collector TTL or differential output Open collector TTL or differential output pulse input encoder type Multiplica tion The number of input feedback pulses can The number of input feedback pulses can setting be multiplied by 4 2 1 or 1 2 be multiplied by 4 2 1 or 1 2 The setting method is changed from a hardware OPR control Available 2 method Available 2 method SW PEU parameter of a CPU module The function is the same though the setting method is changed JOG operation Absolute system 4 4ms 1 Incremental system 4 5ms 1 Absolute sy
267. measured temperature measured temperature 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Measured temperature Conversion accuracy At operating ambient Temperature characteristics Per operating ambient Max temperature error at ambient temperature range er temperature 25 5 temperature variation of 1 C 55 C 0 to 600 C 3 3 219 600 to 800 C 2 3 0 13 0 B 0 4 800 to 1700 C 2 2 5 C 12 5 1700 to 1820 C 9 3 3 50 to 0 C 9 3 R 0 to 300 C 2 2 5 0 4 12 5 300 to 1600 2 2 0 0 3 9 5 1600 to 1760 C 9 3 2 50 to 0 C 9 3 3 0 to 300 C 2 2 5 0 4 12 5 300 to 1600 C 2 2 0 C 0 3 C 9 5 C 1600 to 1760 C 9 3 3 270 to 200 C 9 3 3 5 Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 5 Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 2 200 to 0 C 2 11 0 of measured temperature of measured temperature K Larger value of 0 5 C or Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 0 to 1200 C 2 0 25 of measured 9 0 C of measured temperature temperature 1200 to 1370 C 9 3 Sud 270 to 200 C 9 3 3 12 Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 5 Larger value of t0 06 C or 0 15 200 to 0 C 8 5 C of measured temperature of measured temperature E Larger value of 0 5 or Larger value of 0 06 C or 0 02 0 to 90
268. ment settings offset value CH6 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH7 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH7 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH8 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH8 Industrial shipment settings gain value 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68DAIN Address decimal Read write CH1 User range settings offset value 219 CH1 User range settings gain value 220 CH2 User range settings offset value 221 CH2 User range settings gain value 222 CH3 User range settings offset value 223 CH3 User range settings gain value 224 User range settings offset value 225 User range settings gain value 226 CH5 User range settings offset value 227 CH5 User range settings gain value 228 CH6 User range settings offset value 229 CH6 User range settings gain value 230 CH7 User range settings offset value 231 CH7 User range settings gain value 232 CH8 User range settings offset value CH8 User range settings gain value R W 3 25 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 5 A1S68DAV 3 5 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S68DAV Digital input 16 bit signed binary Setting range 2048 to 2047 Analog output 10 to 0 to 10VDC External load resistance value 2kQ to 1MQ I O characteristics Digital input value Analog output value 2000 1
269. mit switch output data setting 114 to 130 CH7 limit switch output data setting 131 to T 447 CH8 limit switch output data setting HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 3 A1SD62 E D D S1 7 3 1 Performance specifications comparison 1 Comparison between A1SD62 and QD62 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for A1SD62 NS ibility replacement 32 points 16 points The number of occupied I O Number of occupied I O points I O assignment special 32 I O assignment intelligent 16 A points has changed to 16 points points points Number of channels 2 channels Set the counting speed of 200K 100K 10K 7 the QD62 with the intelligent Counting speed switch settings 100K 10K 100K to 10K to 10KPPS O function module switch 200KPPS 100KPPS or less setting of GX Developer Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input 5VDC G a Signal level 5 signal 12VDC 2to5mA 2 6B 24VDC o 1 S 5 100KPPS 10KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS Counting input E speed Max 2 phase o input 100KPPS 7KPPS 200KPPS 100KPPS 10KPPS o Counter Since the QD62 uses 32 bit Counting 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary signed binary values E range 0 to 16 777 215 2147483648 to 2147483647 sequence prog
270. mory and No 1 to 600 data axis be set with QD75MLI The positioning data in the buffer memory is not backed up 2 The near pass function is valid only during the continuous path control A1TSD75MLI Selected with parameters QD75MLI Standard function QD75MLI does not have address pass mode If passing the positioning address continue with continuous operation However it will stop once 3 GX Configurator QP is available with SW2D5C QD75P or later version 8 24 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 3 2 Functional comparison 1 Functions deleted from the A1SD75M1 A1SD75M2 A1SD75M3 When the following functions are used with the 15075 0 change the program Deleted function Precautions for replacement Creep speed out of range error error code 208 Fast machine OPR With the QD75MLI there is no possible function for replacement Special start stop Execute it separately for the start two times In the QD75MLI the start block area on the buffer memory is expanded to five blocks 0 to 4 Each start block can be directly designated with positioning start No 7000 to 7004 Block transfer With the ATSD75MLI this interface is used to set positioning data No 101 to 600 that do not exist on the buffer memory Since all positioning data can be set in the buffer memory with the QD75MLI this function is deleted The contents are the same as the start history Therefore the QD75MLI stores only the start history These
271. mparison between the A1SD70 and the QD73A1 Function Description O Compatible Not available SD70 QD73A1 Precautions for replacement Positioning control Positioning is executed from the current position to a specified position at a specified speed Refer to Section 8 4 6 Position control mode Two phase trapezoidal positioning control Major Positioning is executed to the address specified in Da 2 Da 3 Positioning address P1 at Positioning speed V1 Da 4 then to the address specified in Positioning address P2 at Da 5 Positioning speed V2 by one positioning start signal positioning control Speed position control switch mode Operation starts according to the positioning speed set beforehand by one start signal then the operation switches to position control by Speed position switching command signal If the operation stopped by Stop signal after the input of Speed position switching command signal the positioning can be continued by Speed position mode restart signal In addition the positioning address movement amount can be changed if it is before the input of Speed position switching command signal Refer to Section 8 4 6 JOG operation Positioning is executed in the specified direction at specified speed while a JOG operation command is on Turning on the signal starts operation at a specifie
272. mpatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for Item A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA Compatibility replacement Number of analog input 4 channels module 4 channels module points 10 to 0 to 10VDC 10 to 10VDC Voltage Analog Input resistance value 1MQ Input resistance value 1MQ input 0 to 20mADC 0 to 20mADC Current Input resistance value 2500 Input resistance value 2500 Normal resolution mode 96 to 4095 4096 to 4095 12 bit binary value 1096 to 4595 9 0 to 4095 High resolution mode 384 to 16383 288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 3288 to 13787 Normal resolution High resolution s Analog mode mode t 2 inpu Digital Maximum Digital Maximum range output output resolution resolution value value 0 to 10V 25mv o625mv Digital i A resolution Analog input range t pa Resolution 0 to 16000 therthanal eu ee 0to5V 4000 125mV Oto 0 416mV e AE 10V Sm Tto 5V 12000 0 333mV Bi E d isti 1 to 5V 1 0mV A series requires characteristics 0 to 4000 10 to 10V to 2 5mV to 0 625mV o gt the support of a 10 to 10V 5 0mV 4000 16000 sequence Current 1to5V 1000 3000 program or the 4 to 20mA 4 extended to 1 0mV to 0 33
273. mpensating any given 2 points offset value gain value within the effective range The Process CPU and 7 A module be replaced without the Online module replacement Redundant CPU support this system being stopped tusction unction 1 For the A1S68TD the setting is fixed to enabled For the Q68TD G H01 HO02 the setting can be selected By setting disabled and providing an ice bath externally the cold junction temperature compensation accuracy can be improved 5 18 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 3 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro Voltage Input Module User s Manual A1S68TD Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01 Device Device Device Signal name Signal name Signal name Signal name No No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO Module ready YO A D conversion READY x1 Y1 Y1 flag X2 flag Y2 Y2 Disconnection detection X3 Y3 Y3 flag t Out of measurement Use prohibited X4 Y4 prosio Y4 range flag X5 Y5 Y5 X6 Y6 Y6 XT Y7 Wil X8 Y8 Y8 X9 Y9 peranna condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion flag setting request Use prohibited Offset gain setting mode
274. mperature Control Module 8 A1S62TCRTBW S2 Heating Cooling Temperature Control Module with Wire SH 3644 13JL36 Breakage Detection Function User s Manual Temperature Control Module Type A1S64TCTRT Temperature Control 9 Module with Disconnection Detection Function Type A1S64TCTRTBW SH 080549ENG 13JR79 User s Manual A1S64TCRT S1 Temperature Control Module A1S64TCRTBW S1 10 Temperature Control Module with Disconnection Detection Function User s 1 66756 13JL03 Manual A1S64TCTT S1 Temperature Control Module A1S64TCTTBW S1 11 Temperature Control Module with Disconnection Detection Function User s IB 66747 139891 Manual 12 Positioning Module Type A1SD70 User s Manual 1B 66367 13JE04 13 A1SD75M1 M2 M3 AD75M 1 M2 M3 Positioning Module User s Manual IB 66715 13J870 A1SD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 AD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 Positioning Module 14 1B 66716 132871 User s Manual 15 Type A1S62LS User s Manual 1B 66647 139837 16 High Speed Counter Module Type A1SD61 User s Manual 1B 66337 139674 High Speed Counter Module Type A1SD62 A1SD62E A1SD62D S1 User s 17 1B 66593 130816 Manual 18 Pulse catch module type A1SP60 User s Manual Hardware IB 66477 13JE61 19 Analog timer module type A1ST60 User s Manual Hardware IB 66479 13JE57 21 Analog input Output Module Type A1S63ADA User s Manual IB 66435 13JE30 22 Analog Input Output Module Type A1S66ADA User s Manual 1B 66819 13JL41 MELSECNET MINI S3 Master Module Type AJ71PT32 S3 AJ71T32 S3 23 1
275. n Between I O channels not isolated Between channels not isolated Between external power supply and analog I O channel not isolated 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for Item A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA i ibility replacement Dielectric withstand Between input terminal and programmable Between I O terminal and programmable controller power voltage controller power supply 500VAC 1 minute supply 500VACrms 1 minute Between input terminal and programmable Between I O terminal and programmable controller power controller power supply 500VDC 5 or higher supply 500VDC 20 or higher The Q64AD2DA Conversion speed When 1 4000 is set 4ms is hers uipped under simple loop When 1 8000 is set 7ms x ith th q e control When 1 12000 is set 9ms loop control The number of 1 Number of I O 32 points 16 points Cropeupled occupied points I O assignment special 32 points assignment intelligent 16 points Nes boen POP 9 P B changed to 16 points A D conversion part D A conversion part 18 point terminal block Connection terminal 20 point terminal block x RU TENS MM External power supply 24VDC FG connection external power supply connector 2 conversion part D A conversion part 0 3 to 0 75mm M are 0 75 to 1 5mm Wiring needs to Applic
276. n and start No is changed so that the start No can be directly checked Basic parameter1 Command in position function block start data When the programmable controller CPU is powered ON or is reset the valid value is only the first value after IPr 5 Pulse output mode the programmable controller READY signal YO turns from OFF to ON A1SD75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Detailed parameters 0 Software stroke limit invalid for Software stroke limit valid for IPr 15 Software stroke limit Factory setting manual operation manual operation valid invalid setting 1 Software stroke limit valid for Software stroke limit invalid for manual operation manual operation 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 2 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Type QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Positioning Module User s Manual Input X Output Y QD75PLIN QD75PON Signal name A1SD75PLI S3 Signal name A1SD75PL1 S3 QD75DLIN QD75DLIN A1SD75 QD75 READY X00 X00 Axis 1 Positioning start Y10 Y10 Axis 1 Start complete X01 X10 Axis 2 Positioning start Y11 Y11 Axis 2 Start complete X02 X11 Axis 3 Positioning start Y12 Y12 Axis 3 Start complete X03 X12 Axis 4 Positioning start Y13 Axis 4 Start complete X13 Axis 1 Stop Y13 Y04 Ax
277. n The temperature control module automatically sets the optimal PID constants The temperature control module constantly monitors the control status and if Self tuning function the control is affected by disturbance automatically changes and or sets PID constants for the optimum control Heating control reverse action or cooling control forward action can be selected and controlled Forward reverse action selection function Suppresses the manipulated value overshoot which frequently occurs when the set value SV is changed or the control target is changed Reduces the difference between the measured value and actual temperature to zero when these two are different due to measurement conditions etc RFB limiter function Sensor correction function Unused channel setting Sets not to execute PID operation for channels that do not perform temperature control PID control forced stop Forcibly stops an PID operation in the channel where temperature control is in process Heater disconnection detection function Measures the current that flows in the heater main circuit and detects disconnection An error of when the transistor output is off can be detected by measuring whether there is current flowing in the heater main circuit Detects errors in the control system control loop caused by a load heater Loop disconnection detection function disconnection abnormal external operation device such as magnet relay
278. n platinum RTD input Not isolated resistance tester channels Detected per channel O The number of occupied I O 16 points I A points has changed to 16 assignment intelligent 16 points points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm x Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A1S62RD3N Make sure that the conductor resistance value between the Pt100 and A1S62RD3N is 100 or less per conductor All channels become the same specifications 100 or less 1 Wire A1S62RD3N Lay wiring so that the following conditions are met 1 Conductor resistance value lt 10 Q 2 Conductor resistance value lt 10 Q 3 Conductor resistance value lt 10 Q Cables between module and platinum RTD Internal current consumption 5VDC Weight 0 27kg 0 49A 5 25 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conductor resistance value must meet the condition of 1 2 lt 2kQ or less When a 3 wire type Pt100 is connected the difference between 1 and 2 in the conductor resistance value must be 10Q or less Q64RD Wire Wire Q64RD Pt100 Recalculation of internal current consumpti
279. n speed of Q64AD to A1S64AD has become quick And then on A1S64AD the noise that did 80us channel When there is temperature drift compensation the time calculated by not import on A1S64AD can be adding 160us will be used regardless of the number of channels used imported as analog signal In this case use the averaging processing function to remove the effect of noise Voltage 15V Current x30mA Q 4 channels module 100 000 times Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels not isolated Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more 16 points The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used i Recalculation of internal current 0 63A A consumption 5VDC is required 0 18kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 2 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available A D conversion enable Specifies whether to enable or disable the A D conversion By disabling the conversion for the channels i that are not used the sampling time can be shortened The sampling processing
280. nal comparison mec 2 16 2 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison n ennemis 2 17 24 A1S68AD Replacing with the Q68AD G eee nennen nnn 2 19 2 4 1 Performance specifications comparison r 2 19 2 4 2 Functional ba quqa ra uqaqa 2 23 24 3 I O signal comparison n n 2 24 2 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison u nennen nennen 2 25 CHAPTER 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 1to3 34 3 1 List of Analog Output Module Alternative Models for Replacement 3 1 3 2 A1S62DA Replacing with the Q62DAN nnne enne nennen nnne enn nnns 3 2 3 2 1 Performance specifications comparison a r 3 2 3 2 2 Functional Ts 3 6 3 2 3 UO Signal COMPALISOM uu uuu u uu D me dca e Ra Exe epe 3 7 3 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison U U uu enn 3 8 3 3 A1lS62DA Replacing with the Q64DAN n nennen nnns 3 10 3 3 1 Performance specifications comparison a 3 10 3 3 2 Functional COMPANSOMN LLL USA 3 14 3 3 3 VO signal COMPAPISOM uuu ua dd indi de R 3 15 3 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison
281. nels module Refer to Section 6 2 6 1 Ambient temperature 25 5 Full scale x 0 3 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Full scale 0 7 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels used 1 to 100s 1MQ 0 to 100s 50 00 to 50 00 Upscale processing PID ON OFF pulse or two position control Can be set by auto tuning or self tuning 0 0 to 1000 0 0 to 3600s 0 to 3600s Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used ON OFF pulse 10 to 30VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common 0 4A 10ms O O IOI O O O IO O IO JOJO 0 1mA or less 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less O Max 1012 times number of read write from to a non volatile memory 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method only when it is not affected by noise Accuracy C full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy Example Accuracy at the input range of 38 200 0 to 400 0 C the operating ambient temperature of 35 C and the temperature process value PV of 300 C Full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature compensation accuracy 400 0 C 200 0 x 40 007 1 0 5 2 6 25 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Item Insulation output Specifications
282. ng 30135 30235 30335 8 31 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Item of A1SD75MO Buffer memory address Pr 136 Speed differential compensation 136 286 436 30136 30236 30336 Maker setting 30137 30237 30337 Pr 138 Encoder output pulses 138 288 438 30138 30238 30338 Pr 149 Servo parameter transmission 449 299 449 5 n setting Maker setting 30139 30239 30339 Maker setting 30140 30240 30340 Maker setting 30141 30241 30341 Maker setting 30142 30242 30342 Slight vibration suppression control _ _ _ 30143 30243 30343 selection 1 Slight suppression control _ _ _ 30144 30244 30344 selection 2 Induction voltage compensation 30145 30245 30345 Maker setting 30146 30246 30346 Maker setting 30147 30247 30347 Maker setting 30148 30248 30348 Gain changing selection 30149 30249 30349 Gain changing condition 30150 30250 30350 Gain changing time constant 30151 30251 30351 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor OUS 30152 30252 30352 inertia moment 2 Position loop gain 2 changing ratio 30153 30253 30353 Speed loop gain 2 changing ratio 30154 30254 30354 ied integral compensation changing _ 30155 30255 30355 Maker setting 30156 30256 30356 Maker setting 30157 30257 30357
283. nged 4 Performance specifications Changed 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Not changed A1S68TD 1 External wiring Connector wiring and cable size are changed 2 Number of slots Not changed Q68TD G H01 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer 68TD G HO2 memory addresses are changed Q o 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications The disconnection detection function is not supported Only the Q68TD G H02 supports this function 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q64RD memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Not changed A1S62RD3N 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q64RD G memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Transformer isolation is provided between channels 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q64RD memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Not changed A1S62RD4N 1 External wiring Cable size is
284. nnel can be set separately by means of the switch setting GX Works2 Outputs the analog converted Tom a digital value when Status or the CPU module CHO Output enable disable flag is forcibly turned on while the CPU module is in the STOP status Setting th li Performs scale conversion on digital input values within a u MN Mie SI sep PPSF n k limit value and scaling lower limit specified range between a D A conversion scaling upper limit 2 value as those of resolution Scaling function value and a D A conversion scaling lower limit value This mode of the A1S63ADA allows function reduces the time and effort to create a program of the Scale Conversion use of the same digital output i values as in the A1S63ADA Makes it easy to perform fine adjustments at the system startup Shift function This function adds the preset value to a digital input value and stores it into the buffer memory 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Common functions Item Description Switches resolution mode according to the application Available Not available A1S63ADA Q64AD2DA Precautions for replacement Resolution mode permitting selection of the resolution The settings of resolution O E mode are to be shared by all the channels Converts analog values that are input in CH1 and CH2 into Simple loop control Functi
285. ns Analog input module Input signals either V or input and I O characteristics are changed 5 Functional specifications Not changed A1S68AD 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer memory addresses are changed Q68AD G 4 Performance specifications Changed Conversion speed 0 5ms channel sampling cycle 10ms channel response speed 20ms 5 Functional specifications Changed Non insulation insulation between channels 4 The Q68AD G cannot be mounted on the series large type base unit Q3LIBL Q6LIBL Q55B L 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Point The existing wiring for the AnS QnAS series modules can be connected directly to the Q series modules using the upgrade tool conversion adaptor manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd MELSEC AnS QnAS MELSEC Q Conversion adaptor series module series module A1S64AD Q64AD ERNT ASQT64AD Q68ADV Analog input ERNT ASQT68AD nalog input module A1S68AD Q68ADI Q68AD G ERNT ASQT68AD G 1 Conversion adapter with fixture which cannot be mounted on the AnS size version Q large type base unit Before using the conversion adapter with fixture be sure to fasten its fixture to the base adapter or DIN rail mounting bracket using screws For MELSEC AnS QnAS small type series to Q series t
286. ntelligent function module switch setting Phase 1 phase input 2 phase input Count input 5VDC nal leve signal g 12VDC 2to5mA B 24VDC Counting 1 phase input 50KPPS 10KPPS 1 phase input 10KPPS speed 2 phase input 50 7KPPS 2 phase input 7KPPS Counting rage 32 bit signed binary 2147483648 to 2147483647 range Type UP DOWN preset counter ring counter function Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 Counter Minimum E count Ise pa 50 50 71 71 1 phase input 2 phase input Unit uis 5 Set input rise time to 5ps or less o P o Comparison pan 32 bit signed binary Magnitude range eu D comparison a contact 2 between Dog ON address lt Count value lt Set value lt count value CPU and Comparison Dog OFF address Set value count value Two points can be set te A1SD61 result b contact Set value gt count value a QD62 H02 Dog OFF address x Count value lt Dog ON address Preset Since the external input External 12 24VDC 3 6mA specifications differ check the f Function 5 12 24 VDC 2 to 5mA MORIR input Su 5VDC 5mA specifications of external device Transistor sink type Coincidence output 2 points channel output 12 24 VDC 0 5A point External 2 Output currents differ utpu ext Transistor
287. nts I points and slots are different Vacancy for 16 points intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block Two 18 point terminal blocks 22 to 18 AWG x Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Recalculation of internal 0 29A 0 33A A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 17kg 0 28kg 27 4 W x 98 H x 112 D mm 55 2 W x 98 H x 112 D mm From the previous page type Temperature Temperature measurement range measurement range s 0 to 1700 1 0 to 3000 1 B 400 to 1800 1 800 to 3000 1 0 to 400 1 0 to 1800 1 0 to 1000 0 0 to 700 0 0 1 N 0 to 1300 1 0 to 2300 1 0 to 400 0 to 700 U 200 to 200 1 300 to 400 0 0 to 600 0 0 1 0 to 400 0 to 800 L 0 to 900 0 to 1600 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 to 900 0 Ad I I PLII 0 to 1200 1 0 to 2300 1 W5Re W26Re 0 to 2300 1 0 to 3000 1 6 15 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 2 4 A1S64TCRT BW S1 platinum resistance thermometer connection Control output Specifications DEAL A1S64TCRT S1 A1S64TCRTBW S1 Transistor output Number of temperature input points 4 channels module Applicable temperature sensor Refer to Section 6 2 4 1 Indication accuracy Ambient temperature 25 5 Full scale x 0 3 1 digit mbient temperature 0 to ull scale x 0 7 1 digit Ambi 0 to 55 C Full 0 7 1 digi Sampling cycle 0 5s Constant regardless of the number of channels use
288. o 1290 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 6 Start Minute second Md 11 Error judgment 466 to 541 1216 to 1291 Md 12 Start history pointer 542 1292 Pointer number 0 to 15 S Md 13jStart axis 5 543 to 618 Md 14 Operation type 9 544 to 619 o Md 15jStart time Hour minute gt 545 to 620 D Md 16jStart time Second 100ms 546 to 621 Md 17 Error judgment 547 to 622 z Md 18 Start history pointer at error 623 Pointer number 0 to 15 Md 19 Axis in which the error occurred 624 to 684 1293 to 1353 Md 20 Axis error No 625 to 685 1294 to 1354 Md 21 Axis error occurrence time Hour minute gt QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 11JAxis error occurrence 2 626 to 686 1295 to 1355 Hour Md 22 Axis error occurrence time Second 100ms un QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 12 Axis error occurrence 627 to 687 1296 to 1356 Minute second Md 23 Error history pointer 688 1357 8 14 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of A1SD75PO S3 A1SD75PLI S3 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Common for axis 1 2 3 Common for axis 1 2 3 4 0 to 15 Pointer number Md 24 Axis in which the warning occurred 689 to 749 1358 to 1418 Md 25 Axis warning No 690 to 750 1359 to 1419 Md 26 Axis warning occurrence time Hour minute gt QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Md 16 Axis warning 2 691 to 751 1360 to 1420 occurrence 2 Hour
289. o not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it dispose of it without using Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details on battery regulations in EU member states refer to the MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Transportation Precautions CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries follow the transportation regulations Refer to QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for details of the controlled models CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurr
290. odule User s Manual 8 Q64AD2DA Configurator DA SW2D5C QADU E GX Configurator DA SH 080793ENG 13JZ25 SW2D5C QDAU E RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual 9 SH 080142 13JR31 Q64RD Q64RD G GX Configurator TI SW1D5C QTIU E Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual 10 SH 080722ENG 13JZ06 Q68RD3 G GX Configurator TI SW1D5C QTIU E Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro 11 Voltage Input Module User s Manual SH 080141 13JR30 Q64TD Q64TDV GH GX Configurator TI SW1D5C QTIU E Channel Isolated Thermocouple Input Module User s Manual 12 SH 080795ENG 13JZ26 Q68TD G H01 Q68TD G H02 GX Configurator TI SW1D5C QTIU E Temperature Control Module User s Manual 13 Q64TCTT Q64TCTTBW Q64TCRT Q64TCRTBW GX Configurator TC SH 080121 13JR21 SWOD5C QTCU E High Speed Counter Module User s Manual 14 SH 080036 13JL95 QD62 QD62E QD62D GX Configurator CT SWOD5C QCTU E High Speed Counter Module User s Manual Hardware 15 1B 0800421 13JY78 QD62 H01 QD62 H02 16 Type QD75P QD75D Positioning Module User s Manual SH 080058 13JRO9 QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 Type QD75M Positioning Module User s Manual 17 1B 0300062 1XB752 QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 18 QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual SH 081075ENG 13JZ69 Appendix 2 4 Programming tool No Manual name Manual number Model code 1 GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual SH 080373E 13JU41 5 Appendix 3 How to Chan
291. oke limit lower limit value 19 169 319 21 171 321 Pr 15 Software stroke limit selection 20 170 320 22 172 322 16 Software stroke limit valid invalid setting 21 171 321 23 173 323 22 172 322 24 174 324 Pr 17 Command in position width 23 173 323 25 175 325 18 Torque limit setting value 24 174 324 26 176 326 Pr 19 M code ON signal output timing 25 175 325 27 177 327 Pr 20 Speed switching mode 26 176 326 28 178 328 Pr 21 Interpolation speed designation method 27 177 327 29 179 329 Pr 22 Current feed value during speed control 28 178 328 30 180 330 23 Manual pulse generator selection 29 179 329 Pr 24 Logic selection for pulse output to the drive unit 30 180 330 Pr 25 Size selection for acceleration deceleration time 31 181 331 p 36 186 336 36 186 336 26 Acceleration time 1 37 187 337 37 187 337 38 188 338 38 188 338 Pr 27 Acceleration time 2 39 189 339 39 189 339 Au 40 190 340 40 190 340 Pr 28 Acceleration time 3 41 191 341 41 191 341 Au 42 192 342 42 192 342 Pr 29 Deceleration time 1 43 193 343 43 193 343 8 12 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Buffer memory address Item of A1SD75PL1 S3 15075 0 53 QD75PON QD75D
292. olation Between platinum RTD input and channel not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Between platinum RTD input and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Disconnection detection Detected per channel Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points External connection system 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal 5 33 V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible 3 4 wire type Q64RD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary 2000 to 8500 Value up to the first decimal place x 10 32 bit signed binary 200000 to 850000 Value up to the third decimal place x 1000 16 bit signed binary Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 IEC751 1983 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 Ni100 DIN 43760 1987 As the compliance standards for the applicable RTD differ change the RTD to the one that can be used with the Q64RD G 200 to 850 C 180 to 600 C 60 to 180 C g 0 025 C 40ms channel 4 channels module 1mA O Isolated area Isolation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Between temperature measuring resistor input and programmable controller power supply Between temperatu
293. oller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more Between external power supply and analog output 500VDC 20MQ or more 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied I O points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used Wiring change is required 0 34A 24VDC 20 15 Ripple spike 500mVp p or less 0 24A 2 5A 260us or less External power supply 24VDC is required 0 20kg 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Description A1S62DA Q64DAN Precautions for replacement Determines the status of analog output Analog output HOLD CLEAR values hold or clear when the function programmable controller CPU stops or an error occurs D A conversion enable disable Specifies whether to enable or disable the function D A conversion D A output enable disable Specifies whether to output the D A function conversion value or the offset value Sa REGUS OUI Obtains analog output synchronized with us output functi 7 the programmable controller CPU Q Outputs the analog value converted from a Analog output test while the digital value when CHO Output enable programmable controller CPU is disable flag is forcibly turned on while the the ST
294. on 5VDC is required 0 60A 0 17kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 4 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available Item Description A1S62RD3N Q64RD Precautions for replacement Conversion enable disable Enables disables a detection of Sd specification of each channel temperature The setting ranges of time and count averages differ Sampling averaging processing Processes the detected temperature by Check the specifications selection specified method referring to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual Stores temperature data in the buffer Detected temperature value memory storage Values up to the first decimal place and the third decimal place are stored 1 Detects a disconnection of connected The Q64RD detects Disconnection detection O O platinum RTD or a cable disconnection per channel Specification of platinum RTD i P Specifies a platinum RTD type used O y Range switching function Switches the measured temperature range O temperature f Outputs warning when the temperature Warning output function O exceeds the set temperature range Converts measured temperature value Scaling function into a percent value in set width 7 3 A module can be replaced without the Online module replacement Redundant CPU sup
295. on Operating condition 2 Us d tti leted fl s tti t Use prohibited setting comp e setting request Offset gain setting mode User range writing XA YA XA YA flag request Channel change XB YB XB YB _ Channel change request completed flag XC YC XC Use prohibited Use prohibited Maximum value Maximum value XD YD XD value reset YD minimum value reset completed flag request E A D conversion u XE Use prohibited ME XE YE Use prohibited completed flag XF YF Error flag Error clear request X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error reset X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Use prohibited 1 1 X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A1S64AD Q64AD Address decimal Address decimal Read write Read write 0 A D conversion enable disable setting 0 A D conversion enable disable setting 1 Average processing speci
296. on conversion value or the offset value Sa REGUS OUI Obtains analog output synchronized with us output functi 7 the programmable controller CPU Q Outputs the analog value converted from a Analog output test while the digital value when CHO Output enable programmable controller CPU is disable flag is forcibly turned on while the the STOP status programmable controller CPU is in the STOP status The resolution can be switched according to Resolution mode O the application The Process CPU and A module can be replaced without the Online module replacement Redundant CPU support this system being stopped unction 1 For the A1S62AD any mode 1 4000 1 8000 or 1 12000 be selected for both voltage and current input For the Q62DAN the mode is fixed at 1 4000 for both voltage and current input in normal resolution mode In high resolution mode the mode is fixed at 1 16000 when the input voltage range is 10 to 10V and the mode is fixed at 1 12000 when the input voltage range is other than 10 to 10V or current is input 3 6 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 2 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differs For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A1S62DA Q62DAN
297. on digital values and performs calculations of the function expressions expression on the converted values The calculated result is converted to the analog values to output it from CH3 Turns on while the external power supply is not supplied External power supply shutoff If each channel is set to enable the conversion and Operating detection flag condition setting request is turned on and off A D conversion o and D A conversion are not performed lea teien Records up to the 16 errors and alarms that have occurred in I o the Q64AD2DA storing them into the buffer memory eee n Collects errors and alarms that have occurred in the Q64AD2DA _ into the CPU module 7 Allows error clear through the system monitor at the occurrence Can be used by using GX Error clear function of an error Works2 Saving restoring offset gain Makes it possible to save and restore the offset gain values of values the user range setting I Corrects errors analog output values and digital output o values Online module change Allows module replacement without stopping the system 1 For the A1S63ADA both voltage and current be selected from 1 4000 1 8000 or 1 12000 in the resolution mode settings On the other hand the Q64AD2DA provides two modes normal resolution mode and high resolution mode The same digital values as those of the A1S63ADA can be used by setting the same scaling upper limit value
298. on instruction 2 2 i 2 X18 Y18 E PROM backup X18 E PROM write Y18 E PROM backup instruction completion flag instruction Default setting Default value write Default setting X19 Y19 X19 Y19 registration command completion flag registration instruction CH1 Forced PID control 2 ite fai X1A Y1A PROM write failure RR Use prohibited 6 34 stop command flag 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 Device No Signal name X1B X1C X1D Use prohibited X1E Device No Y1B Signal name CH2 Forced PID control stop command Device No X1B Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Signal name Setting change completion flag Device No Y1B Signal name Setting change instruction CH3 Forced PID control CH1 Alert occurrence CH1 PID control forced Y1C X1C Y1C stop command flag stop instruction CHA Forced PID control CH2 Alert occurrence CH2 PID control forced Y1D X1D Y1D stop command flag stop instruction CH3 Alert occurrence CH3 PID control forced Y1E 1 1 flag stop instruction Use prohibited CHA Alert occurrence flag 1 For the Q64TCTTN and Q64TCRTN XO to XF and YO to YF are applied For the Q64TCTTBWN and Q64TCRTBWN X10 to X1F and Y10 to Y1F are applied PID control forced stop instruction Depending on th
299. ons comparison Item A1S68DAI Digital input 16 bit signed binary Setting range 0 to 4096 Analog output 4 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0 to 600Q I O characteristics Digital input value Analog output value 4000 20mA 2000 12mA 0 4mA Maximum resolution of analog value 4 Overall accuracy accuracy at maximum analog output value 1 0 200 Conversion speed Within 4ms 8 channels If the frequency of access from the programmable controller CPU using the FROM TO instructions is high the speed may be increased for about 6ms Absolute maximum output Analog output points 18 8 channels module 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68DAIN Compatibility Precautions for replacement 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 0 to 20mADC External load resistance value 0 to 600Q Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Analog output range Digital input Maximum Digital input Maximum value resolution value resolution 0 to 20mA 5yA 1 66 4000 0 12000 4 to 20mA 4uA 1 3 Current E Mn dd 4000 to 4000 1 5pA 12000 to 12000 0 83pA settings Ambient temperature 25 5 C within 0 1 X20pA Ambient temperature
300. onversion scaling enable disable RW setting 211 411 611 A D conversion scaling lower limit value R W 212 412 612 A D conversion scaling upper limit value R W 213 413 613 Shifting amount to conversion value R W 214 414 614 to to to System area 219 419 619 220 420 620 Input signal error detection setting R W 221 421 621 Input signal error detection setting value R W 222 422 622 to to to System area 229 429 629 230 430 630 Logging enable disable setting R W 231 431 631 Logging cycle setting value R W 232 432 632 Logging cycle unit setting R W 233 433 633 Logging data setting R W 234 434 634 Logging points after trigger R W 235 435 635 Level trigger condition setting R W 236 436 636 Trigger data R W 237 437 637 Trigger setting value R W 238 438 638 to to to System area 299 499 699 300 500 700 Digital output value R 301 501 701 System area 302 502 702 Scaling value R 303 503 703 System area 304 504 704 Maximum digital output value R 305 505 705 System area 306 506 706 Minimum digital output value R 307 507 707 System area 308 508 708 Maximum scaling value R 309 509 709 System area 310 510 710 Minimum scaling value R 311 511 711 System area 312 512 712 Setting range R 313 513 713 A D conversion completed flag R 314 514 714 Input
301. open collector output Limit switch 12 24 VDC 0 1A point output 0 8A common Int l t ti nternal current consumption 0 35A 0 30A 5VDC Weight 0 27kg 0 11kg T 9 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 A program used before replacement can be utilized by setting the start I O signal numbers of the modules mounted to the right of the QD62 H02 so that they can be the same as that of the module before replacement Set the start number at Start XY of the I O assignment tab The number of occupied points of the QD62 H02 cannot be changed 2 The rise fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed Countable counting speeds are as follows Counting a pulse greater than t 50us may result in a miscount For the QD62 H02 Rise fall time 1 phase input 2 phase input t 5us 10KPPS 7KPPS t 500ys 500PPS 250PPS I T 10 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 2 2 Functional comparison O Available Not available QD62 Description A1SD61 QD62 H01 Precautions for replacement QD62 H02 Preset function Changes the counter present value to a specified value Disable function Terminates counting Ring counter function Repeatedly executes counting between user s setting values For Q series modules values are set with the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer Linear counter function If the count exceeds the range
302. or sensor disconnection Output off time current error detection function By backing up the buffer memory contents to E PROM the load of sequence program Data storage in E PROM 992 be reduced Alert function Monitors the process value PV and alerts the user Whether to hold or clear temperature control output when a CPU stop error occurs can Output setting at CPU stop error be selected Control function A control status can be specified by setting output signals and buffer memory Online module change A module can be changed without stopping the system An auto tuning operation formula can be set according to the selected cooling system water cooling or air cooling An temperature area can be set near the temperature where heating output and cooling Overlap dead band function output is switched An overlap area where both are output or a dead band area where neither is output Temperature conversion function Utilizing input channels that are not used for the control monitor channel 1 2 using unused channels temperature conversion can be performed Cooling method setting function Heating cooling control 6 28 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Available Not available Temperature control module Heating cooling temperature control module Q64TCTTN A1S64TCTRT A1S64TCTT S1 A1S64TCRT
303. ore performing online operations especially program modification forced output and operating status change for the running CPU module from the peripheral device connected read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Personal Handy phone System more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to this manual and the online module change section in the manual of the module compatible with online module change After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction D
304. ory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Type QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Positioning Module User s Manual area shows the differences between 15075 0 53 and QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Buffer memory address 15075 0 53 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Item of A1SD75PO S3 Pr 1 Unit setting 0 150 300 0 150 300 Pr 2 1 No of pulses per rotation Ap 1 151 301 1 151 301 Pr 3 1 Movement amount per rotation Al 2 152 302 2 152 302 Pr 4 Unit magnification Am 3 153 303 3 153 303 Pr 5 Pulse output mode 4 154 304 4 154 304 6 Rotation direction setting 5 155 305 5 155 305 a i 6 156 306 10 160 310 Pr 7 Speed limit value 7 157 307 11 161 311 LL 8 158 308 12 162 312 Pr 8 Acceleration time 0 9 159 309 13 163 313 nM 10 160 310 14 164 314 Pr 9 Deceleration time 0 11 161 311 15 165 315 12 162 312 6 156 306 Pr 10 Bias speed at start 13 163 313 7 157 307 Pr 11 Stepping motor mode selection 14 164 314 Pr 12 Backlash compensation amount 15 165 315 17 167 317 2 16 166 316 18 168 318 Pr 13 Software stroke limit upper limit value 17 467 317 19 169 319 18 168 318 20 170 320 14 Software str
305. otation once at the Machine OPR function OPR method error and perform the OPR start again JOG operation Available Available 8 21 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT A1SD75M1 A1SD75M2 A1SD75M3 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD75M1 QD75M2 QD75M4 Precautions for replacement Manual pulse generator function 1 generator axis 1 generator module On QD75MLI the manual pulse generator cannot be used by each axis independent When connecting the manual pulse generator for each axis is required use one axis module The manual pulse generator itself can use the same one The operation for inputting one pulse differs Set the parameter so that movement amount may be same Automatic trapezoidal Available Available Acceleration acceleration deceleration deceleration process S pattern acceleration Available Available deceleration Acceleration time and deceleration time Acceleration time and deceleration time Acceleration aerma can be set independently can be set independently deceleration p 4 patterns each 4 patterns each time setting Switching is possible 1 to 8388608ms range 1 to 65535ms or 1 to 8388608ms Electronic gears backlash Electronic gears backlash Compensation Refer to 2 compensation near pass 2 compensation near pass 2 To check details of
306. ous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners L NA 08220ENG D Mitsubishi Programmable Controller s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310
307. output 12 24 VDC 0 5A point External UTD 2A common A Output currents differ utpu T Transistor open collector output Limit switch out 12 24 VDC 0 1A point utpu p 0 8A common Internal current consumption ud 0 35A 0 30A 5VDC Weight 0 27kg 0 11kg HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 A program used before replacement can be utilized by setting the start I O signal numbers of the modules mounted to the right of the QD62 H01 so that they can be the same as that of the module before replacement Set the start number at Start XY of the I O assignment tab The number of occupied points of the QD62 H01 cannot be changed 2 The rise fall time of a pulse affects the counting speed Countable counting speeds are as follows Counting a pulse greater than t 50us may result in a miscount For the QD62 H1 Common to 1 phase input 2 Rise fall time phase input t 5ps SOKPPS 50us 5KPPS HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 Comparison between A1SD61 and QD62 H02 A1SD61 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD62 H02 Precautions for replacement Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points 1 Number of channels 1 channel 2 channels Counting speed switch settings 50K 10K 10K Set 2 at the i
308. owever the utility package allows not only for the followings to do but also reduces sequence programs Initial setting is possible without a program The auto refresh setting allows to read write buffer memory data of intelligent function module automatically from to the CPU device memory Checking of the setting status or operating status of intelligent function module is simplified 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 Precautions for Transition from AnS QnAS Series to Q Series 1 Be sure to confirm its functions specifications and instructions by referring the manual of the corresponding Q series module prior to use 2 Be sure to check the operation of whole system before the actual operation 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 1 List of Analog Input Module Alternative Models for Replacement AnS QnAS series Transition to Q series Product Model Remarks Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer A1S64AD Q64AD memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Not changed 5 Functional specifications Not changed 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q68ADV memory addresses are changed Q68ADI 4 Performance specificatio
309. parison eene ener 5 53 5 7 2 Functional comparison 5 57 5 7 3 Signial compal SON 5 58 5 7 4 Buffer memory address comparison U u 5 59 CHAPTER 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT 6 1to06 53 6 1 List of Heating cooling Temperature Control Module Temperature Control Module Alternative Models for Replacement uuu c et bec ene en e daten a daa go RA UR UR ERA T RN RE o Ya da RE 6 1 6 2 Performance Specifications Comparison 6 4 6 2 1 A1S64TCTRT BW thermocouple connection a 6 4 6 2 2 A1S64TCTRT BW platinum resistance thermometer connection 6 8 6 23 A1S641CTI BW S1 uu oet pe Hl ess t i 6 12 6 2 4 1564 1 platinum resistance thermometer connection 6 16 6 2 5 A1S62TCTT BW S2 6 20 62 6 ATSO2IGRT BWYSA2 e ETE PR Hu ee Rd 6 24 0 3 Functional Comparlson u u I u nda den G uu LA E M 6 28 6 4 VO Signal CombparlsOn uru uuu pete eee e eae e dece ca
310. patible 5 Function specifications Partly changed Example Manual pulse generator 1 axis gt 1 module 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT AnS series Positioning module A1SD75M3 QD75M4 Transition to Q series 1 External wiring Connector and wiring are changed 2 Number of slots Not changed 3 Program I O signals and buffer memory assignment are changed The entire program is reviewed according to the specifications change 4 Performance specifications Upward compatible 5 Function specifications Partly changed Example Manual pulse generator 1 axis 1 module 1 The QD75PLIN and QD75DLIN are the upward compatibility for the 75 and QD75DLI and their programs the same when they are replaced Change the sequence program as necessary with checking the processing timing because performances such as the starting time and data update cycle are improved When the A1SD70 being used in the setting that the negative voltage is output when the positioning address increases is replaced with the QD73A1 the wiring change between the A1SD70 and an encoder is required For details refer to Section 8 4 6 The production of the A1SD71 S2 S7 was discontinued at the end of October 2004 For details refer to the technical bulletin T12 0016 When replacing the existing A1SD71 S2 S7 with QD75P QD75D refer to the technical bulletin FA A 0060 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8
311. per limit value 65 H 66 L CH2 Scaling range lower limit value 67 H 68 L CH2 Scaling range upper limit value 69 H 70 L CH3 Scaling range lower limit value 71 H 72 ao L CH3 Scaling range upper limit value 73 H 74 5 L CH4 Scaling range lower limit value 75 H 76 L CH4 Scaling range upper limit value 77 H 78 CH1 Scaling width lower limit value 79 CH1 Scaling width upper limit value 80 CH2 Scaling width lower limit value 81 CH2 Scaling width upper limit value R W 82 CH3 Scaling width lower limit value 83 CH3 Scaling width upper limit value 84 CH4 Scaling width lower limit value 85 CH4 Scaling width upper limit value 86 CH1 Warning output lower lower limit L 87 value H 88 CH1 Warning output lower upper limit L 89 value H 90 CH1 Warning output upper lower limit L 91 value H 92 CH1 Warning output upper upper limit L 93 value H to 116 CH4 Warning output upper upper limit L 117 value H 118 L CH1 Offset temperature set value 119 H 120 L CH1 Gain temperature set value 121 H 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 31 Q64RD Read write Address decimal 132 CH4 Gain temperature set value H 133 H R W 134 Extended averaging processing specification 135 to 147 System area Use prohibited Conversion setting for d
312. port this system being stopped function 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 4 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A1S62RD3N Q64RD Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO WDT error flag YO X1 READY flag Y1 X2 Write data error flag Y CH1 Disconnection X3 detected flag CH2 Disconnection 4 Y4 detected flag X5 5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 Use prohibited 8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE YE Use prohibited YF X10 Y10 x11 Y11 X12 Y12 Error code reset flag X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Use prohibited X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F Device Signal name Signal name No Module ready YO Use prohibited CH1 Offset gain setting Y1 CH1 Offset setting status signal request CH2 Offset gain setting Y2 CH1 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset gain setting Y3 CH2 Offset setting status signal request CHA Offset gain setting Y4 CH2 Gain setting request status signal CH3 Offset setting Y5 request Y6 CH3 Gain setting request Use prohibited Offset setting YT request Y8 CH4 Gain setting request Opera
313. ppendix 1 Spare Parts Storage uuu Tu uama aaa aqya aaia Adana ie nennen erre senses nnns App 1 Appendix 2 Relevant Manuals App 2 Appendix 2 1 Replacement handbooks a App 2 Appendix 2 2 AnS series a App 3 Appendix 2 3 Q Series uuu App 4 Appendix 2 4 Programming tool dedu ne e e n Led d e x ERR A FARA Rada ERA RR Re App 5 Appendix How to Change Resolution After Analog I O Module is Replaced App 6 A 12 For the products shown in handbooks for transition catalogues and transition examples refer to the manuals for the relevant products and check the detailed specifications precautions for use and restrictions before replacement For the products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd and other companies refer to the catalogue for each product and check the detailed specifications precautions for use and restrictions before use The manuals and catalogues for our products products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd and Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd are shown in Appendix of each handbook for transition Products shown in this handbook are subject to change without notice A 13 GENERIC
314. prohibited TES Y5 Y6 YT High resolution mode Y8 status flag x9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition Use prohibited setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode User range writing XA YA flag request Channel change XB YB Channel change request completed flag XC Use prohibited YC Use prohibited Maximum value Maximum value XD minimum value reset YD minimum value reset completed flag request A D conversion 2 XE YE Use prohibited completed flag Error reset WDT error flag X1 A D conversion READY Y1 X2 Error flag X3 Y3 X4 Y4 X5 5 X6 Y6 X7 Y7 x8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE Use prohibited ME XF YF X10 Y10 X11 Y11 X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 1 1 X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F Use prohibited Error flag Error clear request 2 16 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A1S68AD Q68ADVII Address Address decimal decimal Read write Read write
315. proportional band Ph setting 24 44 Integral time 1 setting 25 45 Derivative time D setting R W 26 46 Alert set value 1 27 47 Alert set value 2 28 48 Alert set value 3 29 49 Alert set value 4 2A 4A Heating upper limit output limiter 2B 4B System area Use prohibited 2C 4 Output variation limiter setting 2D 4D Sensor correction value setting 2E 4E Adjustment sensitivity dead band setting 2F 4F Heating control output cycle setting 30 50 Primary delay digital filter setting RIW 31 51 Control response parameter 32 52 AUTO MAN mode shift 33 53 MAN output setting 34 54 Setting change rate limiter 35 55 AT bias 36 56 System area Use prohibited 37 57 Upper limit setting limiter RIW 38 58 Lower limit setting limiter 39 59 System area Use prohibited 3A 5A Heater disconnection alert setting R W 3B 5B Y System area Use prohibited 3C 5C 3D 5D Unused channel setting R W 1 For the Q64TCRT BW N this area is prohibited to use 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE A1S64TCTRT BW Read write CH2 3E 5E T System area Use prohibited 3F 5F AO Mode setting for Alert alarm 1 A1 Mode setting for Alert alarm 2 A2 Mode setting for Alert alarm 3 A3 Mode setting for Alert alarm 4 4 Alert dead band setting A5 Alert delay count Ae Heater disconnection output off time current error detect
316. put or malfunction 1 Configure external safety circuits such as an emergency stop circuit protection circuit and protective interlock circuit for forward reverse operation or upper lower limit positioning 2 When the programmable controller detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting Note that the AnS series module will turn off the output in either of cases a and b a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage Output OFF Output OFF protection equipment b The CPU module self diagnosis functions such Hold or turn off all output as the watchdog timer error detect problems according to the parameter Output OFF setting Also all outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part such as an I O control part where the CPU module cannot detect any error To ensure safety operation in such a case provide a safety mechanism or a fail safe circuit external to the programmable controller For a fail safe circuit example refer to LOADING AND INSTALLATION in the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of an output module relay or transistor Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident 1 Design Precaut
317. r CPUs QnASCPU Generic term for MELSEC QnAS series programmable controller CPUs Generic term for MELSEC QnA series and MELSEC QnAS series programmable controller QnA QnASCPU CPUs Generic term for A series AnS series QnA series and QnAS series programmable controller A AnS QnA QnASCPU CPUs QCPU Generic term for MELSEC Q series programmable controller CPUs 14 Memo 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 1 1 Advantages of Transition to Q Series Advantage 1 Advanced performance of equipments In addition to the processing performance improvement for Q series CPU the processing speed for Q series intelligent function module is also increased so that the equipment capability to improve is possible Advantage 2 Compact control panel and space saving As the Q series needs only 1 4 mounting area of the AnS QnAS series it is possible to create more compact control panel Advantage 3 Improved operating efficiency for programming and monitor Q series intelligent function module prepares the following utility package GX Configurator O sold separately Example GX Configurator AD Analog input module setting monitoring tool GX Configurator DA Analog output module setting monitoring tool GX Configurator TI Temperature input module setting monitoring tool GX Configurator CT High speed counter module setting monitoring tool GX Configurator QP Positioning module setting monitoring tool Using the utility package is not a must H
318. r ERR 2 Encoder phase A oA oA Encoder phase B oB Encoder phase 2 oZ oZ BUSY BUSY BUSY The contents indicated with ZERO of the QD73A1 differ from the ones Zero adjustment status ZERO indicated with ZERO of the A1SD70 Gain adjustment status GAIN Servo READY SV RDY Can be checked with an input signal X1B Near zero point dog DOG Can be checked with an input signal X1C Stop STOP Can be checked with an input signal X1D Upper limit LS FLS Can be checked with an input signal X1E Lower limit LS RLS Can be checked with an input signal X1F In Position IN POS Can be checked with an input signal X16 Error counter polarity POLE Can be checked with buffer memory addresses 106 107 The LED POLE of the A1SD70 indicates ON when the deviation counter Error counter value 2 MUN value is and indicates OFF when the deviation counter value is PC READY PC RDY Check the on off status of an output signal Y2D with a device monitor Can be checked with an input signal X12 Zero return request ZERO The contents indicated with ZERO of the A1SD70 differ from the ones indicated with ZERO of the QD73A1 Excessive error EEX Can be checked with an input signal X17 WDT error WDT ERR Can be checked with an input signal X10 During velocity operation V MODE Can be checked with an input signal X2D 3 The I O signals shown in the table are the ones when the QD73A1 is mounted on the slo
319. r less ON OFF 2ms or less Number of writes to 2 6 20 Max 100 000 times 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Specifications Q64TCTTN Q64TCTTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Transistor output O 4 channels module Refer to Section 6 2 5 1 Ambient temperature 25 5 C Full scale x 0 3 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Full scale x 0 7 Within 1 0 C 1 Within 2 0 C 1 Within 3 0 C 1 0 55 Constant regardless of the number of channels used 1 to 100s 1MQ 0 to 100s 50 00 to 50 00 Upscale processing PID ON OFF pulse or two position control O O O O O O Can be set by auto tuning or self tuning 0 0 to 1000 0 0 to 3600s 0 to 3600s Within the temperature range set for the temperature sensor to be used ON OFF pulse 10 to 30VDC 0 1A point 0 4A common 0 4A 10ms JO O OJO O O O O 0 1mA or less 1 0VDC TYP at 0 1A 2 5VDC MAX at 0 1A OFF ON 2ms or less ON OFF 2ms or less O Max 1012 times number of read write from to a non volatile memory 1 Calculate the accuracy in the following method only when it is not affected by noise Accuracy C full scale x indication accuracy cold junction temperature comp
320. r memory address comparison u u enne 7 14 3 JATSDO2Z E D D S1 u uu eet ene eee ce ie ra es d ed 7 15 7 3 1 Performance specifications comparison r 7 15 7 3 2 Functional c mparisON ene eee T HN OE Ene 7 23 7 3 3 UO signal Comparison sisi 2 3 fer i u M aget eei pepe ei S 7 24 7 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison treet eee teeta nennen enne nene 7 26 CHAPTER 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 1to 8 55 8 1 List of Positioning Module Alternative Models for Replacement 8 1 8 2 15075 1 53 2 53 53 oo ceccccccccecseccceeeeeceneeeeeecseeeeeeesecneeeeessensaeeeesceneaaeesseeesaeeessseaaeeeseseseeeess 8 3 8 2 1 Performance specifications comparison r 8 3 8 2 2 Functional comparison r nnsssssssssssssssssassa 8 8 8 2 3 signal u 2 iicet tete tienen tha eunt there da Ea don une i sk eR Re dad RAS 8 11 8 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison sse eem ennemis 8 12 8 2 5 External interface specifications comparison a 8 20 8 3 ATSD75M1 M2 MG une mou m aD a had adn id dd qx d dd Ga d Ad daa dd Da ad lasu Ra 8 21 8 3 1 Performance specifications comparison
321. ram needs to 5 be changed Type UP DOWN preset counter ring counter function T 15 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Compat Precautions for Item A1SD62 QD62 ibility replacement Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 k 200KPPS 2 52 5 Unit us Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 1 25 UN 100KPPS Unit us Counter Minimum phase difference 2 phase input 2 5us o 5 20 100 2 10KPPS o 5 1 phase input 50 50 9 Unit us 5050 Unit us 7 8 1 phase input Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 25us e 142 10KPPS 2 phase input Unit us 2 phase input Magnitude Comparison pan 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary range between CPU ie h Set value lt count value igh i 5 6 Set value count value O Soe ae Ko Set value gt count value module Te Preset 5 12 24 VDC 2 to 5mA xternal inpu Function start 5 12 24VDC 2 to 5mA O Transistor sink type output inci External output dut 12 24 VDC 0 5A point 2A common O utpu 1 point channel 2 points channel Recalculation of internal Internal current consumption 0 3A current consumption 5VDC 5VDC is required Weig
322. ransition related products manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd or Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd contact your local sales office or representative 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 2 A1S64AD 2 2 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S64AD f Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input Current 20 to 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 16 bit signed binary When 1 4000 is set 4096 to 4095 When 1 8000 is set 8192 to 8191 When 1 12000 is set 12288 to 12287 Digital output Item Specifications I O characteristics Digital output value when gain 5V 20mA offset OV OmA Analog input 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 10V 4000 8000 12000 I O characteristics 5V or 20 2000 4000 6000 OV or OMA 0 0 0 5V or 20mA 2000 4000 6000 10V 4000 8000 12000 Analog input 1 4000 1 8000 1 12000 Maximum resolution Maximum resolution Voltage input 2 5mV 1 25mV 0 83mV Current input 5yA 1 When 1 4000 is set 40 When 1 8000 is set 80 When 12000 is set 120 Overall accuracy Accuracy in respect to maximum digital output value 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64AD Compatibility Precautions for replacement 10 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ 0 to 20mADC Inpu
323. re measuring resistor input channels Photocoupler isolation or more using 500VDC insulation resistance tester 1780VACrms 3 cycles Altitude 2000m Transformer isolation Detected per channel 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points The number of occupied points has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm Wiring change is required 1 25 3 R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used 1 Accuracy accuracy relative to the maximum value in the selection range of the Q64RD G is as follows Accuracy Reference accuracy Specifications Within 0 04 Pt100 JPt100 20 to 120 C 70ppm C 0 0070 Pt100 JPt100 0 to 200 C 5 0 0065 Temperature coefficient icient Pt100 JPt100 200 to 850 C 50 0 0050 Ni100 60 to 180 C C C C C 70ppm C 0 0070 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A1S62RD3N Make sure that the conductor resistance value between the Pt100 and A1S62RD3N is 100 or less per conductor All channels become the same specifications 109 or less 1 Wire A1S62RD3N Lay wiring so that the following conditions are met 1 Conductor resistance value lt 10 Q 2 Conductor resistance value lt 10 0 3 Conductor resistance value lt 10 Q Cab
324. re drift compensation function Errors arising from changes in the ambient temperature of the module are automatically compensated for to improve conversion accuracy The temperature drift compensation function can be performed at A D conversion time for all channels 160us Resolution mode The resolution can be switched according to the application The resolution mode setting is applicable to all channels Online module change A module can be replaced without the system being stopped 1 For the A1S68AD the resolution is 1 4000 fixed For the Q68ADV I the resolution for both voltage and current is 1 4000 in normal resolution mode In high resolution mode the resolution for the voltage range 10 to 0 to 10V is 1 16000 and the resolution for the voltage in other ranges and current is 1 12000 2 15 The Process CPU and Redundant CPU support this function 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 3 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the Analog Digital Converter Module User s Manual A1S68AD Q68ADV I Signal name Signal name Signal name Module READY Temperature drift Signal name x1 Y1 compensation flag Y2 Y3 Y4 JU hibited Use
325. ress Address decimal Read write decimal Read write 1 e P t val tti 0 0 2 Preset value settin L R W reset value settin valu i 2 34 B H R W 1 33 s H 3 5 Pulse input mod tti 2 4 L 3 ulse input mode setting 3 Presentvaiie L R 4 Present value L R 2 28 valu 5 37 H 4 36 e L Coincidence output point set No 1 6 38 Coincidence output point setting L 5 37 H RW 7 39 No 1 H 6 38 L R W Coincidence output point set No 2 L 8 40 Counter function selection setting if 39 H 9 41 Sampling periodic time setting 8 40 Overflow detection flag R 10 42 External preset detection reset command 9 41 Counter function selection setting P Point No 2 coincidence signal reset Ww m R W 11 431 10 42 Sampling periodic setting command 12 1 44 Coincidence output point setting L BIN 11 43 Sampling periodic counter flag 1 1 2 H 12 44 L 18 3 Latch count value 0 14 46 L 13 45 H Latch count value 15 47 H 14 46 0 Sampling count value R 16 48 L 15 47 H Sampling count value 17 49 16 48 Periodic pulse count previous L 18 50 Periodic pulse count previous L R 17 49 value H 19 51 value 18 50 uu L Periodic pulse count present value 20 52 IE L 19 51 H Periodic pulse count present value 21 53 H 20 52 a L Ring counter minimum value Sampling periodic counter flag 21 53 H RW 22 54 L Ring counter maximum
326. rforms linear correction by individually compensating any given 2 points offset value gain value within the effective range Online module replacement A module can be replaced without the system being stopped 1 For the A1S68TD the setting is fixed to enabled For the Q64TD the setting can be selected By setting disabled and providing an ice bath externally the cold junction temperature compensation accuracy can be improved The Process CPU and Redundant CPU support this function 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 2 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals and sequence program refer to the Thermocouple Input Module Channel Isolated Thermocouple Micro Voltage Input Module User s Manual A1S68TD Q64TD Device Device Signal name Signal name No No XO Watchdog timer error flag YO A D conversion READY x1 Y1 flag 2 Error flag Y Disconnection detection X3 flag Out of measurement 4 Y4 range flag X5 5 X6 Y6 X7 M Use prohibited X8 Y8 X9 Y9 XA YA XB YB XC YC XD YD XE YE XF YF Use prohibited X10 Y10 Set lower upper limit x11 Y11 value update instruction X12 Y12 Error reset X13 Y13 X14 Y14 X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 X19 Y19 Use prohibited X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F
327. ring Cable size is changed A1S62TCTT S2 2 Number of slots Not changed Therm couble 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals P Q64TCTTN and buffer memory addresses are changed heating cooling 4 Performance specifications Changed 2CH module 4CH control module 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed 2 slots are required I O assignment A1S62TCTTBW S2 16 empty points for the first half 16 intelligent Thermocouple points for the second half Q64TCTTBWN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals heating cooling control and buffer memory addresses are changed 4 Performance specifications Changed 2CH module 4CH module 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE AnS QnAS series Transition to Q series Product Model Remark Restrictions A1S62TCRT S2 1 External wiring Cable size is changed Platinum 2 Number of slots Not changed resistance 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals Q64TCRTN and buffer memory addresses are changed thermometer 4 Performance specifications Changed 2CH module 4CH Heating cooling heating cooling module temperature control control 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 module 1 External wiring Cable
328. rminal which has been used for the A1S61 or A1SD62 E D D S1 requires the change of the external wiring method as in a b a Using the upgrade tool a conversion adaptor The existing wiring for A1S61 and A1SD62 E D D S1 can be connected directly to the Q series modules using the upgrade tool conversion adaptor manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd MELSEC AnS QnAS MELSEC Q Product Conversion adaptor series module series module QD62 A1SD61 QD62 H01 ERNT ASQTD61 QD62 H02 High speed counter module A1SD62 QD62 ES A1SD62E QD62E A1SD62D QD62D ERNT ASQTD62D 1 Conversion adapter with fixture Before using the conversion adapter with fixture be sure to fasten its fixture to the base adapter or DIN rail mounting bracket using screws HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT b Using the connector terminal block converter module Used for replacement when the Q series large type base unit and the conversion adapters manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd cannot be used due to the restrictions such as a system configuration and an installation location I O cables with solderless terminal of the existing module can be continuously used without being aware of the existing wire size by rewiring the I O cables with solderless terminal to the connector terminal block converter module and connecting them by dedicated cables This method therefore is helpful when t
329. rnal current consumption 5VDC 0 40A Weight 0 27kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q68ADV Q68ADI Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conversion speed of Q68ADV I to A1S68AD has become quick And 80us channel then on A1S68AD the noise that did When there is temperature drift compensation the time calculated by adding 160us not import A1S68AD be will be used regardless of the number of channels used imported as analog signal In this case use the averaging processing function to remove the effect of noise 15V 30mA 8 channels module 100 000 times Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels isolated Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute 9 Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 20MQ or more 16 points The number of occupied I O points I O assignment intelligent 16 points B has changed to 16 points 18 point terminal block x 0 3 to 0 75mm Wiring change is required R1 25 3 Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot be used x Recalculation of internal current 0 64A 0 64A A consumption 5VDC is required 0 19kg 0 19kg 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMEN
330. rogram refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A1S62DA Q62DAN Address decimal 0 Analog output enable disable channel CH1 digital value CH2 digital value Read write R W Address D A conversion enable disable Read write CH1 Digital value R W CH2 Digital value System area Use prohibited o CO N BR OO N Resolution of digital value E e CH1 set value check code Em CH2 set value check code R W System area Use prohibited CH1 Set value check code es E NI AJON 3 8 System area Use prohibited CH2 Set value check code System area Use prohibited Error code Setting range CH1 and CH2 System area Use prohibited Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Offset gain setting mode Gain specification R W Offset gain adjustment value specification System area Use prohibited Mode switching setting R W System area Use prohibited Pass data classification setting R W System area Use prohibited CH1 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH1 Industrial shipment settings gain value CH2 Industrial shipment settings offset value CH2 Industrial shipment settings gain value R W CH1 User range settings offset value CH1 User range settings gain value
331. rs The error reset enables to perform the flash write Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points 32 points I O assignment intelligent 32 points Number of module occupied slots 1 1 Weight 0 35kg QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N 0 14kg 0 14kg 0 16kg QD75D4N QD75D2N QD75D4N 0 15kg 0 15kg 0 16kg 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT A1SD75P1 A1SD75P2 53 A1SD75P3 O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N Compat QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N ibility Precautions for replacement When using both the speed position switching control and the external Not available start input the STRT signal Available External start signal A integrated into CHG signal external start signal to the interrupt module and start using the direct output I O signal for External command signal External The input response external CHG signal Speed position switching signal start or speed position switching A time differs Refer devices selectable with parameters to Section 8 2 5 No INP signal When it is required In position alu INP Available for monitoring purpose Not available A for monitor monitor using the input module Signal logic Available The default logic of NE Available switching only Comman
332. rs depending the thermocouple used 16 bit signed binary 2700 to 18200 value up to the first decimal place x 10 16 bit signed binary 0 to 100 0 to 100 The concept of scaling value differs A To use the scaling values program needs to be reviewed JIS C1602 1995 As the applicable thermocouples and thermocouple compliance standards differ refer to Section 5 2 1 2 to A Tm check the specifications and use the Refer to Section 5 2 1 2 thermocouple that can be used with the Q64TD As they depend on the applicable Refer to Section 5 2 1 2 A thermocouple and measured temperature range refer to Section 5 2 1 2 to check the specifications 40ms channel Isolation Dielectric withstand Insulation Isolated area method voltage resistance Between thermocouple input and Transformer 500VDC programmable controller power supply isolation 1780VACrms 3 cycles 100MQ or more Transformer Altitude 2000m 500VDC Between thermocouple input channels isolation 10MQ or more Between cold junction compensation input Pt100 and Not isolated programmable controller power supply Available 4 channels 1 channel for Pt100 module To use 5 or more channels consider A replacing the A1S68TD with two Q64TD modules 16 points The number of occupied I O points A I O assignment intelligent 16 po
333. ry address comparison U uu a 5 20 5 4 A1S62RD3N Replacing with the Q64RD U a 5 23 5 4 1 Performance specifications comparison I 5 23 5 4 2 Functional comparison 5 27 5 4 3 LO signal COMPANISOMN EO e bip cobre e Rer aan eo epe teda aad 5 28 5 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison U U u u u nennen 5 29 5 5 A1S62RD3N Replacing with the Q64RD G sar 5 33 5 5 1 Performance specifications comparison a 5 33 5 5 2 Functional Comparison L u cnet a RE HR RR INN sma 5 37 5 5 3 VO signal comparison uyu ua akaqa wa Deae e 5 38 5 5 4 Buffer memory address comparison aa 5 39 5 6 A1S62RDA4N Replacing with the Q64RD u a 5 43 5 6 1 Performance specifications comparison 5 43 10 5 6 2 Functional comhpariSOH 5 47 5 6 3 I O signal comparison nenne nnn rennes 5 48 5 6 4 Buffer memory address comparison sse 5 49 5 7 A1S62RDAN Replacing with the Q64RD G l nennen nnne nen 5 53 5 7 1 Performance specifications com
334. s U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 6 P H Input accuracy Full scale x 1 0 Number of alert delay 3 to 255 Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connection terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 33A 0 19A 2 0 39A 0 25A 2 Weight 0 26kg 0 28kg External dimensions 34 5 W x 130 H x 93 6 D mm 2 Current value when the temperature conversion function is not used in an unused channel under heating cooling control 1 List of usable platinum resistance thermometer temperature measurement range and resolution Platinum resistance thermometer type measurement range Temperature measurement range Temperature Resolution Resolution 200 0 to 600 0 300 to 1100 1 Pt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 200 0 to 500 0 300 to 900 1 JPt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 6 10 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible WOIIQUU UI IuIIII Specifications Q64TCRTN Q64TCRTBWN Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply Transformer insulation
335. s EA 100KPPS 2 LH Unit us Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 2 5us T 19 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for replacement Compat A1SD62D ibility Counting speed switch settings 200K 10K 500K 200K 100K 10K Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 100 100 10KPPS lt 1 phase input 29 39 Unit us Po eu Unit ws t 1 phase input counter CHE put Minimum phase difference E 142 in 2 phase input 25us oO A gt lt 10KPPS m 2 phase vi input o 5 Unit us 5 1 phase input S Magnitude Comparison Bil see 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary comparison range E between E CPU and f Set value lt count value i l Comparison high speed Set value 7 count value O a result counter Set value gt count value module Preset DC input 5 12 24VDC 2 to 5mA us The QD62D supports External Differential input EIA Standard RS 422 5 12 24 VDC 2 to 5mA NM both DC input and input Function start A Differential line driver may be mi differential input connected Transistor sink type output External Coincidence 12 24VDC 0 5A point 2A common O output output 1 point channel 2 points channel Recalculation of Internal current consumpt
336. s manual for the Q68TD G H01 H02 2 Calculate the accuracy in the following method Accuracy Conversion accuracy Temperature characteristics x Operating ambient temperature variation Cold junction compensation accuracy An operating ambient temperature variation indicates a deviation of the operating ambient temperature from the 25 5 range 3 A measured temperature value is stored in the buffer memory at every 320ms 640ms regardless of the number of conversion enable channels 5 15 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 Applicable thermocouple and measured temperature range accuracy A1S68TD JIS Conversion accuracy at 25 0 5 C Temperature characteristics temperature range B 800 to 1700 2 5 0 4 C R 300 to 1600 2 C 0 3 C s 300 to 1600 2 0 3 K 0 to 1200 Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 25 of Larger value of 0 07 C or 0 02 of measured temperature measured temperature E 0 to 800 Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 25 of Larger value of 0 07 C or 0 02 of measured temperature measured temperature J 0 to 750 Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 25 of Larger value of 0 07 C or 0 02 of measured temperature measured temperature Larger value of 0 5 C or 0 25 of Larger value of 0 07 C or 0 02 of T 0 to 350 measured temperature measured temperature 5 16 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Measured temperature Q68TD G H02 Q68TD G H01
337. s no operation problem after the module is replaced with the QD75POIN QD75DON Changed function Software stroke limit function Description 1 The software stroke limit check of arc address is carried out only when a sub point is designated It is not carried out when a center point is designated 2 The software stroke limit check during speed control is carried out in the following cases When the software stroke limit is applied to the current feed value with Pr 14 and the current feed value is Pr 21 When the software stroke limit is applied to the machine feed value 3 If an attempt is made to change the current value but the designated address is out of the software stroke limit range the attempt is considered as an error and the current value is not changed 4 Error code change A1SD75PLI S3 There are 3 types of errors for each software stroke upper limit and lower limit error code 509 to 512 QD75PLIN QD75DLIN Errors for the software stroke upper limit are integrated into one error code 507 Errors for the software stroke lower limit are integrated into one error code 508 Error codes 509 to 512 are deleted updated with Current value changing M code function 1 An error occurs when the designated new current value is out of the software stroke limit range 2 The M code setting value is valid during the positioning data current value changing instruction Acceleration decel
338. set point No 2 detection reset command CH1 Counter value Y6 CH1 Counter function coincidence point No 2 selection start command CH1 Counter value small v7 CH1 Coincidence signal point No 2 No 2 reset command CH2 Counter value large Y8 CH2 Coincidence signal point No 1 No 1 reset command CH2 Counter value Y9 CH2 Preset command coincidence point No 1 CH2 Counter value small 2 Coincidence signal point No 1 enable command CH2 External preset YB CH2 Down count request detection command CH2 Counter value large YC CH2 Count enable point No 2 command CH2 Counter value YD CH2 External preset coincidence point No 2 detection reset command CH2 Counter value small YE CH2 Counter function point No 2 selection start command Fuse broken detection YF CH2 Coincidence signal No 2 reset command T 12 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT Device I Device Signal name No No Signal name X18 Y18 X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B Use prohibited Use prohibited X1C HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memory or sequence program refer to the High Speed Counter Module User s Manual A1SD61 QD62 QD62 H01 QD62 H02 Address Address decimal Read write decimal Read write ecima
339. setting 31 51 71 91 Control response parameter 32 52 72 92 AUTO MAN mode switch 33 53 73 93 Manual output setting 34 54 74 94 Setting change rate limiter 35 55 15 95 AT bias 36 56 76 96 Forward reverse action setting 37 57 77 97 Upper setting limiter 38 58 78 98 Lower setting limiter 39 59 79 99 CT selection 3A 5A 9 Heater disconnection alert setting 3B 5B 7B 9B Open loop detection time 3C 5C 7C 9C Open loop detection dead band 3D 5D 7D 9D Unused channel setting 1 For the A1S64TCRT BW S1 this area is prohibited to use 2 For the Q64TCRT BW and Q64TCRT BW N this area is prohibited to use 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE Q64TCTTN Q64TCRTN Q64TCTTBWN Q64TCRTBWN Name Read write CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 0 Write data error code 1 2 3 4 Decimal point position 5 6 7 8 Alert definition 9 A B C Temperature process value PV D E F 10 Manipulated value MV 11 12 13 14 Temperature rise judgment flag x 15 16 17 18 Transistor output flag 19 1A 1B 1 Set value SV monitor 1D Cold junction temperature process value 2 1E MAN mode shift completion flag 1F System area Use prohibited 20 40 60 80 Input range 21 41 61 81 Stop mode setting 22 42 62 82 Set value SV setting 23 43 63 83 Proportional band P setting 24 44 64 84 Integral time 1 setting 25 45 65 85 Derivat
340. sion X10 Y10 output enable flag CH2 D A conversion X11 Y11 output enable flag X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 Y14 Use prohibited X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Y18 Error reset X19 Y19 X1A Y1A X1B Y1B X1C Y1C Use prohibited X1D Y1D X1E Y1E X1F Y1F Device 8 Signal name Signal name No Module ready YO Use prohibited Y1 CH1 Output enable disable flag CH2 Output enable Y2 disable flag Y3 CH3 Output enable Use prohibited disable flag CH4 Output enable Y4 disable flag Y5 Y6 Y7 Use prohibited High resolution mode Y8 status flag Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completed flag setting request Offset gain setting mode YA User range writing flag request Channel change YB Channel change request completed flag Set value change YC Set value change completed flag request Synchronous output YD Synchronous output mode flag request Use prohibited YE Use prohibited Error flag YF Error clear request 3 15 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 3 3 4 Buffer memory address comparison Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the Digital Analog Converter Module User s Manual A1S62DA Q64DAN Address Address 7 decimal Read write ecima Read write decimal 0 Analog output enable disable channel 0 D A conv
341. size is changed Wubi multa A1S62TCRTBW S2 2 Number of slots Changed 2 slots are required I O assignment Platinum 16 empty points for the first half 16 intelligent module nM points for the second half Q64TCRTBWN 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals thermometer and buffer memory addresses are changed heating cooling 4 Performance specifications Changed 2CH module 4CH control module 5 Functional specifications Changed Refer to Section 6 3 X Point The existing wiring for the AnS QnAS series modules can be connected directly to the Q series modules using the upgrade tool conversion adaptor manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Engineering Co Ltd 1 One slot type can be mounted on the Q large type base unit Product MELSEC AnS QnAS series module MELSEC Q series module Conversion adaptor A1S64TCTT S1 Q64TCTTN ERNT ASQT64TCTT A1S64TCTRT A1S64TCRT S1 n Q64TCRTN ERNT ASQT64TCRT Temperature control module A1S64TCTRT u A1S62TCTT S2 gt Q64TCTTN ERNT ASQT62TCTT A1S64TCTRT 3 A1S62TCRT S2 Q64TCRTN ERNT ASQT62TCRT A1S64TCTRT 4 4 With the standard control and thermocouple input used 72 With the standard control and platinum resistance thermometer input used 3 With the heating cooling control and thermocouple input used 4 With the heating cooling control and platinum resistance thermometer input used 2 Two slot type
342. stem 1 2ms Incremental system 1 2ms 1 The specification has Starting time JOG operation 4 3ms JOG operation 1 2ms improved OPR near point dog method 4 4ms OPR near point dog method 1 2ms Upward compatibility OPR count method 5 1ms OPR count method 1 2ms M function x x Internal current consumption BVDC 5VDC 0 3A 5VDC 0 52A The recalculation of internal current consumption 5VDC is required 8 44 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Model A1SD70 QD73A1 Compats Precautions for ibility replacement Ext Itage An ext ly i xterna supp y voltage 15VDC 0 2A 15VDC 0 02A power supply is current terminal block not required 48 points Number of I O slots 2 slots 48 points Number of I O slots 2 slots Number of d I O ales I O assignment First half 16 points empty I O assignment First half 16 points empty O P slot Second half 32 points special slot Second half 32 points intelligent function module function module Weight 0 4kg 0 2kg 1 For the A1SD70 0 2ms is added to the starting time in two phase trapezoidal positioning mode For the QD73A1 an extra time is not added even in two phase trapezoidal positioning mode 8 45 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 4 2 Function comparison 1 Function co
343. t gain selection X1B Y1B X1C Y1C X1D Y1D Offset gain setting X1E Unusable X1F Y1F Signal name Device Signal name No 9 No d Module ready YO Use prohibited X1 CH1 Logging hold flag Y1 CH1 Logging hold request X2 CH2 Logging hold flag Y2 CH2 Logging hold request X3 CH3 Logging hold flag Y3 CH3 Logging hold request X4 CH4 Logging hold flag Y4 CH4 Logging hold request CH5 Output ble X5 Use prohibited Y5 A eae enang disable flag CH6 Output ble X6 External power off flag Y6 I ween disable flag x Input signal error detection v7 signal n Hich iu d Use prohibited X8 igh resolution mode Y8 status flag x9 Operating condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion flag setting request XA YA XB Use prohibited YB Use prohibited XC YC Maximum and minimum Maximum and minimum XD values reset completion YD values reset request flag XE A D conversion completed YE Use prohibited flag XF Error flag MES Error clear request 4 9 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 4 2 4 Buffer memory address comparison Because the assignment of buffer memory differs between the modules the sequence program needs to be changed For details on the buffer memory and the sequence program refer to Analog Input Output Module User s Manual Q64AD2DA A1S63A Add ress decimal i as Name Read write Read write decimal CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
344. t resistance value 250Q Q 16 bit signed binary Normal resolution mode 4096 to 4095 High resolution mode 12288 to 12287 16384 to 16383 If the resolution differs rec Normal resolution mode High resolution mode between AnS series and Q nalog inpu i Digital Maximum Digital Maximum A series modules it needs to be output value resolution output value resolution matched using a sequence 0 to 10V 2 5mV 0 to 16000 0 625mV program or user range 0 to 5V 0 to 4000 1 25mV 01912000 0 416mV settings Refer to Appendix 3 1 to 5V 1 0mV 0 333mV Voltage 10 to 10V 2 5mV 16000 to 16000 0 625mV U 4000 to 4000 Mon 0 375mV 12000 to 12000 0 333mV settings 0 to 20mA 5yA 1 66 4000 12000 4 to 20mA 4 1 3 Current T ser range 4000 to 4000 1 37uA 12000 to 12000 1 33 settings Normal resolution mode High resolution mode Ambient temperature Ambient temperature 0 to 55 0 to 55 Analog input Ambient Ambient With Without With Without range t t t f temperature i t i t temperature empera ure empera ure 5450C empera ure empera ure 5450C drift drift drift drift compensation compensation compensation compensation 0 to 10V 101 0 3 0 4 0 1 d 48 digits 64 digits 16 digits 10V 0 to 5V Voltage 2 1 to 5V User 0 3 0 4 0 1
345. t servo motor replacement When replacing the existing servo amplifier alone without servo motor replacement select a module in the following combination Positioning module QD75M MR J4 B RJ020 Conversion Unit for SSCNET of MR J2S B Compatible Servo Amplifier MR J4 T20 Conversion Unit for SSCNET of MR J2S B Servo amplifier Converter module For replacing servo amplifiers and servo motors data such as positioning parameters and positioning data need to be changed When replacing them contact the department in charge of Mitsubishi electric servo products For replacing the MR J2So B refer to Transition from MELSERVO J2 Super J2M Series to J4 Series Handbook L NA 03093 8 42 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT b For SSCNET cables applicable to the servo amplifiers The following tables show applicable SSCNET cables when the existing servo amplifier is continuously used Replacing positioning modules from the A1SD75M or AD75M to the QD75M requires the change of SSCNET cables Table 1 With the servo amplifier MR J J2 or J2S Between MR J J2 J2S Between QD75 and MR J Between AD75 and MR J SSCNET cable D S amplifier and MR J J2 J2S J2 J2S amplifier J2 J2S amplifier amplifier MR J2HBUSOM MR J2HBUSOM A x O x MR HBUSOM x x x MR J2CN1 MR J2CN1 A i x O x MR HBCNS x x x 1 Connector set for making the cable by user Table 2 With the servo
346. t settings gain value RAW CH1 User range settings offset value CH1 User range settings gain value CH8 User range settings offset value CH8 User range settings gain value 2 17 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Memo 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 4 A1S68AD Replacing with the Q68AD G 2 4 1 Performance specifications comparison Item A1S68AD Voltage 10 to 0 to 10VDC Input resistance value 1MQ Analog input Current 0 to 20mADC Input resistance value 2500 Digital output 16 bit signed binary 1 O characteristics I O characteristics maximum resolution Analog input Digital output 0 to 10V 0 to 4000 10V to 10V 2000 to 2000 OV to 5V or 0 to 20mA 0 to 4000 1 to 5V or 4 to 20mA 0 to 4000 Maximum resolution Analog input Digital output 0 to 10V 2 5mV 10V to 10V 5mV OV to 5V 1 25mV 1 to 5V 1 0 to 20mA 5 4 to 20mA 4 Reference Within 1 at full scale Overall accuracy Digital output value 40 accuracy Temperature coefficient 2 Maximum conversion speed sampling cycle 0 5ms channel The speed is 1ms channel on all channels if averaging processing is set even for one channel Response time S Voltage 35V Absolute maximum input current x30mA 2 19 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible
347. t terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VAC for 1 minute Between input channels 500VAC for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more Between input channels 500VDC 10MQ or more Current sensor Heater disconnection detection specifications U R D Co LTD CTL 12 S36 8 CTL 6 P H Input accuracy Full scale x 1 0 Number of alert delay 3 to 255 Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connection terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal R1 25 3 1 25 YS3 RAV1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 33A 0 42A Weight 0 27kg 0 30kg External dimensions 34 5 W x 130 H x 93 6 D mm 1 List of usable platinum resistance thermometer temperature measurement range and resolution Platinum resistance thermometer type Temperature Temperature Resolution Resolution measurement range measurement range 200 0 to 600 0 300 to 1100 1 Pt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 200 0 to 500 0 300 to 900 1 JPt100 0 1 200 0 to 200 0 300 0 to 300 0 0 1 6 18 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible WOIIQUU UI IuIIII Specific
348. t the time a Latch counter function M O O signal is input I Counts the pulses that are input during the Sampling counter function aa sampling time set The function allows storing the present value in the periodic pulse count present Periodic pulse counter function value and the previous value in the periodic pulse count previous value for each period time set Coincidence detection interrupt function T 23 HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 3 3 signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the High Speed Counter Module User s Manual A1SD62 E D D S1 QD62 E D Device Device Signal name Signal name No No CH1 Counter value large YO point No 1 CH1 Counter value X1 Y1 coincidence point No 1 CH1 Counter value small 2 Y2 point No 1 CH1 External preset X3 request detection CH2 Counter value large X4 Y4 point No 1 CH2 Counter value X5 un 5 coincidence point No 1 CH2 Counter value small X6 Y6 point No 1 CH2 External preset XT I Y7 request detection Wee pranibiied 4 4 CH1 Counter value large p xg Y8 point No 2 a CH1 Counter value X9 Y9 coincidence point No 2 CH1 Counter
349. t100 JPt100 0 to 200 C 65ppm C 0 0065 Temperature coefficient d icient Pt100 JPt100 200 to 850 C 50 0 0050 Ni100 60 to 180 C Yee 70ppm C 0 0070 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item Cable across module platinum resistance thermometer A1S62RD4N Set the total resistance value of a conductor where the current runs to 70Q or less Example Pt100 is connected to CH1 and CH2 Wire CH1 Pt100 CH2 Pt100 a1 A1S62RD4N A1 B1 b1 a2 SLD A2 B2 b2 a3 Lay wiring so that the following condition is met 1 2 3 4 lt 70 Q indicates the direction of current Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 39A Weight 5 55 0 27kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64RD G Compatibility Precautions for replacement The conductor resistance value must meet the condition of 1 2 lt 2kQ or less When a 3 wire type Pt100 is connected the difference between 1 and 2 in the conductor resistance value must be 100 or less Q64RD G Wire a1 Wire Q64RD G 2 Pt100 Recalculation of internal A current consumption 5VDC is required 0 62A 0 20kg 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 7 2 Functional comparison O
350. temperature 0 to 55 C within 0 3 voltage 30mV current 60 80us channel Voltage 12V Current 21mA 4 channels module Max 100 000 times Available 3 11 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A1S62DA Isolation method Between the output terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between channels not isolated Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment special 32 points Connected terminal 20 point terminal block Applicable wire size 0 75 to 1 5mm Applicable solderless terminal 1 25 3 1 25 YS3A V1 25 3 V1 25 YS3A Internal current consumption 0 8A 5VDC Voltage External Current power supply consumption Inrush current Weight 0 32kg N 3 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64DAN Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply photocoupler isolation Between output channels not isolated Between external power supply and analog output transformer isolation Compatibility Precautions for replacement Between the I O terminal and programmable controller power supply SOOVAC for 1 minute Between external power supply and analog output 500VAC for 1 minute Between the I O terminal and programmable contr
351. ternal power suppl 15VDC 0 2A j because an external power supply is not required Servo READY Stop signal Near point dog signal External Upper signal Input input signal Lower limit signal Speed position M switching command Pulse frequency Pulse frequency TT Open collector Open collector The specification has Positioning feedback TU 100kpulse s or less 200kpulse s or less improved ulse inpu P TTL 100kpulse s or less TTL 200kpulse s or less Upward compatibility Differential 100kpulse s or less Differential 1Mpulse s or less Servo ON Output Speed command analog signal 8 53 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 4 6 Precautions for the replacement of the A1SD70 by the QD73A1 The following shows precautions for the replacement of the A1SD70 by the QD73A1 Item A1SD70 QD73A1 Precautions Number of occupied slots 2 slots 4 48 points 48 points I O assignment Dd First half slot Empty 16 points Second half slot special function module Number of occupied I O points I O assignment First half slot Empty 16 points Second half slot Intelli 32 points 2 32 points Addresses are partly changed Buffer memory address ae 3 New items are added due to the specification change Parameter setting of a CPU module Mode settin Hardware swit
352. the OFF current value met Near point dog signal Input resistance 4 7k0 6 8kCO A w Input satisfied values Response time 4ms 1ms OFF current 1 5mA 1 0mA Check whether the OFF current value met External command signal CHG Input resistance 4 7kQ gt 6 8kQ A M satisfied values Response time 4ms 1ms ON current 3 5mA 1 0mA Manual pulse generator Input resistance 1 5k gt 1 2kQ The column of interface specifications differences is described as the form Specifications of ATSD75MLI gt Specifications of QD75MLI 2 Signal layout comparison When using with QD75MLI change the connector and wiring A1SD75MO QD75MLI Logic switching by parameter Logic Initial setting Logic switching by parameter Logic Initial setting Manual pulse generator A phase Negative logic Negative logic Not allowed i Allowed Manual pulse generator B phase multiple of 4 multiple of 4 Near Point signal Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic Allowed Stop signal Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic Allowed Upper limit Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic Allowed Lower limit Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic Allowed External start Negative logic Not allowed Negative logic Allowed Speed position switching signal 2 Negative logic Not allowed 1 The following shows comparisons about manual pulse generator A phase B phase A1SD75MLI QD75
353. the year R 1932 13 Month Day 1933 Hour Minute Day of 1934 Second the week 1935 to System area 1939 1940 Error code First two Last two 1941 digits of digits of History the year the year R 1942 14 Month Day 1943 Minute 1944 Second 087 of the week 1945 to System area 1949 1950 Error code First two Last two 1951 digits of digits of History the year the year a 1952 15 Month Day 1953 Minute 1954 second D9Y of the week 1955 to System area 1959 1960 Error code First two Last two 1961 digits of digits of History the year the year u 1962 16 Month Day 1963 Hour Minute Day of 1964 Second he week 5000 to CH1 Logging data R 14999 15000 to CH2 Logging data R 24999 25000 to CH3 Logging data R 34999 4 34 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name Read write CH4 Logging data System area 4 35 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 1 List of Temperature Input Module Alternative Models for Replacement AnS QnAS series Product Temperature input module Transition to Q series Model Model Remark Restrictions 1 External wiring Cable size is changed 2 Number of slots Changed Two modules are required 3 Program The number of occupied I O points I O signals and buffer Q64TD memory addresses are cha
354. this function detects an overflow Coincidence output function Outputs a signal when the counter present value matches the preset value No 1 and No 2 coincidence output points can be set for each channel Limit switch output function Outputs the ON OFF signal when the present value of the limit switch output command counter matches the output status preset to a channel Use the coincidence output function instead Note that the specifications such as set point are different Coincidence detection interrupt function Generates an interrupt signal to the programmable controller CPU when coincidence is detected Latch counter function Latches the present value at the time a signal is input Sampling counter function Counts the pulse that was input during the sampling time set Periodic pulse counter function T 11 The function allows storing the present value in the periodic pulse count present value and the previous value in the periodic pulse count previous value for each period time set HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT 7 2 3 I O signal comparison Sequence program change is required as the I O signals differ For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the High Speed Counter Module User s Manual A1SD61 QD62 QD62 H01 QD62 H02
355. tible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for Item A1S66ADA Q64AD2DA Compatibility replacement The number of I O Number of I O 64 points input 64 points output 64 points 16 points occupied points occupied points I O assignment output 64 points assignment intelligent 16 points has been changed to 16 points A D conversion part D A conversion part 18 point Connection terminal 20 point terminal block terminal block i x WWiringineeds to be External power supply 24VDC FG connection changed external power supply connector A D conversion part D A conversion part 0 3 to EET 0 75 to 1 25mm 0 75mm x Applicable tightening torque 39 to 59 External power supply 24VDC FG connection Refer to 1 A D conversion part D A conversion part R1 25 3 Applicable solderless 1 25 3 1 25 YS3 2 3 5 2 YS3A Solderless terminals with an insulation sleeve cannot terminal V1 25 M3 V1 25 YS3A V2 S3 V2 YS3A be used External power supply 24VDC FG connection None Volt 21 6 to 26 4VDC ee uae nee Ripple spike 500mVp_p or less External C i power gen 0 16 0 19 consumption supply Inrush The inrush current 2 5A 150us or less A NES current is higher Internal current 0 21A 0 17A consumption 5VDC Weight 0 33kg 0 23kg 1 Specifications 3mm AWG12 0 2 to 0 8mm x 2 wires Item Applicable wire size 3 Rated multi wire
356. ting condition Y9 Operating condition setting completion signal setting request Offset gain setting mode YA Userrange write request status flag Use prohibited YB Disconnection detection signal Use prohibited Warning output signal YD Conversion completion YE flag Error flag Error clear request 5 28 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT 5 4 4 Buffer memory address comparison Address decimal Sequence program change is required as the assignment of buffer memory differs For details of the buffer memories and sequence program refer to the RTD Input Module Channel Isolated RTD Input Module User s Manual A1S62RD3N Q64RD Read write Read write 0 Conversion enable disable specification Conversion enable disable setting 7 CH1 Time count moving average time 1 Averaging processing specification i constant setting R W CH2 Time count moving average time 2 CH1 Averaging time count constant setting R W 7 CH3 Time count moving average time 3 CH2 Averaging time count i constant setting CH4 Time count moving average time constant setting 5 6 System area Use prohibited 7 System area Use prohibited 8 9 Averaging processing setting R W 10 CH1 Detected temperature value 16bit R Conversion completion flag 11 CH2 Detected temperat
357. tput value R 1727 CH4 Minimum digital output value R 1728 to System area 1739 1740 CH1 Maximum scaling value R 1741 CH1 Minimum scaling value R 1742 CH2 Maximum scaling value R 1743 CH2 Minimum scaling value R 1744 CH3 Maximum scaling value R 1745 CH3 Minimum scaling value R 1746 CH4 Maximum scaling value R 1747 CH4 Minimum scaling value R 1748 to System area 1763 1764 CH5 Set value check code R 1765 CH6 Set value check code R 1766 to System area 1773 1774 CH5 Real conversion digital value R 1775 CH6 Real conversion digital value R 1776 to System area 1789 4 30 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name Read write Latest error code First two Last two 1791 digits of the digits of the year year 1792 Error time Month Day B 1793 Hour Minute 1794 Second Day of the week 1795 System area 4 31 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64AD2DA Address decimal Name Read write 1800 Latest address of error history R 1801 to System area 1809 1810 Error code First two Last two 1811 digits of digits of the year the year 1812 History 1 Error pc Day R 1813 nus Hour Minute 1814 Second D3y of the week 1815
358. ts 0 1 of a main base unit gt o a 3 QD73A1 925 l 202 5 l x 8 49 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 8 4 3 I O signals comparison Some I O signals are added a function When an additional function is used an addition or change of a sequence program is required For details of the I O signals or sequence program refer to the MELSEC Q QD73A1 Positioning Module User s Manual Input X Output Y Signal name 15070 QD73A1 Signal name A1SD70 QD73A1 Unused A Unused vog Y00 4 to to 4 to to The first half slot is Empty 16 points XOF XOF The first half slot is Empty 16 points YOF YOF WDT error H W error X10 X10 Zero gain adjustment data writing request Y1A Module READY X11 X11 Zero gain adjustment change request Y1B OPR request X12 X12 Set value change request Y1C OPR complete X13 X13 OPR start Y20 Y20 BUSY X14 X14 Absolute positioning start Y21 Y21 Positioning complete X15 X15 Forward start Y22 Y22 In position X16 X16 Reverse start Y23 Y23 Excessive error X17 X17 Forward JOG start Y24 Y24 Error detection X18 X18 Reverse JOG start Y25 Y25 Overflow X19 X19 Speed position mode restart Y26 Y26 Underflow X1A X1A Stop Y27 Y27 Servo READY X1B X1B Error reset Y28 Y28 Near point dog X1C X1C Overflow reset Y29 Y29 External stop X1D X1D Underflow reset Y2A
359. ue 23 Offset gain setting mode gain specification a Averaging process specification CH1 to 24 CH5 Digital output value R 24 R W CH4 vut Averaging process specification CH5 to 25 CH6 Digital output value 25 CH8 26 CH7 Digital output value 26 27 CH8 Digital output value 27 System area Use prohibited 28 A D conversion completed flag R W 28 29 System area Use prohibited 29 30 CH1 Maximum value 31 CH1 Minimum value to R 44 CH8 Maximum value 45 CH8 Minimum value 46 System area Use prohibited 47 Input signal error detection extended input signal error detection setting R W 48 Warning output setting 49 Input signal error detection flag 50 Warning output flag Process alarm R 51 Warning output flag Rate alarm 52 System area Use prohibited 53 Scaling enable disable setting R W 54 CH1 Scaling value to R 61 CH8 Scaling value 2 25 2 ANALOG INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q68AD G Address t Name Read write decimal 62 CH1 Scaling lower limit value 63 CH1 Scaling upper limit value to R W 76 CH8 Scaling lower limit value 77 CH8 Scaling upper limit value 78 to System area Use prohibited 85 86 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 87 CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 88 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 89 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value
360. ult to 4000 16000 e 2 Current output with the offset 4mA and 1 to 5V 3000 sequentes gain 20mA factory default 1000 program or the extended to 4500 1 0mV to 0 333mV scaling function mode 13500 1 4000 2 5mV 10V 5pA 20mA Oto 20 Oto 5yA 0 to 1 66 1 8000 1 25mV 10V 2 5 20mA 4 to 20mA 4000 4uA 12000 1 33yA Maximum resolution 1 12000 0 83mV 10V 1 7 20 2 4 to 20mA 4000 3000 3 E extended to 4500 4UyA to 1 33pA mode 13500 Analog input Normal resolution High resolution range mode mode Ambient 0 to 0 to 25 5 25 5 temperature 55 C 55 C 0 to 10V 40 4 40 1 10 to 10V om 19 P digits digits Overall accuracy 9 Oto BV accuracy at 1 g i 5 1to5V maximum analog Voltage 100mV Current x200pA gt 0 0 output value 1 to 5V 40 4 0 1 extended 16 4 0 4 0 1 mode digits digits 2 SIUE 48 12 Sem digits digits 4 to 20 to 20mA O extended mode Absolute maximum Voltage 12V Voltage 12V output Current 28mA Current 21mA When 1 4000 is set 1ms channel Conversion speed When 1 8000 is set 2ms channel 500us channel O When 1 12000 is set 3ms channel Output short ue Available Available protection Between I O terminal and programmable controller power Between input terminal and programmable supply photocoupler isolation Isolation method controller power supply photocoupler isolatio
361. unter ring counter function Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 o 2 o T 500KPPS TUI amp Counter Minimum phase difference 8 in 2 phase input O 5us Es E o S 5 a 200KPPS 525 Unit ws Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 1 25 10 100KPPS LH Unit us Minimum phase difference in 2 phase input 2 5us HIGH SPEED COUNTER MODULE REPLACEMENT A1SD62D S1 Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for replacement Counting speed switch settings 200K 10K 500K 200K 100K 10K Minimum count pulse width Duty ratio 50 100 100 10KPPS 1 phase EN input 50 50 Unit SOLEY Unit us 1 phase input Counter p input Minimum phase difference 2 phase input 25us 2 442 p p us c R 10KPPS M 2 phase o o input 5 EN Unit us S 2 phase input Magnitude Comparison 24 bit unsigned binary 32 bit signed binary o Comparison range o S between E CPU and Set value lt count value Comparison high speed Set value count value a result counter Set value gt count value module EIA Standard RS 422 A DC input 5 12 24VDC 2 to 5mA ne The QD62D supports External Preset Differential line driver level Differential input EIA Standard RS 422 MA
362. upport of a 10V 4000 8000 12000 SEI Som sequence Voltage 1000 program or ine 2 5mV 1 25mV 0 83mV extended 1 0mV to 0 333mV scaling function to 4500 5 mode 13500 Current e inp t 10pA 5yA Oto 20 Oto 5yA 0 to 1 66 410 20 4000 4pA 12000 1 33yA o 4 to 20mA 3000 XN to 1 33 to4500 F SSH mode 13500 Resolution Analog input Normal High resolution range resolution mode mode Ambient 0 to 0 to 25 5 C 25 5 temperature 55 C 55 C 0 to 10V 0 4 0 1 40 to 10V 64 16 Overall digits digits 0 accuracy 1 0657 accuracy at When 1 4000 is set 40 s Tio maximum When 1 8000 is set 80 5 analog output When 1 12000 is set 120 Lto SV 20 496 20 1 extended 16 4 value aM ha 0 4 0 1 mode digits digits ODA 48 12 digits digits 4 to 20mA 4 to 20mA O extended mode Maximum When 1 4000 is set 1ms channel conversion When 1 8000 is set 2ms channel 500us channel speed When 1 12000 is set 3ms channel Absolute Voltage 15V Voltage 15V maximum input Current 28mA Current 30mA 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT Item A1S63ADA O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Q64AD2DA Compat Precautions for
363. ure value 16bit CH1 Measured temperature value 16bit 12 CH2 Measured temperature value 16bit R 13 CH3 Measured temperature value 16bit 14 n CH4 Measured temperature value 16bit E System area Use prohibited 16 xa 17 System area Use prohibited 18 L CH1 Detected temperature value 32bit 19 H Error code R 20 CH2 Detected temperature value L Setting range 21 32bit H 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 28 System area Use prohibited 29 30 31 32 xa 5 System area Use prohibited 34 Write data error code R W 35 Conversion completed flag R 5 29 Type specification of platinum RTD 5 TEMPERATURE INPUT MODULE REPLACEMENT Q64RD Address Read write decimal 45 m 46 System area Use prohibited 47 Warning output enable disable setting R W 48 Warning output flag 49 Disconnection detection flag 50 CH1 Scaling value 51 CH2 Scaling value 52 CH3 Scaling value 53 Scaling value 54 CH1 Measured temperature value L R 55 32bit H 56 CH2 Measured temperature value L 57 32bit H 58 CH3 Measured temperature value L 59 32bit H 60 CH4 Measured temperature value L 61 32bit H 62 m L CH1 Scaling range lower limit value 63 H 64 L CH1 Scaling range up
364. us use of the simple loop control Function expressions which has been used with the A1S63ADA requires preparation of a sequence program Processing of simple loop control Function expressions with the A1S63ADA A1S63ADA mo Analog voltage current input tp AD ion acd CH3 gt Functi YDA Nd formula conversion Analog voltage current output 7 X2 Analog voltage current input Piconversionr Examples of function mm 1 y AX1 BX2 C A B C constant formula X1 CH1 Analog input value X1 X2 CH2 Analog input value erc x2 CH3 Analog output value 3 Coordinate specification CH1 Analog input CH3 Analog output Processing with the Q64AD2DA after the replacement CPU module Q64AD2DA Sequence program Reading CH1 Digital value CH1 Digital output value Analog voltage current input IL Reading CH2 Digital value A program executing 4 CH2 Digital output value Analog voltage current input same processing as the function Writing CH5 Digital value v CH5 Digital input value Analog voltage current output 4 2 4 ANALOG I O MODULE REPLACEMENT 2 A1S63ADA 4 2 1 Performance specifications comparison O Compatible A Partial change required x Incompatible Precautions for
365. utput off time current error detection delay count RIW AT Temperature rise completion range setting A8 Temperature rise completion soak time setting A9 PID continuation flag AA Heater disconnection correction function selection AB AC AD AE System area Use prohibited AF Transistor output monitor ON delay time setting RW BO CT monitor method switching B1 B2 B3 B4 Manipulated value MV for output with another analog module R B5 Resolution of the manipulated value for output with another analog module R W B6 Cold junction temperature compensation selection B7 Control switching monitor R B8 B9 BA BB Auto tuning mode selection R W BC to BF System area Use prohibited co DO E0 FO Alert 1 mode setting C1 D1 E1 1 Alert 2 mode setting C2 D2 E2 F2 Alert 3 mode setting we C3 D3 E3 F3 Alert 4 mode setting C4toCF D4toDF E4 to EF F4 to FF System area Use prohibited 100 to 107 Heater current process value R 108 to 10F CT input channel assignment setting 110 to 117 CT selection R W 118 to 11F Reference heater current value to 23E 25E 27E 29E Self tuning setting R W 23F 25F 27F 29F Self tuning flag R 6 HEATING COOLING TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODULE 6 5 4 A1S62TCTT BW S2 A1S62TCRT BW S2 and Q series modules mir Name Read write CH1 CH2 0 Write data error code 1 2 Decimal point position
366. value small YA point No 2 4 CH2 Counter value large point No 2 a CH2 Counter value YC coincidence point No 2 a CH2 Counter value small XD 2 Fuse external power XE YE cutoff detection flag XF CH1 Coincidence signal X10 Y10 reset command X11 Y11 CH1 Preset command CH1 Coincidence signal X12 Y12 enable command CH1 Down count X13 Y13 lUse prohibited oa CH1 Count enable X14 Y14 command CH1 Count value read X15 Y15 request CH1 Count function X16 Y16 selection start command CH2 Coincidence signal X17 Y17 reset command X18 Y18 CH2 Preset command flag Signal name Signal name No CH1 Coincidence signal Module ready YO No 1 reset command CH1 Counter value large Y1 CH1 Preset command point No 1 CH1 Counter value Y2 CH1 Coincidence signal coincidence point No 1 enable command CH1 Counter value small CH1 Down count point No 1 command CH1 External preset YA CH1 Count enable request detection command CH1 Counter value large Y5 CH1 External preset point No 2 detection reset command CH1 Counter value Y6 CH1 Counter function coincidence point No 2 selection start command CH1 Counter value small v7 CH1 Coincidence signal point No 2 No 2 reset command CH2 Counter value large Y8 CH2 Coincidence signal point No 1 No 1 reset command CH2 Counter value Y9 CH2 Preset command coincidence point No 1 CH2
367. wing methods 1 Using the UP DOWN switch for zero gain adjustment The function is the same as the A1SD70 though the QD73A1 uses the UP DOWN switch instead of the volumes 2 Using the buffer memory To use the buffer memory for the adjustment create a program A1SD70 The setting is configured with slide switches or encoder interface setting pin hardware setting 1 Slide switches Rotation direction accumulated pulse multiplication setting zero return direction zero return mode and zero gain adjustment mode setting clear 2 Encoder interface setting pin Mode switch Encoder output types QD73A1 The setting is configured with Switch setting in I O assignment of PLC parameter GX Developer When using GX Works2 set it with the intelligent function module switch setting Though the setting method is changed from a hardware switch to parameters of software the same level of settings are available because the function is upward compatible LED Refer to 2 8 48 8 POSITIONING MODULE REPLACEMENT 1 Example of an additional program using a buffer memory address for the speed change function H1 K80 DO K1 Change command Create the above due to the speed demand 2 Details of LEDs are shown in the table below RUN RUN Minor error ERR 1 Used for both minor errors and major errors Major erro
368. within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept oner
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Smeg SER60S3 hob 3410, 3440 et 3450 ADDOBAR USER MANUAL User`s Manual Novembre - Saint CH.8 POIDS ET MASSE – activité 1 + + + + + USER`s MANUAL - TDesigner Online Owner`s Manual Manual de usuario TC-L42ET5 TC 取扱い説明書 取扱説明書はこちら Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file